Skip to main content

Full text of "The pilgrim's progress"

See other formats


33333081197838 


I 


THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 


THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 


BY 


JOHN  BUNYAN 


AN  EDITION  FOR  CHILDREN  ARRANGED    BY 

JEAN  MARIAN  MATTHEW 


WITH  FOUR  COLOURED  AND  SEVERAL  OTHER  ILLUSTRATIONS 

H.  J.  FORD 


LONDON 
SOCIETY    FOR    PROMOTING    CHRISTIAN    KNOWLEDGE 

NEW    YORK:    THE    MACMILLAN    COMPANY 


Picture  Books  by  H.  J.  Ford 


The  Parables 

With  Coloured  Frontispiece  and  12  Black 
and  White  Illustrations.  10x7!.  78  pp. 
Pictorial  Paper  boards.  35.  6d.  net. 

SS.  Peter  and  Paul 

With  Coloured  Frontispiece  and  12  Black 
and  White  Illustrations.  10  x  7^.  62  pp. 
Pictorial  Paper  boards.  35.  6d. 

Sketches  of  English 
Church  History 

By  Elizabeth  Grierson.  With  21  Illustra- 
tions by  H.  J.  Ford.  8J  x  6|.  90  pp. 
Cloth.  35.  6d.  net. 


SOCIETY  FOR  PROMOTING  CHRISTIAN 
KNOWLEDGE 


PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


AST  -NO 

TILDf.r 


ce 

6 


TO 

PATRICK 


EDITOR'S    NOTE 

MANY  children  have  been  hindered  from  reading  the  Pilgrim's 
Progress  by   the   long  conversations,  setting    forth    various 
points  of  doctrine,  with  which  the  story  is  often  interrupted. 
In  this  edition  these  have  been  left  out  as  far  as  may  be,  and  John 
Bunyan's  beautiful  allegory,  true  for  all  time,  remains  undisturbed  in 
his  own  words. 

J.  M.  M. 


CONTENTS 

PART  I 
CHAPTER   I 

PAQB 

CHRISTIAN  SETS  OUT  ON  PILGRIMAGE        .....         3 

CHAPTER   II 

THE  WICKET-GATE  .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .15 

CHAPTER   III 

THE  HILL  DIFFICULTY    ........       24 

CHAPTER   IV 

THE  PALACE  BEAUTIFUL  .......       30 

CHAPTER   V 

THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH          ....       38 

CHAPTER   VI 

CHRISTIAN  AND  FAITHFUL         .......       48 

CHAPTER   VII 
VANITY  FAIR .       55 

CHAPTER   VIII 

DOUBTING  CASTLE  ........       64 

CHAPTER   IX 

THE  DELECTABLE  MOUNTAINS  .  .          .          .          .77 

CHAPTER  X 

THE  PASSING  OF  THE  RIVER    ........       84 

ix 


x  CONTENTS 

PART  II 
CHAPTER  I 

PAGE 

CHRISTIANA,  HER  SONS,  AND  MERCY  BECOME  PILGRIMS      .         .       93 

CHAPTER  II 
THE  INTERPRETER'S  HOUSE     .......     103 

CHAPTER   III 

MR.  GREAT-HEART  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .115 

CHAPTER   IV 

PIETY,  PRUDENCE,  AND  CHARITY      .         .         .         .         .          .124 

CHAPTER  V 

THE  Two  VALLEYS  131 


CHAPTER  VI 

GAIUS  MINE  HOST  .         .         .         .          •          •          •          .142 

CHAPTER   VII 
THE  HOUSE  OF  MNASON  .          .          •         •          •          .150 


CHAPTER   VIII 
THE  DEATH  OF  GIANT  DESPAIR        ...... 

CHAPTER   IX 

THE  ENCHANTED  GROUND        .         .         .          .          •          •         .170 

CHAPTER    X 
THE  KING'S  MESSENGER  ....     174 


LIST    OF    ILLUSTRATIONS 

PART   I 

IN  THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH  .          .         .          Frontispiece 

PAOE 

THE  MAN  PUT  HIS  FINGERS  IN  HIS  EARS  AND  RAN  ON     .         .         .         .5 

IN  THE  SLOUGH  OF  DESPOND         ........  8 

MR.  WORLDLY-WISEMAN  AND  CHRISTIAN 11 

EVANGELIST  SAVES  CHRISTIAN 13 

CHRISTIAN  AT  THE  WICKET-GATE 17 

THE  PARLOUR  UNSWEPT  ......          .  .19 

THE  WORK  OF  GRACE  INEXTINGUISHABLE 21 

TlIE  BURDEN  UNLOOSED  AT  THE  CROSS            ......  25 

CHRISTIAN  PASSES  BETWEEN  THE  LIONS 31 

CHRISTIAN  ARMED  BY  CHARITY,  PRUDENCE,  PIETY,  AND  DISCRETION        .  35 

CHRISTIAN'S  FIGHT  WITH  APOLLYON 41 

CAME  A  HAND  WITH  SOME  OF  THE  LEAVES  OF  THE  TREE  OF  LIFE            .  43 

BETWEEN  DITCH  AND  QUAG 45 

CHRISTIAN  SEES  GIANT  POPE 47 

ONE  CAME  BY  AND  BID  HIM  FORBEAR    .......  51 

THE  PILGRIMS  HAVE  TO  GO  THROUGH  VANITY  FAIR         ....  57 

THE  PILGRIMS  IMPRISONED  IN  THE  CAGE         ......  59 

THE  END  OF  FAITHFUL 63 

DEMAS  AND  HIS  SILVER  MINE         ........  67 

THE  PILGRIMS  ON  THE  BANKS  OF  THE  RIVER  OF  THE  WATER  OF  LIFE    .  69 

THE  PILGRIMS  CAUGHT  BY  GIANT  DESPAIR 73 

THE  KEY  CALLED  PROMISE                                        .  76 


xii  LIST    OF    ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAOK 

THE  PERSPECTIVE  GLASS  OF  THE  SHEPHERDS  .....       80 

"  AS  MANY  AS  I  LOVE  I  REBUKE  AND  CHASTEN  "    .          .          .          .          .82 

IN  THE  RIVER  OF  DEATH 87 

*'  BLESSED  ARE  THEY  THAT   ARE   CALLED   TO   THE   MARRIAGE  SUPPER  OF 

THE  LAMB  "  .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .          •          .89 

CHRISTIAN  AND  HOPEFUL  ARRIVE  IN  HEAVEN         .         .         .         To  face      90 

PART  II 

NOW     I     SAW     IN     MY    DREAM    THAT    THEY    WENT     ON     AND     GREAT-HEART 

BEFORE   THEM  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  To  fttCC         93 

SHE   THOUGHT   SHE   SAW  TWO   VERY   ILL-FAVOURED    ONES   STANDING   BY   HER 

BEDSIDE  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  ...          95 

THE  MAN  WITH  THE  MUCK-RAKE    .          .          .  .          .          .          .     109 

GREAT-HEART  DEFEATS  GIANT  GRIM       .         .         .         .         .         .         .119 

MERCY'S  DREAM  ...........     122 

DR.  SKILL'S  PRESCRIPTION     .........     129 

AT  THE  MONUMENT  OF  CHRISTIAN'S  FIGHT  WITH  ApOLLYON     .         .         .     133 
CHRISTIANA  FEARS  THE  FIEND       ........     135 

How  MERCY  SAW  A  LION  FOLLOWING    .         .         .         .         .         .         .137 

GIANT  MAUL  FIGHTS  HARD  WITH  GREAT-HEART       .....     139 

HOW  THEY  RESCUE  FEEBLE-MIND  FROM  SLAY-GOOD         ....     151 

THE  FIVE  ATTACK  THE  SEVEN-HEADED  MONSTER      .....     157 

THE  PILLAR  OF  SALT .161 

THE  SLAYING  OF  GIANT  DESPAIR  ........     163 

MR.  READY-TO-HALT  DANCES  WITH  MUCH-AFRAID    .....     165 

MERCY'S  DESIRE  FOR  THE  MIRROR          .......     167 

THE  POST  FROM  THE  CELESTIAL  ClTY    .          .          .          .          •          •          •     177 

CHRISTIANA  BIDS  FAREWELL  AT  THE  RIVER  OF  DEATH    .         .        To  face    178 


PART   FIRST 


THE  AUTHOR'S  APOLOGY  FOR  HIS  BOOK 

WHEN  at  the  first  I  took  my  pen  in  hand, 
Thus  for  to  write,  I  did  not  understand 
That  I  at  all  should  make  a  little  book 
In  such  a  mode  :  nay,  I  had  undertook 
To  make  another ;  which,  when  almost  done, 
Before  I  was  aware,  I  this  begun.  .  .  . 

And  now,  before  I  do  put  up  my  pen, 
I'll  show  the  profit  of  my  book,  and  then 
Commit  both  thee  and  it  unto  that  Hand 
That  pulls  the  strong  down,  and  makes  weak  ones  stand.  .  .  . 

This  book  will  make  a  traveller  of  thee, 
If  by  its  counsel  thou  wilt  ruled  be  ; 
It  will  direct  thee  to  the  Holy  Land, 
If  thou  wilt  its  direction  understand. 

• 

Yea,  it  will  make  the  slothful  active  be  ; 
The  blind  also  delightful  things  to  see. 

JOHN  BUNYAN. 


CHAPTER   I 

CHRISTIAN    SETS    OUT    ON    PILGRIMAGE 

AS   I  walked    through    the    wilderness  of   this   world,    I  lighted 
on    a    certain   place    where  was    a   den,   and   laid   me   down 
in    that    place    to    sleep ;     and    as    I    slept,    I    dreamed    a 
dream.      I   dreamed,   and,   behold,   I   saw   a   man   clothed   with   rags 
standing    in    a    certain    place,    with    his    face    from    his    own    house, 
a    book    in    his    hand,    and    a    great    burden    upon    his    back.       I 
looked,    and    saw    him   open    the   book,    and   read   therein ;    and,    as 
he    read,    he   wept    and    trembled ;    and,    not    being    able    longer   to 
contain,   he  brake  out  with  a  lamentable  cry,   saying,   "  What  shall 
I  do  ?  " 

In  this  plight,  therefore,  he  went  home,  and  restrained  himself 
as  long  as  he  could,  that  his  wife  and  children  should  not  perceive 
his  distress ;  but  he  could  not  be  silent  long,  because  that  his 
trouble  increased.  Wherefore  at  length  he  brake  his  mind  to  his 
wife  and  children,  and  thus  he  began  to  talk  to  them  :  "  O  !  my 
dear  wife,"  said  he,  "  and  you  my  children,  I,  your  dear  friend, 
am  in  myself  undone,  by  reason  of  a  burden  that  lieth  hard  upon 
me  :  moreover,  I  am  for  certain  informed  that  this  our  city  will  be 
burnt  with  fire  from  heaven ;  in  which  fearful  overthrow  both  myself, 
with  thee  my  wife,  and  you  my  sweet  babes,  shall  miserably  come  to 
ruin,  except  (the  which  yet  I  see  not)  some  way  of  escape  can  be 
found,  whereby  we  may  be  delivered."  At  this  his  relations  were 
sore  amazed ;  not  for  that  they  believed  that  what  he  had  said  to 
them  was  true,  but  because  they  thought  that  some  frenzy 
distemper  had  got  into  his  head ;  therefore,  it  drawing  towards 
night,  and  they  hoping  that  sleep  might  settle  his  brains,  Avith  all 
haste  they  got  him  to  bed.  But  the  night  was  as  troublesome  to 
him  as  the  day ;  wherefore,  instead  of  sleeping,  he  spent  it  in 
sighs  and  tears.  So,  when  the  morning  was  come,  they  would 
know  how  he  did.  He  told  them,  Worse  and  worse.  He  also 


4  THE   PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 

set  to  talking  to  them  again ;  but  they  began  to  be  hardened. 
They  also  thought  to  drive  away  his  distemper  by  harsh  and  surly 
carriage  to  him :  sometimes  they  would  deride,  sometimes  they 
would  chide,  and  sometimes  they  would  quite  neglect  him.  Where- 
fore he  began  to  retire  himself  to  his  chamber,  to  pray  for  and 
pity  them,  and  also  to  condole  his  own  misery ;  he  would  also 
walk  solitarily  in  the  fields,  sometimes  reading,  and  sometimes 
praying  ;  and  thus  for  some  days  he  spent  his  time. 

Now,  upon  a  time,  when  he  Avas  walking  in  the  fields,  he  was 
(as  he  was  wont)  reading  in  his  book,  and  greatly  distressed  in  his 
mind ;  and,  as  he  read,  he  burst  out,  as  he  had  done  before, 
crying,  "What  shall  I  do  to  be  saved?" 

I  saw  also  that  he  looked  this  way  and  that  way,  as  if  he 
would  run  ;  yet  he  stood  still,  because  he  could  not  tell  which  way 
to  go.  I  looked  then,  and  saw  a  man  named  Evangelist  coming 
to  him,  and  asked,  "  Wherefore  dost  thou  cry  ?  " 

He  answered,  Sir,  I  perceive,  by  the  book  in  my  hand,  that  I 
am  condemned  to  die,  and  after  that  to  come  to  judgment ;  and 
I  find  that  I  am  not  willing  to  do  the  first,  nor  able  to  do  the 
second. 

Then  said  Evangelist,  Why  not  willing  to  die,  since  this  life  is 
attended  with  so  many  evils  ?  The  man  answered,  Because  I  fear 
that  this  burden  that  is  upon  my  back  will  sink  me  lower  than  the 
grave. 

Then  said  Evangelist,  If  this  be  thy  condition,  why  standest 
thou  still  ?  He  answered,  Because  I  know  not  whither  to  go. 
Then  he  gave  him  a  parchment  roll,  and  there  was  written  within, 
"  Flee  from  the  wrath  to  come !  "  The  man  therefore  read  it, 
and  looking  upon  Evangelist  very  carefully,  said,  Whither  must  I 
flee  ?  Then  said  Evangelist,  pointing  with  his  finger  over  a  very 
wide  field,  Do  you  see  yonder  Wicket-gate  ?  The  man  said,  No. 
Then  said  the  other,  Do  you  see  yonder  shining  light  ?  He  said, 
I  think  I  do.  Then  said  Evangelist,  Keep  that  light  in  your  eye, 
and  go  up  directly  thereto,  so  shalt  thou  see  the  gate ;  at  which, 
when  thou  knockest,  it  shall  be  told  thee  what  thou  shalt  do.  So 
I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  the  man  began  to  run.  Now,  he  had 
not  run  far  from  his  own  door,  when  his  wife  and  children  per- 
ceiving it  began  to  cry  after  him  to  return;  but  the  man  put  his 
fingers  in  his  ears,  and  ran  on,  crying,  "  Life  !  life  !  eternal  life  !  !: 
So  he  looked  not  behind  him,  but  fled  towards  the  middle  of  the 
plain. 

The  neighbours  also  came  out  to  see  him  run,  and,  as  he  ran, 
some  mocked,  others  threatened,  and  some  cried  after  him  to 
return  ;  and,  among  those  that  did  so,  there  were  two  that  resolved 


*TC«.  mor\_  Jaut  Vi6  -fin go's  in.  Kii   ears 
and.  ratv  orv 


6  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

to  fetch  him  back  by  force.  The  name  of  the  one  was  Obstinate, 
and  the  name  of  the  other  Pliable.  Now,  by  this  time,  the  man 
was  got  a  good  distance  from  them ;  but,  however,  they  were 
resolved  to  pursue  him,  which  they  did,  and  in  a  little  time  they 
overtook  him.  Then  said  the  man,  "  Neighbours,  wherefore  are 
you  come  ?  "  They  said,  To  persuade  you  to  go  back  with  us. 
But  he  said,  That  can  by  no  means  be.  You  dwell,  said  he,  in 
the  City  of  Destruction  (the  place  also  where  I  was  born) :  I  see 
it  to  be  so ;  and,  dying  there,  sooner  or  later,  you  will  sink 
lower  than  the  grave:  be  content,  good  neighbours,  and  go  along 
with  me. 

Obst.  What  !  said  Obstinate,  and  leave  our  friends  and  our 
comforts  behind  us  ? 

Chr.  Yes,  said  Christian  (for  that  was  his  name),  because  that 
all  which  you  shall  forsake  is  not  to  be  compared  with  a  little  of 
that  that  I  am  seeking  to  enjoy ;  and  if  you  will  go  along  with 
me,  you  shall  fare  as  I  myself ;  for  there,  where  I  go,  is  enough  and 
to  spare.  Come  away,  and  prove  my  words. 

Obst.  What  are  the  things  you  seek,  since  you  leave  all  the 
world  to  find  them  ? 

Chr.  I  seek  an  inheritance  incorruptible,  undefiled,  and  that 
fadeth  not  away,  to  be  bestowed,  at  the  time  appointed,  on  them 
that  diligently  seek  it.  Read  it  so,  if  you  will,  in  my  book. 

Obst.  Tush,  said  Obstinate,  away  with  your  book ;  will  you 
go  back  with  us,  or  no  ? 

Chr.  No,  not  I,  said  the  other,  because  I  have  laid  my  hand 
to  the  plough. 

Obst.  Come  then,  neighbour  Pliable,  let  us  turn  again,  and  go 
home  without  him  :  there  is  a  company  of  these  crazy-headed 
coxcombs  that,  when  they  take  a  fancy  by  the  end,  are  wiser  in 
their  own  eyes  than  seven  men  that  can  render  a  reason. 

Pli.  Then  said  Pliable,  Don't  revile  ;  if  what  the  good  Christian 
says  is  true,  the  things  he  looks  after  are  better  than  ours ;  my 
heart  inclines  to  go  with  my  neighbour. 

Obst.  What  !  more  fools  still !  Be  ruled  by  me,  and  go  back  ; 
who  knows  whither  such  a  brain-sick  fellow  will  lead  you  ?  Go 
back,  ^o  back,  and  be  wise. 

Chr\  Nay,  but  do  thou  come  with  thy  neighbour,  Pliable ; 
there  are  such  things  to  be  had  which  I  spoke  of,  and  many  more 
glories  besides. 

Pli.  Well,  neighbour  Obstinate,  said  Pliable,  I  begin  to  come 
to  a  point ;  I  intend  to  go  along  with  this  good  man,  and  to  cast 
in  my  lot  with  him :  but,  my  good  companion,  do  you  know  the 
way  to  this  desired  place  ? 


CHRISTIAN   SETS   OUT   ON   PILGRIMAGE  7 

Chr.  I  am  directed  by  a  man,  whose  name  is  Evangelist,  to 
speed  me  to  a  little  gate  that  is  before  us,  where  we  shall  receive 
instruction  about  the  way. 

Pli.  Come,  then,  good  neighbour,  let  us  be  going.  Then  they 
went  both  together. 

Obst.  And  I  will  go  back  to  my  place,  said  Obstinate  :  I  will 
be  no  companion  of  such  misled,  fantastical  fellows. 

Now,  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  when  Obstinate  was  going 
back,  Christian  and  Pliable  went  talking  over  the  plain,  and  thus, 
they  drew  nigh  to  a  very  miry  slough,  that  was  in  the  midst  of 
the  plain  ;  and  they  being  heedless,  did  both  fall  suddenly  into  the 
bog.  The  name  of  the  slough  was  Despond.  Here,  therefore,  they 
wallowed  for  a  time,  being  grievously  bedaubed  with  dirt ;  and 
Christian,  because  of  the  burden  that  was  on  his  back,  began  to 
sink  in  the  mire. 

Pli.  Then  said  Pliable,  Ah  !  neighbour  Christian,  where  are 
you  now  ? 

Chr.    Truly,  said  Christian,  I  do  not  know. 

Pli.  At  this  Pliable  began  to  be  offended,  and  angrily  said 
to  his  fellow,  Is  this  the  happiness  you  have  told  me  all  this 
while  of  ?  If  we  have  such  ill  speed  at  our  first  setting  out,  what 
may  we  expect  betwixt  this  and  our  journey's  end  ?  May  I  get 
out  again  with  my  life,  you  shall  possess  the  brave  country  alone 
for  me.  And  with  that  he  gave  a  desperate  struggle  or  two,  and 
got  out  of  the  mire  on  that  side  of  the  slough  which  was  next 
to  his  own  house :  so  away  he  went,  and  Christian  saw  him  no 
more. 

Wherefore  Christian  was  left  to  tumble  in  the  Slough  of  Despond 
alone ;  but  still  he  endeavoured  to  struggle  to  that  side  of  the 
slough  that  was  farthest  from  his  own  house,  and  next  to  the 
Wicket-gate  ;  the  which  he  did,  but  could  not  get  out  because  of 
the  burden  that  was  upon  his  back.  But  a  man  came  to  him, 
whose  name  was  Help,  and  asked  him  what  he  did  there. 

Chr.  Sir,  said  Christian,  I  was  bid  to  go  this  way  by  a  man 
called  Evangelist,  who  directed  me  also  to  yonder  gate,  that  I 
might  escape  the  wrath  to  come ;  and,  as  I  was  going  thither,  I 
fell  in  here. 

Help.  Then  said  he,  Give  me  thy  hand.  So  he  gave  him  his 
hand,  and  he  drew  him  out,  and  set  him  upon  sound  ground,  and 
bid  him  go  on  his  way. 

Now,  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  by  this  time  Pliable  was  got 
home  to  his  house.  So  his  neighbours  came  to  visit  him :  and 
some  of  them  called  him  wise  man  for  coming  back,  and  some 
called  him  fool  for  hazarding  himself  with  Christian  ;  others,  a.gain, 


CHRISTIAN  SETS   OUT  ON  PILGRIMAGE  9 

did  mock  at  his  cowardliness,  saying,  Surely,  since  you  began  to 
venture,  I  would  not  have  been  so  base  as  to  have  given  out  for  a 
few  difficulties  :  so  Pliable  sat  sneaking  among  them.  But  at  last 
he  got  more  confidence,  and  then  they  all  turned  their  tails,  and 
began  to  deride  poor  Christian  behind  his  back.  And  thus  much 
concerning  Pliable. 

Now  as  Christian  was  walking  solitarily  by  himself,  he  espied 
one  afar  off,  come  crossing  over  the  field  to  meet  him  ;  and  their 
hap  was  to  meet  just  as  they  were  crossing  the  way  of  each 
other.  The  gentleman's  name  that  met  him  was  Mr.  Worldly 
Wiseman :  he  dwelt  in  the  town  of  Carnal  Policy,  a  very  great 
town,  and  also  hard  by  from  whence  Christian  came.  This  man, 
then,  meeting  with  Christian,  began  thus  to  enter  into  some  talk 
with  him. 

World.  How  now,  good  fellow ;  whither  away  after  this 
burdened  manner  ? 

Chr.  A  burdened  manner  indeed,  as  ever,  I  think,  poor  creature 
had !  And  whereas  you  asked  me,  Whither  away  ?  I  tell  you, 
sir,  I  am  going  to  yonder  Wicket-gate  before  me ;  for  there,  as  I 
am  informed,  I  shall  be  put  into  a  way  to  be  rid  of  my  heavy 
burden. 

World.    Hast  thou  a  wife  and  children  ? 

Chr.  Yes  ;  but  I  am  so  laden  with  this  burden,  that  I  cannot 
take  that  pleasure  in  them  as  formerly  :  methinks  I  am  as  if  I  had 
none. 

World.    Wilt  thou  hearken  to  me  if  I  give  thee  counsel  ? 

Chr.  If  it  be  good,  I  will ;  for  I  stand  in  need  of  good 
counsel. 

World.  I  would  advise  thee,  then,  that  thou  with  all  speed  get 
thyself  rid  of  thy  burden ;  for  thou  wilt  never  be  settled  in  thy 
mind  till  then  :  nor  canst  thou  enjoy  the  benefits  of  the  blessings 
which  God  hath  bestowed  upon  thee  till  then. 

Chr.  That  is  that  which  I  seek  for,  even  to  be  rid  of  this 
heavy  burden :  but  get  it  off  myself  I  cannot ;  nor  is  there  any 
man  in  our  country  that  can  take  it  off  my  shoulders  :  therefore 
am  I  going  this  way,  as  I  told  you,  that  I  may  be  rid  of  my 
burden. 

World.    Who  bid  thee  go  this  way  to  be  rid  of  thy  burden  ? 

Chr.  A  man  that  appeared  to  me  to  be  a  very  great  and 
honourable  person  ;  his  name,  as  I  remember,  is  Evangelist. 

World.  Beshrew  him  for  his  counsel !  there  is  not  a  more 
dangerous  and  troublesome  way  in  the  world  than  is  that  unto 
which  he  hath  directed  thee  ;  and  that  thou  shalt  find,  if  thou  wilt 
be  ruled  by  his  counsel.  Thou  hast  met  with  something,  as  I 


10  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

perceive,  already  ;  for  I  see  the  dirt  of  the  Slough  of  Despond  is 
upon  thee  :  but  that  Slough  is  the  beginning  of  the  sorrows  that 
do  attend  those  that  go  on  in  that  way.  Hear  me ;  I  am  older 
than  thou :  thou  art  like  to  meet  with,  in  the  way  which  thou 
goest,  wearisomeness,  painfulness,  hunger,  perils,  nakedness,  sword, 
lions,  dragons,  darkness,  and,  in  a  word,  death,  and  what  not. 
These  things  are  certainly  true,  having  been  confirmed  by  many 
testimonies.  And  should  a  man  so  carelessly  cast  away  himself,  by 
giving  heed  to  a  stranger  ? 

Chr.  Why,  sir,  this  burden  upon  my  back  is  more  terrible  to 
me  than  are  all  these  things  which  you  have  mentioned ;  nay, 
methinks  I  care  not  what  I  meet  with  in  the  way,  if  so  be  I  can 
also  meet  with  deliverance  from  my  burden. 

World.  But  why  wilt  thou  seek  for  ease  this  way,  seeing  so 
many  dangers  attend  it  ?  especially  since  (hadst  thou  but  patience 
to  hear  me)  I  could  direct  thee  to  the  obtaining  of  what  thou 
desirest,  without  the  dangers  that  thou,  in  this  way,  wilt  run  thyself 
into.  Besides,  I  will  add,  that,  instead  of  those  dangers,  thou 
shalt  meet  with  much  safety,  friendship,  and  content. 

Chr.    Sir,  I  pray  open  this  secret  to  me. 

World.  Why,  in  yonder  village  (the  village  is  named  Morality) 
there  dwells  a  gentleman  whose  name  is  Legality,  a  very  judicious 
man,  and  a  man  of  a  very  good  name,  that  has  skill  to  help  men 
off  with  such  burdens  as  thine  is  from  their  shoulders  ;  yea,  to  my 
knowledge,  he  hath  done  a  great  deal  of  good  this  way ;  ay,  and 
besides,  he  hath  skill  to  cure  those  that  are  somewhat  crazed  in 
their  wits  with  their  burdens.  To  him,  as  I  said,  thou  mayest  go, 
and  be  helped  presently.  His  house  is  not  quite  a  mile  from  this 
place  ;  and  if  he  should  not  be  at  home  himself,  he  hath  a  pretty 
young  man  to  his  son,  whose  name  is  Civility,  that  can  do  it  (to 
speak  on)  as  well  as  the  old  gentleman  himself :  there,  I  say,  thou 
mayest  be  eased  of  thy  burden  ;  and  if  thou  art  not  minded  to  go 
back  to  thy  former  habitation,  thou  mayest  send  for  thy  wife  and 
children  to  thee  to  this  village,  where  there  are  houses  now  standing 
empty,  one  of  which  thou  mayest  have  at  a  reasonable  rate : 
provision  is  there  also  cheap  and  good  ;  and  that  which  will  make 
thy  life  the  more  happy  is,  to  be  sure  there  thou  shalt  live  by 
honest  neighbours,  in  credit  and  good  fashion. 

Now  was  Christian  somewhat  at  a  stand ;  but  presently  he 
concluded,  If  this  be  true  which  this  gentleman  hath  said,  my 
wisest  course  is  to  take  his  advice  :  and  with  that  he  thus  further 
spake. 

Chr.    Sir,  which  is  my  way  to  this  honest  man's  house  ? 

World.    Do  you  see  yonder  high  hill  ? 


M"  WORLtLY-WlSEMAN     £,    CHFMiTIAN 


12  THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 

Chr.    Yes,  very  well. 

World.  By  that  hill  you  must  go,  and  the  first  house  you 
come  at  is  his. 

So  Christian  turned  out  of  his  way  to  go  to  Mr.  Legality's 
house  for  help :  but,  behold,  when  he  was  got  now  hard  by  the 
hill,  it  seemed  so  high,  and  also  that  side  of  it  that  was  next  the 
wayside  did  hang  so  much  over,  that  Christian  was  afraid  to 
venture  further,  lest  the  hill  should  fall  on  his  head ;  wherefore 
there  he  stood  still,  and  wotted  not  what  to  do.  Also  his  burden 
now  seemed  heavier  to  him  than  while  he  was  in  his  way.  There 
came  also  flashes  of  fire  out  of  the  hill,  that  made  Christian  afraid 
that  he  should  be  burnt ;  here,  therefore,  he  did  sweat  and  quake 
for  fear.  And  now  he  began  to  be  sorry  that  he  had  taken  Mr. 
Worldly  Wiseman's  counsel ;  and  with  that  he  saw  Evangelist 
coming  to  meet  him,  at  the  sight  also  of  whom  he  began  to  blush 
for  shame.  So  Evangelist  drew  nearer  and  nearer ;  and,  coming  up 
to  him,  he  looked  upon  him  with  a  severe  and  dreadful  countenance, 
and  thus  began  to  reason  with  Christian. 

Evan.  What  dost  thou  here,  Christian  ?  said  he ;  at  which 
words  Christian  knew  not  what  to  answer ;  wherefore  at  present 
he  stood  speechless  before  him.  Then  said  Evangelist  further, 
Art  thou  not  the  man  that  I  found  crying  without  the  walls  of  the 
City  of  Destruction  ? 

Chr.    Yes,  dear  sir,  I  am  the  man. 

Evan.  Did  not  I  direct  thee  the  way  to  the  little  Wicket- 
gate  ? 

Chr.    Yes,  dear  sir,  said  Christian. 

Evan.  How  is  it,  then,  that  thou  art  so  quickly  turned  aside  ? 
for  thou  art  now  out  of  the  way. 

Chr.  I  met  with  a  gentleman  so  soon  as  I  had  got  over  the 
Slough  of  Despond,  who  persuaded  me  that  I  might,  in  the  village 
before  me,  find  a  man  that  could  take  off  my  burden.  Sir,  what 
think  you  ?  Is  there  any  hope  ?  May  I  now  go  back  ,  and  go  up 
to  the  Wicket-gate  ?  Shall  I  not  be  abandoned  for  this,  and  sent 
back  from  thence  ashamed  ?  I  am  sorry  I  have  hearkened  to  this 
man's  counsel  :  but  may  my  sin  be  forgiven  ? 

Evan.  Then  said  Evangelist  to  him,  Thy  sin  is  very  great,  for 
by  it  thou  hast  committed  two  evils  :  thou  hast  forsaken  the 
way  that  is  good,  to  tread  in  forbidden  paths.  Yet  will  the  man 
at  the  gate  receive  thee,  for  he  has  good  will  for  men  ;  only,  said 
he,  take  heed  that  thou  turn  not  aside  again,  "  lest  thou  perish 
from  the  way,  when  his  wrath  is  kindled  but  a  little."  Then  did 
Christian  address  himself  to  go  back  ;  and  Evangelist,  after  he  had 
kissed  him,  gave  him  one  smile,  and  bid  him  Godspeed.  So  he 


\ 


14  THE  PILGRIM'S     PROGRESS 

went  on  with  haste,  neither  spake  he  to  any  man  by  the  way ; 
nor,  if  any  asked  him,  would  he  vouchsafe  them  an  answer.  He 
went  like  one  that  was  all  the  while  treading  on  forbidden  ground, 
and  could  by  no  means  think  himself  safe  till  again  he  was  got  into 
the  way  which  he  had  left  to  follow  Mr.  Worldly  Wiseman's 
counsel.  So,  in  process  of  time,  Christian  got  up  to  the  gate. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE    WICKET-GATE 

NOW,  over  the  gate  there  was  written,  "  Knock,  and  it  shall 
be  opened  unto  you."  He  knocked,  therefore,  more  than 
once  or  twice. 

At  last  there  came  a  grave  person  to  the  gate,  named  Good- 
will, who  asked  who  was  there  ?  and  whence  he  came  ?  and  what 
he  would  have  ? 

Chr.  Here  is  a  poor  burdened  sinner.  I  come  from  the  City 
of  Destruction,  but  am  going  to  Mount  Zion,  that  I  may  be 
delivered  from  the  wrath  to  come.  I  would,  therefore,  sir,  since 
I  am  informed  that  by  this  gate  is  the  way  thither,  know  if  you 
are  willing  to  let  me  in. 

Good-will.  I  am  willing  with  all  my  heart,  said  he ;  and  with 
that  he  opened  the  gate. 

So  when  Christian  was  stepping  in,  the  other  gave  him  a  pull. 
Then  said  Christian,  What  means  that  ?  The  other  told  him  :  A 
little  distance  from  this  gate  there  is  erected  a  strong  castle,  of 
which  Beelzebub  is  the  captain  ;  from  thence  both  he,  and  them 
that  are  with  him,  shoot  arrows  at  those  that  come  up  to  this  gate 
if  haply  they  may  die  before  they  can  enter  in. 

Then  said  Christian,  I  rejoice  and  tremble.  So  when  he  was 
got  in,  the  man  at  the  gate  asked  him  who  directed  him  thither. 

Chr.  Evangelist  bid  me  come  hither  and  knock,  as  I  did ;  and 
he  said,  that  you,  sir,  would  tell  me  what  I  must  do. 

Good-w.  An  open  door  is  set  before  thee,  and  no  man  can 
shut  it.  But  how  is  it  that  you  came  alone  ? 

Chr.  Because  none  of  my  neighbours  saw  their  danger,  as  I 
saw  mine. 

Good-w.    Did  any  of  them  know  of  your  coming  ? 

Chr.  Yes;  my  wife  and  children  saw  me  at  the  first,  and 
called  after  me  to  turn  again  :  also  some  of  my  neighbours  stood  crying 
and  calling  after  me  to  return  ;  but  I  put  my  fingers  in  my  ears, 
and  so  came  on  my  way. 

Good-w.  But  did  none  of  them  follow  you,  to  persuade  you  to 
go  back  ? 

15 


16  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Chr.  Yes ;  both  Obstinate  and  Pliable.  But  when  they  saw 
that  they  could  not  prevail,  Obstinate  went  railing  back,  but  Pliable 
came  with  me  a  little  way. 

Good-w.  But  why  did  he  not  come  through  ? 
Chr.  We  indeed  came  both  together  until  we  came  to  the 
Slough  of  Despond,  into  the  which  we  also  suddenly  fell.  And 
then  was  my  neighbour  Pliable  discouraged,  and  would  not  venture 
further.  Wherefore,  getting  out  again,  on  the  side  next  to  his 
own  house,  he  told  me  I  should  possess  the  brave  country  alone  for 
him  :  so  he  went  his  way,  and  I  came  mine :  he  after  Obstinate, 
and  I  to  this  gate. 

Good-w.  Then  said  Good-will,  Alas,  poor  man !  is  the  celestial 
glory  of  so  little  esteem  with  him,  that  he  counteth  it  not  worth 
running  the  hazard  of  a  few  difficulties  to  obtain  it  ? 

Chr.  Truly,  said  Christian,  I  have  said  the  truth  of  Pliable ; 
and  if  I  should  also  say  the  truth  of  myself,  it  will  appear  there 
is  no  betterment  betwixt  him  and  myself.  It  is  true,  he  went 
back  to  his  own  house ;  but  I  also  turned  aside  to  go  into  the 
way  of  death,  being  persuaded  thereto  by  the  carnal  argument  of 
one  Mr.  Worldly  Wiseman. 

Good-w.  Oh  !  did  he  light  upon  you  ?  What !  he  would  have 
had  you  seek  for  ease  at  the  hands  of  Mr.  Legality !  they  are 
both  of  them  a  very  cheat.  But  did  you  take  his  counsel  ? 

Chr.  Yes,  as  far  as  I  durst.  I  went  to  find  out  Mr.  Legality, 
until  I  thought  that  the  mountain  that  stands  by  his  house  would 
have  fallen  upon  my  head  ;  wherefore  there  I  was  forced  to  stop. 

Good-TV.  That  mountain  has  been  the  death  of  many,  and  will 
be  the  death  of  many  more  :  it  is  well  you  escaped  being  by  it 
dashed  in  pieces. 

Chr.  Why,  truly,  I  do  not  know  what  had  become  of  me 
there,  had  not  Evangelist  happily  met  me  again  as  I  was  musing 
in  the  midst  of  my  dumps  ;  but  it  was  God's  mercy  that  he  came 
to  me  again,  for  else  I  had  never  come  hither.  But  now  I  am 
come,  such  a  one  as  I  am,  more  fit  indeed  for  death  by  that 
mountain,  than  thus  to  stand  talking  with  my  Lord.  But  oh  ! 
what  a  favour  is  this  to  me,  that  yet  I  am  admitted  entrance  here ! 

Good-w.  We  make  no  objections  against  any ;  notwithstanding 
all  that  they  have  done  before  they  come  hither,  "  they  in  no  wise 
are  cast  out."  And  therefore,  good  Christian,  come  a  little  way 
Avith  me,  and  I  will  teach  thee  about  the  way  thou  must  go. 
Look  before  thee ;  dost  thou  see  this  narrow  way  ?  That  is  the 
way  thou  must  go.  It  was  cast  up  by  the  patriarchs,  prophets, 
Christ  and  His  apostles,  and  it  is  as  straight  as  a  rule  can  make 
it :  this  is  the  way  thou  must  go. 


18  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Chr.  But,  said  Christian,  are  there  no  turnings,  no  windings, 
by  which  a  stranger  may  lose  his  way  ? 

Good-w.  Yes,  there  are  many  ways  abut  down  upon  this,  and 
they  are  crooked  and  wide ;  but  thus  thou  mayest  distinguish  the 
right  from  the  wrong,  the  right  only  being  straight  and  narrow. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  Christian  asked  him  further,  if 
he  could  not  help  him  off  with  his  burden  that  was  upon  his  back; 
for  as  yet  he  had  not  got  rid  thereof,  nor  could  he  by  any  means  get 
it  off  without  help. 

He  told  him,  As  to  thy  burden,  be  content  to  bear  it,  until 
thou  comest  to  the  place  of  deliverance;  for  there  it  will  fall  from 
thy  back  of  itself. 

Then  Christian  began  to  gird  up  his  loins,  and  to  address  him- 
self to  his  journey.  So  the  other  told  him  that,  by  that  he  was 
gone  some  distance  from  the  gate,  he  would  come  at  the  house  of 
the  Interpreter,  at  whose  door  he  should  knock,  and  he  would 
show  him  excellent  things.  Then  Christian  took  his  leave  of  his 
friend,  and  he  again  bid  him  Godspeed. 

Then  he  went  on  till  he  came  at  the  house  of  the  Interpreter, 
where  he  knocked  over  and  over.  At  last  one  came  to  the  door, 
and  asked  who  was  there. 

Chr.  Sir,  here  is  a  traveller,  who  was  bid  by  an  acquaintance 
of  the  good  man  of  this  house  to  call  here  for  his  profit ;  I  would 
therefore  speak  with  the  master  of  the  house. 

So  he  called  for  the  master  of  the  house,  who,  after  a  little 
time,  came  to  Christian,  and  asked  him  what  he  would  have. 

Chr.  Sir,  said  Christian,  I  am  a  man  that  am  come  from  the 
City  of  Destruction,  and  am  going  to  Mount  Zion ;  and  I  was  told 
by  the  man  that  stands  at  the  gate  at  the  head  of  this  way,  that, 
if  I  called  here,  you  would  show  me  excellent  things,  such  as 
would  be  helpful  to  me  on  my  journey. 

Inter.  Then  said  the  Interpreter,  Come  in ;  I  will  show  thee 
that  which  will  be  profitable  to  thee.  So  he  commanded  his  man 
to  light  the  candle,  and  bid  Christian  follow  him  :  so  he  had  him 
into  a  private  room,  and  bid  his  man  open  a  door ;  the  which, 
when  he  had  done,  Christian  saw  the  picture  of  a  very  grave  person 
hang  up  against  the  wall ;  and  this  was  the  fashion  of  it :  it  had 
eyes  lifted  up  to  heaven,  the  best  of  books  in  its  hand,  the  law  of 
truth  was  written  upon  its  lips,  the  world  was  behind  its  back  ;  it 
stood  as  if  it  pleaded  with  men,  and  a  crown  of  gold  did  hang  over 
its  head.  Now,  said  the  Interpreter,  I  have  showed  thee  this 
picture  first,  because  the  man  whose  picture  this  is,  is  the  only 
man  whom  the  Lord  of  the  place  whither  thou  art  going  hath 
authorized  to  be  thy  guide,  in  all  difficult  places  thou  mayest  meet 


THE   WICKET-GATE 


19 


with  in  the  way.  Wherefore  take  good  heed  to  what  I  have 
showed  thee,  and  bear  well  in  thy  mind  what  thou  hast  seen,  lest 
in  thy  journey  thou  meet  with  some  that  pretend  to  lead  thee 
right,  but  their  way  goes  down  to  death. 


Then  he  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  led  him  into  a  very  large 
parlour  that  was  full  of  dust,  because  never  swept ;  the  which, 
after  he  had  reviewed  it  a  little  while,  the  Interpreter  called  for  a 
man  to  sweep.  Now,  when  he  began  to  sweep,  the  dust  began  so 
abundantly  to  fly  about,  that  Christian  had  almost  therewith 


20  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

been  choked.  Then  said  the  Interpreter  to  a  damsel  that  stood  by, 
Bring  hither  water,  and  sprinkle  the  room ;  the  which  when  she 
had  done,  it  was  swept  and  cleansed  with  pleasure. 

Chr.    Then  said  Christian,  What  means  this  ? 

Inter.  The  Interpreter  answered,  This  parlour  is  the  heart  of  a 
man,  and  even  as  thou  sawest  the  damsel  lay  the  dust  by  sprinkling 
the  floor  with  water,  so  is  sin  vanquished  and  subdued,  and  the 
soul  made  clean  through  the  faith  of  it,  and  consequently  fit  for 
the  King  of  glory  to  inhabit. 

Again  the  Interpreter  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  had  him  into 
a  little  room,  where  sat  two  little  children,  each  one  in  his  own 
chair.  The  name  of  the  eldest  was  Passion,  and  the  name  of  the 
other  Patience.  Passion  seemed  to  be  much  discontented,  but 
Patience  was  very  quiet.  Then  Christian  asked,  What  is  the 
reason  of  the  discontent  of  Passion  ?  The  Interpreter  answered, 
The  governor  of  them  would  have  him  stay  for  his  best  things  till 
the  beginning  of  next  year ;  but  he  will  have  all  now.  But 
Patience  is  willing  to  wait. 

Then  I  saw  that  one  came  to  Passion,  and  brought  him  a  bag 
of  treasure,  and  poured  it  down  at  his  feet :  the  which  he  took  up, 
and  rejoiced  therein,  and  withal  laughed  Patience  to  scorn.  But  I 
beheld  but  a  while,  and  he  had  lavished  all  away,  and  had  nothing 
left  him  but  rags. 

Chr.  Then  said  Christian  to  the  Interpreter,  Expound  this 
matter  more  fully  to  me. 

Inter.  So  he  said,  These  two  lads  are  figures  :  Passion,  of  the 
men  of  this  world  ;  and  Patience,  of  the  men  of  that  which  is  to 
come.  For  as  here  thou  seest,  Passion  will  have  all  now,  this 
year,  that  is  to  say,  in  this  world  ;  so  are  the  men  of  this  world  : 
they  must  have  all  their  good  things  now ;  they  cannot  stay  till  the 
next  year,  that  is,  until  the  next  world,  for  their  portion  of  good. 
That  proverb,  "  A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the  bush,"  is 
of  more  authority  with  them  than  all  the  divine  testimonies  of  the 
good  of  the  world  to  come.  But  as  thou  sawest  that  he  had 
quickly  lavished  all  away,  and  had  presently  left  him  nothing  but 
rags,  so  will  it  be  with  all  such  men  at  the  end  of  this  world. 

Then  the  Interpreter  took  Christian  by  the  hand  and  led  him 
into  a  place  where  was  a  fire  burning  against  a  wall,  and  one  standing 
by  it,  always  casting  much  water  upon  it  to  quench  it :  yet  did 
the  fire  burn  higher  and  hotter. 

Then  said  Christian,  What  means  this  ? 

The  Interpreter  answered,  This  fire  is  the  work  of  grace  that 
is  wrought  in  the  heart ;  he  that  casts  water  upon  it  to  extinguish 
and  put  it  out,  is  the  devil :  but  in  that  thou  seest  the  fire  not- 


THE   WICKET- GATE 


21 


withstanding  burn  higher  and  hotter,   thou  shalt  also  see  the  reason 
of  that.      So  he  had  him  about  to  the  backside  of  the  wall,   where 


he  saw  a  man  with  a  vessel  of  oil  in  his  hand,  of  the  which  he 
did  also  continually  cast  (but  secretly)  into  the  fire. 

Then  said  Christian,  What  means  this  ? 

The  Interpreter  answered,  This  is  Christ,  who  continually,  with 
the  oil  of  his  grace,  maintains  the  work  already  begun  in  the 


22  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

heart.  And  in  that  thou  sawest  that  the  man  stood  behind  the 
wall  to  maintain  the  fire;  this  is  to  teach  thee,  that  it  is  hard  for 
the  tempted  to  see  how  this  work  of  grace  is  maintained  in  the 
soul. 

Then  the  Interpreter  took  him  again  by  the  hand,  and  led  him 
into  a  pleasant  place,  where  was  built  a  stately  palace,  beautiful  to 
behold  ;  at  the  sight  of  which  Christian  was  greatly  delighted.  He 
saw  also,  upon  the  top  thereof,  certain  persons  walking,  who  were 
clothed  all  in  gold. 

Then  said  Christian,  May  we  go  in  thither  ? 

Then  the  Interpreter  took  him  and  led  him  up  toward  the 
door  of  the  palace ;  and,  behold,  at  the  door  stood  a  great  company 
of  men,  as  desirous  to  go  in,  but  durst  not.  There  also  sat  a  man 
at  a  little  distance  from  the  door,  at  a  tableside,  with  a  book  and 
his  ink-horn  before  him,  to  take  the  name  of  him  that  should  enter 
therein ;  he  saw  also  that  in  the  doorway  stood  many  men  in 
armour  to  keep  it,  being  resolved  to  do  to  the  men  that  would 
enter  what  hurt  and  mischief  they  could.  Now  was  Christian 
somewhat  in  amaze.  At  last,  when  every  man  started  back  for  fear 
of  the  armed  men,  Christian  saw  a  man  of  a  very  stout  countenance 
come  up  to  the  man  that  sat  there  to  write,  saying,  Set  down  my 
name,  sir :  the  which  when  he  had  done,  he  saw  the  man  draw 
his  sword,  and  put  a  helmet  upon  his  head,  and  rush  toward  the 
door  upon  the  armed  men,  who  laid  upon  him  with  deadly  force; 
but  the  man,  not  at  all  discouraged,  fell  to  cutting  and  hacking 
most  fiercely.  So  after  <  he  had  received  and  given  many  wounds 
to  those  that  attempted  to  keep  him  out,  he  cut  his  way  through 
them  all,  and  pressed  forward  into  the  palace ;  at  which  there  was 
a  pleasant  voice  heard  from  those  that  were  within,  even  of  those 
that  walked  upon  the  top  of  the  palace,  saying,— 

Come  in,  come  in  ; 

Eternal  glory  thou  shalt  win. 

So  he  went  in,  and  was  clothed  with  such  garments  as  they.  Then 
Christian  smiled,  and  said,  I  think  verily  I  know  the  meaning  of 
this. 

Now,  said  Christian,  let  me  go  hence.  Nay,  stay,  said  the 
Interpreter,  till  I  have  showed  thee  a  little  more,  and  after  that 
thou  shalt  go  on  thy  way.  So  he  took  him  by  the  hand  again, 
and  led  him  into  a  very  dark  room,  where  there  sat  a  man  in  an 
iron  cage. 

Now  the  man,  to  look  on,  seemed  very  sad  :  he  sat  with  his 
eyes  looking  down  to  the  ground,  his  hands  folded  together,  and 
he  sighed  as  if  he  would  break  his  heart.  Then  said  Christian, 


THE   WICKET-GATE  23 

What  means  this  ?  At  which  the  Interpreter  bid  him  talk  with 
the  man. 

Then  said  Christian  to  the  man,  What  art  thou  ?  The  man 
answered,  I  am  what  I  was  not  once. 

Chr.    What  wast  thou  once  ? 

Man.  The  man  said,  I  was  once  a  fair  and  flourishing  pro- 
fessor, both  in  mine  own  eyes,  and  also  in  the  eyes  of  others.  I 
was  once,  as  I  thought,  fair  for  the  Celestial  City,  and  had  even 
joy  at  the  thoughts  that  I  should  get  thither. 

Chr.    Well,  but  what  art  thou  now  ? 

Man.  I  am  now  a  man  of  despair,  and  am  shut  up  in  it,  as 
in  this  iron  cage.  I  cannot  get  out ;  oh,  now  I  cannot ! 

Inter.  Then  said  the  Interpreter  to  Christian,  Let  this  man's 
misery  be  remembered  by  thee,  and  be  an  everlasting  caution  to 
thee. 

Chr.  Well,  said  Christian,  this  is  fearful !  God  help  me  to 
watch  and  be  sober,  and  to  pray  that  I  may  shun  the  cause  of 
this  man's  misery.  Sir,  is  it  not  time  for  me  to  go  on  my  way 
now  ? 

Then  said  the  Interpreter  to  Christian,  Hast  thou  considered 
these  things  ? 

Chr.    Yes,  and  they  put  me  in  hope  and  fear. 

Inter.  Well,  keep  all  things  so  in  thy  mind  that  they  may  be 
as  a  goad  in  thy  sides,  to  prick  thee  forward  in  the  way  thou 
must  go.  Then  Christian  began  to  gird  up  his  loins,  and  to 
address  himself  to  his  journey.  Then  said  the  Interpreter,  The 
Comforter  be  always  with  thee,  good  Christian,  to  guide  thee  in  the 
way  that  leads  to  the  city.  So  Christian  went  on  his  way. 


CHAPTER   III 

THE    HILL    DIFFICULTY 

NOW  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  the  highway,  up  which  Chris- 
tian was  to  go,  was  fenced  on  either  side  with  a  wall,  and 
that  wall  was  called  Salvation.  Up  this  way,  therefore, 
did  burdened  Christian  run,  but  not  without  great  difficulty, 
because  of  the  load  on  his  back. 

He  ran  thus  till  he  came  to  a  place  somewhat  ascending  ;  and 
upon  that  place  stood  a  Cross,  and  a  little  below,  in  the  bottom,  a 
Sepulchre.  So  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  just  as  Christian  came  up 
with  the  Cross,  his  burden  loosed  from  off  his  shoulders,  and  fell 
from  off  his  back,  and  began  to  tumble,  and  so  continued  to  do, 
till  it  came  to  the  mouth  of  the  Sepulchre,  where  it  fell  in,  and  I 
saw  it  no  more. 

Then  was  Christian  glad  and  lightsome,  and  said  with  a  merry 
heart,  He  hath  given  me  rest  by  his  sorrow,  and  life  by  his  death. 
Then  he  stood  still  a  while  to  look  and  wonder ;  for  it  was  very 
surprising  to  him  that  the  sight  of  the  Cross  should  thus  ease  him 
of  his  burden.  He  looked,  therefore,  and  looked  again,  even  till 
the  springs  that  were  in  his  head  sent  the  waters  down  his  cheeks. 
Now,  as  he  stood  looking  and  weeping,  behold,  three  Shining  Ones 
came  to  him  and  saluted  him  with,  "  Peace  be  to  thee."  So  the 
first  said  to  him,  "  Thy  sins  be  forgiven  thee ;  "  the  second 
stripped  him  of  his  rags,  and  clothed  him  with  change  of  raiment ; 
the  third  also  set  a  mark  on  his  forehead,  and  gave  him  a  roll 
with  a  seal  upon  it,  which  he  bade  him  look  on  as  he  ran,  and 
that  he  should  give  it  in  at  the  Celestial  Gate  :  so  they  went  their 
way.  Then  Christian  gave  three  leaps  for  joy,  and  went  on  singing. 

I  saw  then  in  my  dream,  that  he  went  on  thus,  even  until  he 
came  at  a  bottom,  where  he  saw,  a  little  out  of  the  way,  three 
men  fast  asleep,  with  fetters  upon  their  heels.  The  name  of  the 
one  was  Simple,  of  another  Sloth,  and  of  the  third  Presumption. 

Christian  then  seeing  them  lie  in  this  case,  went  to  them,  if 
peradventure  he  might  awake  them,  and  cried,  You  are  like  them 
that  sleep  on  the  top  of  a  mast,  for  the  Dead  Sea  is  under  you— 

24 


26  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

a  gulf  that'  hath  no  bottom  :  awake,  therefore,  and  come  away ;  be 
willing  also,  and  I  will  help  you  off  with  your  irons.  He  also  told 
them,  If  he  that  goeth  about  like  a  roaring  lion  comes  by,  you 
will  certainly  become  a  prey  to  his  teeth.  With  that  they  looked 
upon  him,  and  began  to  reply  in  this  sort :  Simple  said,  I  see  no 
danger.  Sloth  said,  Yet  a  little  more  sleep !  And  Presumption  said, 
Every  fat  must  stand  upon  its  own  bottom.  And  so  they  laid 
down  to  sleep  again,  and  Christian  went  on  his  way. 

Yet  was  he  troubled  to  think  that  men  in  that  danger  should 
so  little  esteem  the  kindness  of  him  that  so  freely  offered  to  help 
them,  both  by  awakening  of  them,  counselling  of  them,  and  proffer- 
ing to  help  them  off  with  their  irons.  And  as  he  was  troubled 
thereabout,  he  espied  two  men  come  tumbling  over  the  wall  on  the 
left  hand  of  the  narrow  way ;  and  they  made  up  apace  to  him.  The 
name  of  the  one  was  Formalist,  and  the  name  of  the  other  Hypocrisy. 
So,  as  I  said,  they  drew  up  unto  him,  who  thus  entered  with  them 
into  discourse. 

Chr,    Gentlemen,  whence  came  you,  and  whither  go  you  ? 

Form,  and  Hyp.  We  were  born  in  the  land  of  Vain-glory,  and 
are  going  for  praise  to  Mount  Zion. 

Chr.  .  Why  came  you  not  in  at  the  gate  which  standeth  at  the 
beginning  of  the  way  ?  Know  ye  not  that  it  is  written,  that  "  he 
that  cometh  not  in  by  the  door,  but  climbeth  up  some  other  way, 
the  same  is  a  thief  and  a  robber  "  ? 

Form,  and  Hyp.  They  said,  that  to  go  to  the  gate  for  entrance 
was,  by  all  their  countrymen,  counted  too  far  about ;  and  that, 
therefore,  their  usual  way  was  to  make  a  short  cut  of  it,  and  to 
climb  over  the  wall  as  they  had  done. 

Chr.  But  will  it  not  be  counted  a  trespass  against  the  Lord 
of  the  city  whither  we  are  bound,  thus  to  violate  his  revealed  will  ? 

Form,  and  Hyp.  They  told  him,  that  as  for  that,  he  needed  not 
trouble  his  head  thereabout ;  for  what  they  did  they  had  custom 
for,  and  could  produce,  if  need  were,  testimony  that  would  witness 
it,  for  more  than  a  thousand  years.  And  besides,  said  they,  if  we 
get  into  the  way,  what  matter  is  it  which  way  we  get  in  ?  If  we 
are  in,  we  are  in  :  thou  art  but  in  the  way,  who,  as  we  perceive, 
came  in  at  the  gate ;  and  we  are  also  in  the  way,  that  came  tumb- 
ling over  the  wall :  wherein  now  is  thy  condition  better  than  ours  ? 

Chr.  I  walk  by  the  rule  of  my  Master ;  you  walk  by  the  rude 
working  of  your  fancies  ;  therefore  I  doubt  you  will  not  be  found 
true  men  at  the  end  of  the  way. 

To  these  things  they  gave  him  no  answer ;  only  they  looked 
upon  each  other  and  laughed.  Then  I  saw  that  they  went  on  all, 
save  that  Christian  kept  before,  who  had  no  more  talk  but  with 


THE   HILL  DIFFICULTY  27 

himself,  and  that  sometimes  sighingly,  and  sometimes  comfortably  : 
also  he  would  be  often  reading  in  the  roll,  that  one  of  the  Shining 
Ones  gave  him,  by  which  he  was  refreshed. 

I  beheld  then  that  they  all  went  on  till  they  came  to  the  foot 
of  the  Hill  Difficulty,  at  the  bottom  of  which  was  a  spring.  There 
were  also  in  the  same  place  two  other  ways,  besides  that  which  came 
straight  from  the  gate  :  one  turned  to  the  left  hand,  and  the  other 
to  the  right,  at  the  bottom  of  the  hill ;  but  the  narrow  way  lay 
right  up  the  hill,  and  the  name  of  the  going  up  the  side  of  the  hill 
is  called  Difficulty.  Christian  now  went  to  the  spring,  and  drank 
thereof  to  refresh  himself,  and  then  he  began  to  go  up  the  hill. 

The  other  two  also  came  to  the  foot  of  the  hill ;  but  when 
they  saw  that  the  hill  was  steep  and  high,  and  that  there  were 
two  other  ways  to  go — and  supposing  also  that  these  two  ways 
might  meet  again,  with  that  up  which  Christian  went,  on  the  other 
side  of  the  hill — therefore  they  were  resolved  to  go  in  those  ways. 
Now,  the  name  of  one  of  those  ways  was  Danger,  and  the  name  of 
the  other  Destruction.  So  the  one  took  the  way  which  is  called 
Danger,  which  led  him  into  a  great  wood ;  and  the  other  took 
directly  up  the  way  to  Destruction,  which  led  him  into  a  wide 
field,  full  of  dark  mountains,  where  he  stumbled  and  fell,  and  rose 
no  more. 

I  looked  then  after  Christian,  to  see  him  go  up  the  hill,  where  I 
perceived  he  fell  from  running  to  going,  and  from  going  to  clam- 
bering upon  his  hands  and  his  knees,  because  of  the  steepness  of 
the  place.  Now,  about  the  midway  to  the  top  of  the  hill  was  a 
pleasant  arbour,  made  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill  for  the  refreshment 
of  weary  travellers.  Thither,  therefore,  Christian  got,  where  also 
he  sat  down  to  rest  him.  Then  he  pulled  his  roll  out  of  his  bosom, 
and  read  therein  to  his  comfort ;  he  also  now  began  afresh  to  take 
a  review  of  the  coat  or  garment  that  was  given  to  him  as  he 
stood  by  the  Cross.  Thus  pleasing  himself  a  while,  he  at  last  fell 
into  a  slumber,  and  thence  into  a  fast  sleep,  which  detained  him  in 
that  place  until  it  was  almost  night ;  and  in  his  sleep  his  roll  fell 
out  of  his  hand.  Now,  as  he  was  sleeping,  there  came  one  to 
him,  and  awaked  him,  saying,  "Go  to  the  ant,  thou  sluggard ; 
consider  her  ways,  and  be  wise."  And  with  that  Christian  suddenly 
started  up,  and  sped  him  on  his  way,  and  went  apace  till  he  came 
to  the  top  of  the  hill. 

Now,  when  he  was  got  up  to  the  top  of  the  hill,  there  came 
two  men  running  amain  ;  the  name  of  the  one  was  Timorous,  and 
of  the  other  Mistrust :  to  whom  Christian  said,  Sirs,  what's  the 
matter  ?  you  run  the  wrong  way.  Timorous  answered,  that  they 
were  going  to  the  City  of  Zion,  and  had  got  up  that  difficult  place : 


28  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

but,   said   he,   the   further  we  go,   the  more   danger    we  meet   with  ; 
wherefore  we  turned,  and  are  going  back  again. 

Yes,  said  Mistrust,  for  just  before  us  lie  a  couple  of  lions  in 
the  way,  whether  sleeping  or  waking  we  know  not ;  and  we  could 
not  think,  if  we  came  within  reach,  but  they  would  presently  pull  us 
in  pieces. 

Chr.  Then  said  Christian,  You  make  me  afraid ;  but  whither 
shall  I  fly  to  be  safe  ?  If  I  go  back  to  my  own  country,  I  shall 
certainly  perish  there  ;  if  I  can  get  to  the  Celestial  City,  I  am  sure 
to  be  in  safety  there :  I  must  venture.  To  go  back  is  nothing 
but  death ;  to  go  forward  is  fear  of  death,  and  life  everlasting 
beyond  it :  I  will  yet  go  forward.  So  Mistrust  and  Timorous  ran 
down  the  hill,  and  Christian  went  on  his  way.  But  thinking  again 
of  what  he  had  heard  from  the  men,  he  felt  in  his  bosom  for  his 
roll,  that  he  might  read  therein,  and  be  comforted ;  but  he  felt, 
and  found  it  not.  Then  was  Christian  in  great  distress,  and  knew  not 
what  to  do ;  for  he  wanted  that  which  used  to  relieve  him, 
and  that  which  should  have  been  his  pass  into  the  Celestial  City. 
Here,  therefore,  he  began  to  be  much  perplexed,  and  knew  not  what 
to  do.  At  last  he  bethought  himself  that  he  had  slept  in  the 
arbour  that  is  on  the  side  of  the  hill ;  and,  falling  down  upon  his 
knees,  he  asked  God's  forgiveness  for  that  his  foolish  act,  and  then 
went  back  to  look  for  his  roll.  But  all  the  way  he  went  back, 
who  can  sufficiently  set  forth  the  sorrow  of  Christian's  heart  ? 
Sometimes  he  sighed,  sometimes  he  wept,  and  oftentimes  he  chid 
himself  for  being  so  foolish  to  fall  asleep  in  that  place,  which  was 
erected  only  for  a  little  refreshment  from  his  weariness.  Thus, 
therefore,  he  went  back,  carefully  looking  on  this  side  and  on  that, 
all  the  way  as  he  went,  if  happily  he  might  find  his  roll  that  had 
been  his  comfort  so  many  times  in  his  journey.  He  went  thus 
till  he  came  again  within  sight  of  the  arbour  where  he  sat  and 
slept ;  but  that  sight  renewed  his  sorrow  the  more,  by  bringing 
again,  even  afresh,  his  evil  of  sleeping  into  his  mind.  Thus  there- 
fore, he  now  went  on,  bewailing  his  sinful  sleep,  saying,  O  wretched 
man  that  I  am,  that  I  should  sleep  in  the  daytime,  that  I  should 
sleep  in  the  midst  of  difficulty  !  that  I  should  so  indulge  the  flesh, 
as  to  use  that  rest  for  ease  to  my  flesh,  which  the  Lord  of  the  hill 
hath  erected  only  for  the  relief  of  the  spirits  of  pilgrims  !  How 
many  steps  have  I  taken  in  vain  !  I  am  made  to  tread  those 
steps  with  sorrow,  which  I  might  have  trod  with  delight,  had  it 
not  been  for  this  sinful  sleep.  How  far  might  I  have  been  on  my 
way  by  this  time  !  I  am  made  to  tread  those  steps  thrice  over, 
which  I  needed  not  have  trod  but  once:  yea  also,  now  I  am  like  to 
be  benighted,  for  the  day  is  almost  spent.  O  that  I  had  not  slept  ! 


THE   HILL  DIFFICULTY  29 

Now  by  this  time  he  was  come  to  the  arbour  again,  where  for 
a  while  he  sat  down  and  wept ;  but  at  last,  looking  sorrowfully 
down  under  the  settle,  there  he  espied  his  roll  :  the  which  he,  with 
trembling  and  haste,  catched  up,  and  put  into  his  bosom.  But 
who  can  tell  how  joyful  this  man  was  when  he  had  gotten  his 
roll  again  ?  For  this  roll  was  the  assurance  of  his  life,  and  accept- 
ance at  the  desired  haven.  Therefore  he  laid  it  up  in  his  bosom, 
gave  thanks  to  God  for  directing  his  eye  to  the  place  where  it  lay, 
and  with  joy  and  tears  betook  himself  again  to  his  journey.  But 
oh,  how  nimbly  now  did  he  go  up  the  rest  of  the  hill  !  Yet, 
before  he  got  up,  the  sun  went  down  upon  Christian ;  and  this 
made  him  again  recall  the  vanity  of  his  sleeping  to  his  remembrance ; 
and  thus  he  began  again  to  condole  with  himself :  O  thou  sinful 
sleep !  how  for  thy  sake  am  I  like  to  be  benighted  in  my  journey ! 
I  must  walk  without  the  sun,  darkness  must  cover  the  path  of  my 
feet,  and  I  must  hear  the  noise  of  the  doleful  creatures  !  Now 
also  he  remembered  the  story  that  Mistrust  and  Timorous  told  him, 
of  how  they  were  frighted  with  the  sight  of  the  lions.  Then  said 
Christian  to  himself  again,  These  beasts  range  in  the  night  for 
their  prey ;  and  if  they  should  meet  with  me  in  the  dark,  how 
should  I  shift  them  ?  how  should  I  escape  being  by  them  torn  in 
pieces  ?  Thus  he  went  on  his  way.  But  while  he  was  thus 
bewailing  his  unhappy  miscarriage,  he  lift  up  his  eyes,  and,  behold, 
there  was  a  very  stately  palace  before  him,  the  name  of  which  was 
Beautiful,  and  it  stood  just  by  the  highway  side. 


CHAPTER   IV 

THE    PALACE    BEAUTIFUL 

SO  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  he  made  haste,  and  went  forward, 
that  if  possible  he  might  get  lodging  there.  Now,  before 
he  had  gone  far,  he  entered  into  a  very  narrow  passage,  which 
was  about  a  furlong  off  the  porter's  lodge ;  and  looking  very 
narrowly  before  him  as  he  went,  he  espied  two  lions  in  the  way. 
Now,  thought  he,  I  see  the  danger  that  Mistrust  and  Timorous 
were  driven  back  by.  (The  lions  were  chained,  but  he  saw  not  the 
chains.)  Then  he  was  afraid,  and  thought  also  himself  to  go  back 
after  them,  for  he  thought  nothing  but  death  was  before  him ; 
but  the  porter  at  the  lodge,  whose  name  is  Watchful,  perceiving 
that  Christian  made  a  halt  as  if  he  would  go  back,  cried  unto  him, 
saying,  Is  thy  strength  so  small  ?  Fear  not  the  lions,  for  they  are 
chained,  and  are  placed  there  for  trial  of  faith  where  it  is ;  and 
for  the  discovery  of  those  that  have  none :  keep  in  the  midst  of 
the  path,  and  no  hurt  shall  come  unto  thee. 

Then  he  went  on,  trembling  for  fear  of  the  lions,  but  taking 
good  heed  to  the  directions  of  the  porter.  He  heard  them  roar, 
but  they  did  him  no  harm.  Then  he  clapped  his  hands,  and  went 
on  till  he  came  and  stood  before  the  gate  where  the  porter  was. 
Then  said  Christian  to  the  porter.  Sir,  what  house  is  this  ?  and 
may  I  lodge  here  to-night  ?  The  porter  answered,  This  house  was 
built  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill,  and  he  built  it  for  the  relief  and 
security  of  pilgrims.  The  porter  also  asked  whence  he  was,  and 
whither  he  was  going  ? 

Chr.  I  am  come  from  the  City  of  Destruction,  and  am  going 
to  Mount  Zion  ;  but  because  the  sun  is  now  set,  I  desire,  if  I  may, 
to  lodge  here  to-night. 

Port.    What  is  your  name  ? 

Chr.  My  name  is  now  Christian,  but  my  name  at  the  first  was 
Graceless. 

Port.  But  how  doth  it  happen  that  you  come  so  late  ?  The 
sun  is  set. 

Chr.    I   had   been   here   sooner,   but   that,   wretched   man   that   I 

30 


.-ll-.vUCHTaSTtTlKi^PaSSES  t  SETTWE.EM 


32  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

am,  I  slept  in  the  arbour  that  stands  on  the  hill-side  !  Nay,  I  had, 
notwithstanding  that,  been  here  much  sooner,  but  that  in  my  sleep 
I  lost  my  evidence,  and  came  without  it  to  the  brow  of  the  hill ; 
and  then  feeling  for  it,  and  finding  it  not,  I  was  forced  with 
sorrow  of  heart  to  go  back  to  the  place  where  I  slept  my  sleep, 
where  I  found  it ;  and  now  I  am  come. 

Port.  Well,  I  will  call  out  one  of  the  virgins  of  this  place,  who 
will,  if  she  likes  your  talk,  bring  you  in  to  the  rest  of  the  family, 
according  to  the  rules  of  the  house.  So  Watchful  the  porter  rang 
a  bell,  at  the  sound  of  which  came  out  of  the  door  of  the  house  a 
grave  and  beautiful  damsel,  named  Discretion,  and  asked  why  she 
was  called. 

The  porter  answered,  This  man  is  on  a  journey  from  the  City 
of  Destruction  to  Mount  Zion ;  but  being  weary  and  benighted, 
he  asked  me  if  he  might  lodge  here  to-night  :  so  I  told  him  I 
would  call  for  thee,  who,  after  discourse  had  with  him,  mayest  do  as 
seemeth  thee  good,  even  according  to  the  law  of  the  house. 

Then  she  asked  him  whence  he  was,  and  whither  he  was  going ; 
and  he  told  her.  She  asked  him  also  how  he  got  into  the  way ; 
and  he  told  her.  Then  she  asked  him  what  he  had  seen  and  met  with 
on  the  way ;  and  he  told  her.  And  at  last  she  asked  his  name. 
So  he  said,  It  is  Christian  ;  and  I  have  so  much  the  more  a  desire 
to  lodge  here  to-night,  because,  by  what  I  perceive,  this  place  was 
built  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill  for  the  relief  and  security  of  pilgrims. 
So  she  smiled,  but  the  water  stood  in  her  eyes  ;  and  after  a  little 
pause  she  said,  I  will  call  forth  two  or  three  more  of  the  family.  So 
she  ran  to  the  door,  and  called  out  Prudence,  Piety,  and  Charity, 
who,  after  a  little  more  discourse  with  him,  had  him  into  the 
family ;  and  many  of  them  meeting  him  at  the  threshold  of  the 
house,  said,  Come  in,  thou  blessed  of  the  Lord  ;  this  house  was 
built  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill,  on  purpose  to  entertain  such  pilgrims 
in.  Then  he  bowed  his  head,  and  followed  them  into  the  house. 
So  when  he  was  come  in  and  sat  down,  they  gave  him  something 
to  drink,  and  consented  together  that,  until  supper  was  ready, 
some  of  them  should  have  some  particular  discourse  with  Christian 
for  the  best  improvement  of  time  ;  and  they  appointed  Piety, 
Prudence,  and  Charity,  to  discourse  with  him ;  and  thus  they 
began  :— 

Piety.  Come,  good  Christian,  since  we  have  been  so  loving  to 
you  to  receive  you  into  our  house  this  night,  let  us,  if  perhaps  we 
may  better  ourselves  thereby,  talk  with  you  of  things  that  have 
happened  to  you  in  your  pilgrimage. 

Chr.  With  a  very  good  will ;  and  I  am  glad  that  you  are  so 
well  disposed. 


THE   PALACE   BEAUTIFUL  33 

Piety.  What  moved  you  at  first  to  betake  yourself  to  a  pil- 
grim's life  ? 

Chr.  I  was  driven  out  of  my  native  country  by  a  dreadful 
sound  that  was  in  mine  ears  ;  to  wit,  that  unavoidable  destruction  did 
attend  me,  if  I  abode  in  that  place  where  I  was. 

Piety.  But  how  did  it  happen  that  you  came  out  of  your 
country  this  way  ? 

Chr.  It  was  as  God  would  have  it ;  for  when  I  was  under  the 
fears  of  destruction,  I  did  not  know  whither  to  go  ;  but  by  chance 
there  came  a  man,  even  to  me,  as  I  was  trembling  and  weeping, 
whose  name  is  Evangelist,  and  he  directed  me  to  the  Wicket-gate, 
which  else  I  should  never  have  found,  and  so  set  me  into  the  way 
that  hath  led  me  directly  to  this  house. 

Piety.  But  did  you  not  come  by  the  house  of  the  Inter- 
preter ? 

Chr.  Yes,  and  did  see  such  things  there,  the  remembrance  of 
which  will  stick  by  me  as  long  as  I  live.  I  would  have  stayed  at 
that  good  man's  house  a  twelvemonth,  but  that  I  knew  I  had 
further  to  go. 

Then  Prudence  thought  good  to  ask  him  a  few  questions,  and 
desired  his  answer  to  them. 

Pru.  Do  you  not  think  sometimes  of  the  country  from  whence 
you  came  ? 

Chr.  Yes,  but  with  much  shame  and  detestation  :  truly,  if  I 
had  been  mindful  of  that  country  from  whence  I  came  out,  I 
might  have  had  opportunity  to  have  returned  ;  but  now  I  desire 
a  better  country,  that  is,  a  heavenly  one. 

Pru.    And  what  makes  you  so  desirous  to  go  to  Mount  Zion  ? 

Chr.  Why,  there  I  hope  to  see  Him  alive  that  did  hang  dead 
on  the  cross  ;  and  there  I  hope  to  be  rid  of  all  those  things  that 
to  this  day  are  an  annoyance  to  me  ;  there,  they  say,  there  is  no 
death;  and  there  I  shall  dwell  with  such  company  as  I  like  best. 
For,  to  tell  you  the  truth,  I  love  him,  because  I  was  by  him  eased 
of  my  burden  ;  and  I  am  weary  of  my  inward  sickness.  I  would 
fain  be  where  I  shall  die  no  more,  and  with  the  company  that 
shall  continually  cry,  Holy,  holy,  holy. 

Then  said  Charity  to  Christian,  Have  you  a  family  ?  are  you 
a  married  man  ? 

Chr.    I  have  a  wife  and  four  small  children. 

Cha.    And  why  did  you  not  bring  them  along  with  you  ? 

Chr.  Then  Christian  wept,  and  said,  Oh,  how  willingly  would  I 
have  done  it  !  but  they  were  all  of  them  utterly  averse  to  my 
going  on  pilgrimage. 

Now   I  saw  in  my   dream,   that   thus   they   sat  talking  together 

3 


34  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

until  supper  was  ready.  So  when  they  had  made  ready,  they  sat 
down  to  meat.  Now  the  table  was  furnished  with  fat  things,  and 
wine  that  was  well  refined ;  and  all  their  talk  at  the  table  was 
about  the  Lord  of  the  hill ;  as,  namely,  about  what  he  had  done, 
and  wherefore  he  did  what  he  did,  and  why  he  had  builded  that 
house :  and,  by  what  they  said,  I  perceived  that  he  had  been  a 
great  warrior,  and  had  fought  with  and  slain  him  that  had  the 
power  of  death ;  but  not  without  great  danger  to  himself.  And 
he  is  such  a  lover  of  poor  pilgrims,  that  the  like  is  not  to  be  found 
from  the  east  to  the  west. 

Thus  they  discoursed  together  till  late  at  night ;  and,  after 
they  had  committed  themselves  to  their  Lord  for  protection,  they 
betook  themselves  to  rest.  The  pilgrim  they  laid  in  a  large  upper 
chamber,  whose  window  opened  towards  the  sunrising :  the  name 
of  the  chamber  was  Peace. 

So  in  the  morning  they  all  got  up  ;  and,  after  some  more 
discourse,  they  told  him  that  he  should  not  depart  till  they  had  shown 
him  the  rarities  of  that  place.  And  first  they  had  him  into  the 
study,  where  they  showed  him  records  of  the  greatest  antiquity 
of  the  Lord  of  the  hill.  Then  they  read  to  him  some  of  the 
worthy  acts  that  some  of  his  servants  had  done :  as,  how  they 
had  "  subdued  kingdoms,  wrought  righteousness,  obtained  promises, 
stopped  the  mouths  of  lions,  quenched  the  violence  of  fire,  escaped 
the  edge  of  the  sword,  out  of  weakness  were  made  strong,  waxed 
valiant  in  fight,  and  turned  to  flight  the  armies  of  the  aliens."  Here 
also  were  several  other  histories  of  many  other  famous  things,  of 
all  which  Christian  had  a  view ;  as  of  things  both  ancient  and 
modern,  together  with  prophecies  and  predictions  of  things  that  have 
their  certain  accomplishment,  both  to  the  dread  and  amazement  of 
enemies,  and  the  comfort  and  solace  of  pilgrims. 

The  next  day  they  took  him,  and  had  him  into  the  armoury, 
where  they  showed  him  all  manner  of  furniture,  which  their  Lord 
had  provided  for  pilgrims,  as  sword,  shield,  helmet,  breastplate,  all- 
prayer,  and  shoes  that  would  not  wear  out.  And  there  was 
here  enough  of  this  to  harness  out  as  many  men  for  the  service 
of  their  Lord  as  there  be  stars  in  the  heaven  for  multitude. 

They  also  showed  him  some  of  the  engines  with  which  some  of 
his  servants  had  done  wonderful  things.  They  showed  him  Moses's 
rod ;  the  pitchers,  trumpets,  and  lamps  too,  with  which  Gideon 
put  to  flight  the  armies  of  Midian.  Then  they  showed  him  the 
ox's  goad  wherewith  Sham  gar  slew  six  hundred  men.  They  showed 
him  also  the  jaw-bone  with  which  Samson  did  such  mighty  feats  : 
they  showed  him,  moreover,  the  sling  and  stone  with  which  David 
slew  Goliath  of  Gath ;  and  the  sword  also  with  which  the.  Lord 


36  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

will  kill  the  Man  of  Sin,  in  the  day  that  he  shall  rise  up  to  the 
prey.  They  showed  him,  besides,  many  excellent  things,  with 
which  Christian  was  much  delighted.  This  done,  they  went  to 
their  rest  again. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  on  the  morrow  he  got  up  to 
go  forwards,  but  they  desired  him  to  stay  till  the  next  day  also  ; 
and  then,  said  they,  we  will,  if  the  day  be  clear,  show  you 
the  Delectable  Mountains ;  which,  they  said,  would  yet  further 
add  to  his  comfort,  because  they  were  nearer  the  desired  haven 
than  the  place  where  at  present  he  was  :  so  he  consented  and 
stayed. 

When  the  morning  was  up,  they  had  him  to  the  top  of  the 
house,  and  bid  him  look  south.  So  he  did  ;  and,  behold,  at  a  great 
distance,  he  saw  a  most  pleasant  mountainous  country,  beautified 
with  woods,  vineyards,  fruits  of  all  sorts,  flowers  also,  with  springs 
and  fountains,  very  delectable  to  behold.  Then  he  asked  the  name 
of  the  country.  They  said  it  was  Immanuel's  Land  ;  and  it  is  as 
common,  said  they,  as  this  hill  is,  to  and  for  all  the  pilgrims. 
And  when  thou  comest  there,  from  thence  thou  mayest  see  to  the 
gate  of  the  Celestial  City,  as  the  shepherds  that  live  there  will 
make  appear. 

Now  he  bethought  himself  of  setting  forward,  and  they  were 
willing  he  should.  But  first,  said  they,  let  us  go  again  into  the 
armoury.  So  they  did  ;  and  when  he  came  there,  they  harnessed 
him  from  head  to  foot  with  what  was  of  proof,  lest  perhaps  he 
should  meet  with  assaults  in  the  way.  He  being  therefore  thus 
prepared,  walked  out  with  his  friends  to  the  gate ;  and  there  he 
asked  the  porter  if  he  saw  any  pilgrim  pass  by.  Then  the  porter 
answered,  Yes. 

Chr.    Pray,  did  you  know  him  ?    said  he. 

Port.    I  asked  his  name,  and  he  told  me  it  was  Faithful. 

Chr.  Oh,  said  Christian,  I  know  him ;  he  is  my  townsman, 
my  near  neighbour ;  he  comes  from  the  place  where  I  was  born. 
How  far  do  you  think  he  may  be  before  ? 

Port.    He  has  got  by  this  time  below  the  hill. 

Chr.  Well,  said  Christian,  good  porter,  the  Lord  be  with  thee, 
and  add  to  all  thy  blessings  much  increase  for  the  kindness  thou 
hast  showed  to  me. 

Then  he  began  to  go  forward  ;  but  Discretion,  Piety,  Charity, 
and  Prudence  would  accompany  him  down  to  the  foot  of  the  hill, 
so  they  went  on  together.  Then  said  Christian,  As  it  was  difficult 
coming  up,  so,  so  far  as  I  can  see,  it  is  dangerous  going  down. 
Yes,  said  Prudence,  so  it  is  ;  for  it  is  a  hard  matter  for  a  man  to 
go  down  into  the  Valley  of  Humiliation,  as  thou  art  now,  and  to 


THE   PALACE   BEAUTIFUL  37 

catch  no  slip  by  the  way ;  therefore,  said  they,  are  we  come  out 
to  accompany  thee  down  the  hill.  So  he  began  to  go  down  the 
hill,  but  very  warily ;  yet  he  caught  a  slip  or  two. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  these  good  companions,  when 
Christian  was  gone  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  hill,  gave  him  a 
loaf  of  bread,  a  bottle  of  wine,  and  a  cluster  of  raisins  ;  and  then 
he  went  his  way. 


CHAPTER  V 

THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH 

UT  now,  in  this  Valley  of  Humiliation,  poor  Christian  was 
hard  put  to  it ;  for  he  had  gone  but  a  little  way  before 
he  espied  a  foul  fiend  coming  over  the  field  to  meet  him  : 
his  name  is  Apollyon.  Then  did  Christian  begin  to  be  afraid,  and 
to  cast  in  his  mind  whether  to  go  back  or  to  stand  his  ground. 
But  he  considered  again  that  he  had  no  armour  for  his  back,  and 
therefore  thought  that  to  turn  the  back  to  him  might  give  him  the 
greater  advantage  with  ease  to  pierce  him  with  his  darts  :  there- 
fore he  resolved  to  venture  and  stand  his  ground  ;  for,  thought  he, 
had  I  no  more  in  my  eye  than  the  saving  of  my  life,  it  would  be 
the  best  way  to  stand. 

So  he  went  on,  and  Apollyon  met  him.  Now  the  monster 
was  hideous  to  behold  :  he  was  clothed  with  scales  like  a  fish,  and 
they  are  his  pride ;  he  had  wings  like  a  dragon,  feet  like  a  bear, 
and  out  of  his  belly  came  fire  and  smoke,  and  his  mouth  was  as 
the  mouth  of  a  lion.  When  he  was  come  up  to  Christian,  he 
beheld  him  with  a  disdainful  countenance,  and  thus  began  to 
question  with  him  :— 

Apol.    Whence  came  you  ?  and  whither  are  you  bound  ? 

Chr.  I  am  come  from  the  City  of  Destruction,  which  is  the 
place  of  all  evil,  and  am  going  to  the  City  of  Zion. 

Apol.  By  this  I  perceive  that  thou  art  one  of  my  subjects ; 
for  all  that  country  is  mine,  and  I  am  the  prince  and  god  of  it. 
How  is  it,  then,  that  thou  hast  run  away  from  thy  king  ?  Were 
it  not  that  I  hope  that  thou  mayest  do  me  more  service,  I  would 
strike  thee  now  at  one  blow  to  the  ground. 

Chr.  I  was  indeed  born  in  your  dominions,  but  your  service 
was  hard,  and  your  wages  such  as  a  man  could  not  live  on — for 
the  wages  of  sin  is  death ;  therefore,  when  I  was  come  to  years, 
I  did,  as  other  considerate  persons  do,  look  out,  if  perhaps  I  might 
mend  myself. 

Apol.  There  is  no  prince  that  will  thus  lightly  lose  his  subjects, 
neither  will  I  as  yet  lose  thee  :  but  since  thou  complainest  of  thy 

38 


THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH     39 

service  and  wages,  be  content  to  go  back ;  and  what  our  country 
will  afford,  I  do  here  promise  to  give  thee. 

Chr.  But  I  have  let  myself  to  another,  even  to  the  King  of 
princes ;  and  how  can  I  with  fairness  go  back  with  thee  ? 

Apol.  Thou  hast  done  in  this  according  to  the  proverb, 
"  changed  a  bad  for  a  worse "  :  but  it  is  ordinary  for  those 
that  have  professed  themselves  his  servants,  after  a  while  to  give 
him  the  slip,  and  return  again  to  me.  Do  thou  so  too,  and  all 
shall  be  well. 

Chr.  I  have  given  him  my  faith,  and  sworn  my  allegiance  to 
him  ;  how,  then,  can  I  go  back  from  this,  and  not  be  hanged  as 
a  traitor  ? 

Apol.  Thou  didst  the  same  to  me,  and  yet  I  am  willing  to 
pass  by  all,  if  now  thou  wilt  yet  turn  and  go  back. 

Chr.  What  I  promised  thee  was  in  my  nonage ;  and,  besides, 
I  count  that  the  Prince  under  whose  banner  I  now  stand  is  able 
to  absolve  me ;  yea,  and  to  pardon  also  what  I  did  as  to  my 
compliance  with  thee.  And  besides,  O  thou  destroying  Apollyon  ! 
to  speak  truth,  I  like  his  service,  his  wages,  his  servants,  his 
government,  his  company,  and  country,  better  than  thine ;  there- 
fore leave  off  to  persuade  me  further  :  I  am  his  servant,  and  I  will 
follow  him. 

Apol.  Thou  hast  already  been  unfaithful  in  thy  service  to 
him  ;  and  how  dost  thou  think  to  receive  wages  of  him  ? 

Chr.    Wherein,   O  Apollyon,   have  I  been  unfaithful  to  him  ? 

Apol.  Thou  didst  faint  at  first  setting  out,  when  thou  wast 
almost  choked  in  the  Gulf  of  Despond.  Thou  didst  attempt  wrong 
ways  to  be  rid  of  thy  burden,  whereas  thou  shouldest  have  stayed 
till  thy  Prince  had  taken  it  off.  Thou  didst  sinfully  sleep,  and 
lose  thy  choice  things.  Thou  wast  also  almost  persuaded  to  go 
back  at  the  sight  of  the  lions.  And  when  thou  talkest  of  thy 
journey,  and  of  what  thou  hast  seen  and  heard,  thou  art  inwardly 
desirous  of  vain-glory  in  all  that  thou  sayest  or  doest. 

Chr.  All  this  is  true,  and  much  more  which  thou  hast  left 
out ;  but  the  Prince  whom  I  serve  and  honour  is  merciful,  and 
ready  to  forgive  :  and  I  have  groaned  under  these  infirmities, 
being  sorry  for  them,  and  have  obtained  pardon  of  my  Prince. 

Apol.  Then  Apollyon  broke  out  into  a  grievous  rage,  saying, 
I  am  an  enemy  to  this  Prince  ;  I  hate  his  person,  laws,  and  people : 
I  am  come  out  on  purpose  to  withstand  thee. 

Chr.  Apollyon,  beware  what  you  do,  for  I  am  in  the  King's 
highway,  the  way  of  holiness  ;  therefore  take  heed  to  yourself. 

Apol.  Then  Apollyon  straddled  quite  over  the  whole  breadth 
of  the  way,  and  said,  I  am  void  of  fear  in  this  matter.  Prepare 


40  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

thyself  to  die ;  for  I  swear  by  my  infernal  den  that  thou  shalt 
go  no  further  :  here  will  I  spill  thy  soul.  And  with  that  he  threw 
a  flaming  dart  at  his  breast ;  but  Christian  had  a  shield  in  his 
hand,  with  which  he  caught  it,  and  so  prevented  the  danger  of 
that. 

Then  did  Christian  draw,  for  he  saw  it  was  time  to  bestir 
him ;  and  Apollyon  as  fast  made  at  him,  throwing  darts  as  thick 
as  hail ;  by  the  which,  notwithstanding  all  that  Christian  could  do 
to  avoid  it,  Apollyon  wounded  him  in  his  head,  his  hand,  and 
foot.  This  made  Christian  give  a  little  back  :  Apollyon,  therefore, 
followed  his  work  amain,  and  Christian  again  took  courage,  and 
resisted  as  manfully  as  he  could.  This  sore  combat  lasted  for 
above  half  a  day,  even  till  Christian  was  almost  quite  spent ;  for 
you  must  know  that  Christian,  by  reason  of  his  wounds,  must  needs 
grow  weaker  and  weaker. 

Then  Apollyon,  espying  his  opportunity,  began  to  gather  up 
close  to  Christian,  and,  wrestling  with  him,  gave  him  a  dreadful 
fall ;  and  with  that  Christian's  sword  flew  out  of  his  hand.  Then 
said  Apollyon,  I  am  sure  of  thee  now.  And  with  that  he  had 
almost  pressed  him  to  death,  so  that  Christian  began  to  despair  of 
life.  But,  as  God  would  have  it,  while  Apollyon  was  fetching  his 
last  blow,  thereby  to  make  a  full  end  of  this  good  man,  Christian 
nimbly  reached  out  his  hand  for  his  sword,  and  caught  it,  saying, 
"  Rejoice  not  against  me,  O  mine  enemy  :  when  I  fall,  I  shall 
arise,"  and  with  that  gave  him  a  deadly  thrust,  which  made  him 
give  back,  as  one  that  had  received  his  mortal  wound.  Christian, 
perceiving  that,  made  at  him  again,  saying,  "  Nay,  in  all  these 
things  we  are  more  than  conquerors  through  Him  that  loved  us." 
And  with  that  Apollyon  spread  forth  his  dragon  wings,  and  sped 
him  away,  so  that  Christian  saw  him  no  more. 

In  this  combat  no  man  can  imagine,  unless  he  had  seen  and 
heard,  what  yelling  and  hideous  roaring  Apollyon  made  all  the 
time  of  the  fight — he  spake  like  a  dragon  ;  and,  on  the  other  side, 
what  sighs  and  groans  burst  from  Christian's  heart.  I  never  saw 
him  all  the  while  give  as  much  as  one  pleasant  look,  till  he  perceived 
he  had  wounded  Apollyon  with  his  two  edged  sword  ;  then,  indeed, 
he  did  smile  and  look  upward  !  But  it  was  the  dreadfullest  sight 
that  ever  I  saw. 

So  when  the  battle  was  over,  Christian  said,  I  will  here 
give  thanks  to  Him  that  hath  delivered  me  out  of  the  mouth  of 
the  lion,  to  Him  that  did  help  me  against  Apollyon.  And  so 
he  did.  Then  there  came  to  him  a  hand  with  some  of  the 
leaves  of  the  Tree  of  Life  which  Christian  took  and  applied  to  the 
wounds  that  he  had  received  in  the  battle,  and  was  healed  im- 


:HRJSTWTS  TIGHT  WITHAPOLLYON 


42  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

mediately.  He  also  sat  down  in  that  place  to  eat  bread,  and  to 
drink  of  the  bottle  that  Avas  given  to  him  a  little  before :  so, 
being  refreshed,  he  addressed  himself  to  his  journey  with  his 
sword  drawn  in  his  hand ;  for  he  said,  I  know  not  but  some 
other  enemy  may  be  at  hand.  But  he  met  with  no  other  affront 
from  Apollyon  quite  through  this  valley. 

Now,  at  the  end  of  this  valley  was  another,  called  the  Valley 
of  the  Shadow  of  Death ;  and  Christian  must  needs  go  through 
it,  because  the  way  to  the  Celestial  City  lay  through  the  midst 
of  it.  Now,  this  valley  is  a  very  solitary  place.  The  prophet 
Jeremiah  thus  describes  it :  "A  wilderness,  a  land  of  deserts  and 
pits  ;  a  land  of  drought,  and  of  the  shadow  of  death  ;  a  land  that 
no  man  passeth  through,  and  where  no  man  dwelt." 

Now  here  Christian  was  worse  put  to  it  than  in  his  fight 
with  Apollyon  ;  as  by  the  sequel  you  shall  see. 

I    saw    then    in    my    dream,    that    when    Christian    was    got    to 
the    borders    of   the    Shadow    of   Death,    there    met    him    two    men, 
making  haste  to  go  back ;    to  whom  Christian  spake  as  follows  :— 
Chr.    Whither  are  you  going  ? 

Men.  They  said,  Back  !  back  !  and  we  would  have  you  do  so 
too,  if  either  life  or  peace  is  prized  by  you. 

Chr.    Why,    what's   the   matter  ?    said   Christian. 
Men.    Matter !   said  they  :   we  were  going  that  way  as  you  are 
going,   and    went   as  far  as  we  durst ;   and   indeed   we   were   almost 
past   coming  back  ;   for  had  we   gone   a  little   further,   we   had  not 
been   here   to   bring   the   news   to   thee. 

Chr.    But  what  have  you  met  with  ?  said  Christian. 
Men.    Why,    we   were   almost   in   the   Valley   of  the   Shadow   of 
Death,    but  that    by    good  hap    we  looked   before   us,   and    saw  the 
danger  before  we  came  to  it. 

Chr.  But  what  have  you  seen  ?  said  Christian. 
Men.  Seen  !  why,  the  valley  itself,  which  is  as  dark  as  pitch  : 
we  also  saw  there  the  hobgoblins,  satyrs,  and  dragons  of  the  pit : 
we  heard  also  in  that  valley  a  continual  howling  and  yelling, 
as  of  a  people  under  unutterable  misery,  who  there  sat  bound 
in  affliction  and  irons  :  and  over  that  valley  hang  the  discouraging 
clouds  of  confusion  :  death  also  does  always  spread  his  wings 
over  it.  In  a  word,  it  is  every  whit  dreadful,  being  utterly  with- 
out order. 

Chr.    Then,    said    Christian,    I    perceive    not    yet,    by    what    you 
have  said,  but  that  this  is  my  way  to  the  desired  haven. 
Men.  Be  it  thy  way  ;  we  will  not  choose  it  for  ours. 
So  they  parted  ;    and  Christian  went  on  his  way,  but  still  with 
his  sword  drawn  in  his  hand,  for  fear  lest  he  should   be  assaulted. 


THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH     43 

I  saw  then  in  my  dream,  as  far  as  this  valley  reached,  there 
was  on  the  right  hand  a  very  deep  ditch  ;  that  ditch  is  it  into 
which  the  blind  have  led  the  blind  in  all  ages,  and  have  both 
there  miserably  perished.  Again,  behold,  on  the  left  hand,  there 
was  a  very  dangerous  quag,  into  which,  if  even  a  good  man 
falls,  he  finds  no  bottom  for  his  foot  to  stand  on  :  into  that  quag 
King  David  once  did  fall,  and  had,  no  doubt,  therein  been  smoth- 
ered, had  not  He  that  is  able  plucked  him  out. 

The   pathway   was   here   also   exceedingly   narrow,   and   therefore 


good  Christian  was  the  more  put  to  it ;  for  when  he  sought  in 
the  dark  to  shun  the  ditch  on  the  one  hand,  he  was  ready  to 
tip  over  into  the  mire  on  the  other ;  also  when  he  sought  to 
escape  the  mire,  without  great  carefulness  he  would  be  ready  to 
fall  into  the  ditch.  Thus  he  went  on,  and  I  heard  him  here 
sigh  bitterly ;  for  besides  the  danger  mentioned  above,  the  path- 
way was  here  so  dark,  that  ofttimes,  when  he  lifted  up  his  foot 
to  go  forward,  he  knew  not  where  or  upon  what  he  should  set 
it  next. 


44  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

About  the  midst  of  this  valley  I  perceived  the  mouth  of  hell 
to  be,  and  it  stood  also  hard  by  the  wayside.  Now,  thought 
Christian,  what  shall  I  do  ?  And  ever  and  anon  the  flame  and 
smoke  would  come  out  in  such  abundance,  with  sparks  and  hideous 
noises  (things  that  cared  not  for  Christian's  sword,  as  did  Apollyon 
before),  that  he  was  forced  to  put  up  his  sword,  and  betake  him- 
self to  another  weapon,  called  all-prayer :  so  he  cried  in  my 
hearing,  "  O  Lord,  I  beseech  thee,  deliver  my  soul." 

Thus  he  went  on  a  great  while,  yet  still  the  flames  would  be 
reaching  towards  him  :  also  he  heard  doleful  voices,  and  rushings 
to  and  fro,  so  that  sometimes  he  thought  he  should  be  torn  in 
pieces,  or  trodden  down  like  mire  in  the  streets.  This  frightful 
sight  was  seen,  and  these  dreadful  noises  were  heard  by  him,  for 
several  miles  together ;  and  coming  to  a  place  where  he  thought 
he  heard  a  company  of  fiends  coming  forward  to  meet  him,  he 
stopped,  and  began  to  muse  what  he  had  best  to  do.  Sometimes 
he  had  half  a  thought  to  go  back ;  then  again  he  thought  he 
might  be  half-way  through  the  valley.  He  remembered  also  how 
he  had  already  vanquished  many  a  danger ;  and  that  the  danger 
of  going  back  might  be  much  more  than  to  go  forward :  so  he 
resolved  to  go  on.  Yet  the  fiends  seemed  to  come  nearer  and 
nearer.  But  when  they  were  come  even  almost  at  him, 
he  cried  out  with  a  most  vehement  voice,  "  I  will  walk  in  the 
strength  of  the  Lord  God ;  "  so  they  gave  back,  and  came  no 
further. 

When  Christian  had  travelled  in  this  disconsolate  condition 
some  considerable  time,  he  thought  he  heard  the  voice  of  a  man, 
as  going  before  him,  saying,  "  Though  I  walk  through  the  valley 
of  the  shadow  of  death,  I  will  fear  none  ill :  for  thou  art  with  me." 

Then  was   he  glad,   and  that  for  these  reasons  :— 

First,  Because  he  gathered  from  thence,  that  some  who  feared 
God  were  in  this  valley  as  well  as  himself. 

Secondly,  For  that  he  perceived  God  was  with  them,  though 
in  that  dark  and  dismal  state.  And  why  not,  thought  he,  with 
me  ?  though,  by  reason  of  the  impediment  that  attends  this  place, 
I  cannot  perceive  it. 

Thirdly,  For  that  he  hoped,  could  he  overtake  them,  to  have 
company  by-and-by. 

So  he  went  on,  and  called  to  him  that  was  before ;  but  he 
knew  not  what  to  answer,  for  that  he  also  thought  himself  to 
be  alone.  And  by-and-by  the  day  broke  :  then  said  Christian, 
He  hath  "turned  the  shadow  of  death  into  the  morning." 

Now  morning  being  come,  he  looked  back,  not  out  of  desire 
to  return,  but  to  see,  by  the  light  of  the  day,  what  hazards  he 


THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH 


45 


had  f  gone  through  in  the  dark:  so  he  saw  more  perfectly  the 
ditch  that  was  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  quag  that  was  on  the 
other ;  also  how  narrow  the  way  was  which  led  betwixt  them 
both  :  also  now  he  saw  the  hobgoblins,  and  satyrs,  and  dragons 
of  the  pit,  but  all  afar  off;  for  after  break  of  day  they  came  not 


nigh  ;  yet  they  were  discovered  to  him,  according  to  that  which 
is  written,  "  He  discovereth  deep  things  out  of  darkness,  and 
bringeth  to  light  the  shadow  of  death." 

Now    was    Christian    much    affected    with    this    deliverance   from 
all    the    dangers    of    his    solitary    way ;    which  dangers,    though    he 


46  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

feared  them  much  before,  yet  he  saw  them  more  clearly  now, 
because  the  light  of  the  day  made  them  conspicuous  to  him. 

And  about  this  time  the  sun  was  rising,  and  this  was  another 
mercy  to  Christian  ;  for  you  must  note,  that  though  the  first  part 
of  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death  was  dangerous,  yet  this 
second  part,  which  he  was  yet  to  go,  was,  if  possible,  far  more 
dangerous  :  for,  from  the  place  where  he  now  stood,  even  to  the 
end  of  the  valley,  the  way  was  all  along  set  so  full  of  snares, 
traps,  gins,  and  nets  here,  and  so  full  of  pits,  pitfalls,  deep  holes, 
and  shelvings  down  there,  that,  had  it  now  been  dark,  as  it  was 
when  he  came  the  first  part  of  the  way,  had  he  had  a  thousand 
souls,  they  had  in  reason  been  cast  away ;  but,  as  I  said,  just 
now  the  sun  was  rising.  Then  said  he,  "  His  candle  shineth  on 
my  head,  and  by  his  light  I  go  through  darkness." 

In  this  light,  therefore,  he  came  to  the  end  of  the  valley. 
Now  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  at  the  end  of  the  valley  lay  blood, 
bones,  ashes,  and  mangled  bodies  of  men,  even  of  pilgrims  that 
had  gone  this  way  formerly ;  and  while  I  was  musing  what  should 
be  the  reason,  I  espied  a  little  before  me  a  cave,  where  two 
giants  dwelt  in  old  times,  by  whose  power  and  tyranny  the  men 
whose  bones,  blood,  ashes,  etc.,  lay  there,  were  cruelly  put  to 
death.  But  by  this  place  Christian  went  without  danger,  for  one 
has  been  dead  many  a  day ;  and  as  for  the  other,  though  he 
be  yet  alive,  he  is,  by  reason  of  age,  and  also  of  the  many  shrewd 
brushes  that  he  met  with  in  his  younger  days,  grown  so  crazy 
and  stiff  in  his  joints,  that  he  can  now  do  little  more  than  sit 
in  his  cave's  mouth,  grinning  at  pilgrims  as  they  go  by,  and  biting 
his  nails  because  he  cannot  come  at  them. 

So  I  saw  that  Christian  went  on  his  way ;  yet,  at  the  sight 
of  the  old  man  that  sat  at  the  mouth  of  the  cave,  he  could  not 
tell  what  to  think,  especially  because  he  spoke  to  him,  though 
he  could  not  go  after  him,  saying,  You  will  never  mend  till  more 
of  you  be  burnt.  But  he  held  his  peace,  and  set  a  good  face 
on  it ;  and  so  went  by,  and  catched  no  hurt. 


CHAPTER   VI 

CHRISTIAN   AND    FAITHFUL 

NOW,  as  Christian  went  on  his  way,  he  came  to  a  little 
ascent,  which  was  cast  up  on  purpose  that  pilgrims  might 
see  before  them.  Up  there,  therefore,  Christian  went  ; 
and  looking  forward,  he  saw  Faithful  before  him  upon  his  jour- 
ney. Then  said  Christian  aloud,  Ho,  ho  !  so-ho  !  stay,  and  I 
will  be  your  companion.  At  that  Faithful  looked  behind  him ; 
to  whom  Christian  cried,  Stay,  stay,  till  I  come  up  to  you.  But 
Faithful  answered,  No ;  I  am  upon  my  life,  and  the  avenger  of 
blood  is  behind  me. 

At  this  Christian  was  somewhat  moved,  and,  putting  to  all 
his  strength,  he  quickly  got  up  with  Faithful,  and  did  also  over- 
run him  ;  so  the  last  was  first.  Then  did  Christian  vain-gloriously 
smile,  because  he  had  gotten  the  start  of  his  brother ;  but  not 
taking  good  heed  to  his  feet,  he  suddenly  stumbled  and  fell,  and 
could  not  rise  again,  until  Faithful  came  up  to  help  him. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream  they  went  very  lovingly  on  to- 
gether, and  had  sweet  discourse  of  all  things  that  had  happened 
to  them  in  their  pilgrimage  ;  and  thus  Christian  began  :  — 

Chr.  My  honoured  and  well-beloved  brother,  Faithful,  I  am 
glad  that  I  have  overtaken  you,  and  that  God  has  so  tempered  our 
spirits,  that  we  can  walk  as  companions  in  this  so  pleasant  a  path. 

Faith.  I  had  thought,  dear  friend,  to  have  had  your  company 
quite  from  our  town,  but  you  did  get  the  start  of  me  ;  wherefore 
I  was  forced  to  come  thus  much  of  the  way  alone. 

Chr.  How  long  did  you  stay  in  the  City  of  Destruction,  be- 
fore you  set  out  after  me  on  your  pilgrimage  ? 

Faith.  Till  I  could  stay  no  longer ;  for  there  was  great  talk 
presently  after  you  were  gone  out,  that  our  city  would  in  a 
short  time,  with  fire  from  heaven,  be  burned  down  to  the  ground. 

Chr.  Well,  neighbour  Faithful,  said  Christian,  tell  me  now  what 
you  have  met  with  in  the  way  as  you  came ;  for  I  know  you 
have  met  with  some  things,  or  else  it  may  be  writ  for  a  wonder. 

Faith.    I  escaped    the    Slough    that    I    perceived    you    fell    into 

48 


CHRISTIAN   AND   FAITHFUL  49 

and  got  up  to  the  gate  without  that  danger.  When  I  came 
to  the  foot  of  the  hill  called  Difficulty,  I  met  with  a  very  aged 
man,  who  asked  me  what  I  was,  and  whither  bound.  I  told  him 
that  I  was  a  pilgrim,  going  to  the  Celestial  City.  Then  said  the 
old  man,  Thou  lookest  like  an  honest  fellow  ;  wilt  thou  be  content 
to  dwell  with  me  for  the  wages  that  I  shall  give  thee  ?  Then 
I  asked  him  his  name,  and  where  he  dwelt.  He  said  his  name 
was  Adam  the  First,  and  that  he  dwelt  in  the  town  of  Deceit. 
I  asked  him  then  what  was  his  work,  and  what  the  wages  that 
he  would  give.  He  told  me  that  his  work  was  many  delights ; 
and  his  wages,  that  I  should  be  his  heir  at  last.  Then  I  asked 
how  long  time  he  would  have  me  live  with  him.  And  he  told 
me,  as  long  as  he  lived  himself. 

Chr.  Well,  and  what  conclusion  came  the  old  man  and  you 
to  at  last? 

Faith.  Why,  at  first  I  found  myself  somewhat  inclinable  to 
go  with  the  man,  for  I  thought  he  spoke  very  fair ;  but  looking 
in  his  forehead  as  I  talked  with  him,  I  saw  there  written,  "  Put 
off  the  old  man  with  his  deeds." 

Chr.    And  how  then  ? 

Faith.  Then  it  came  burning  hot  in  my  mind,  whatever 
he  said,  and  however  he  flattered,  when  he  got  me  home  to  his 
house,  he  would  sell  me  for  a  slave.  So  I  bid  him  forbear  to 
talk,  for  I  would  not  come  near  the  door  of  his  house.  Then 
he  reviled  me,  and  told  me  that  he  would  send  such  a  one  after 
me  that  should  make  my  way  bitter  to  my  soul.  So  I  turned 
to  go  away  from  him ;  but  just  as  I  turned  myself  to  go  thence, 
I  felt  him  take  hold  of  my  flesh,  and  give  me  such  a  deadly 
twitch  back,  that  I  thought  he  had  pulled  part  of  me  after  him- 
self. This  made  me  cry,  "  O  wretched  man !  "  So  I  went  on 
my  way  up  the  hill.  And  when  I  had  got  half-way  up  I  looked 
behind  and  saw  him  coming  after  me,  swift  as  the  wind.  And  so 
soon  as  he  overtook  me,  he  was  but  for  a  word  and  a  blow  :  for 
down  he  knocked  me,  and  laid  me  for  dead.  When  I  came  to 
myself  again,  I  cried  him  mercy;  but  he  said,  "I  know  not  how 
to  show  mercy;"  and  with  that  knocked  me  down  again.  He  had 
doubtless  made  an  end  of  me,  but  that  one  came  by,  and  bid 
him  forbear. 

Chr.    Who   was   that,    that   bid    him   forbear  ? 

Faith.  I  did  not  know  him  at  first,  but  as  he  went  by,  I 
perceived  the  holes  in  his  hands  and  in  his  side  ;  then  I  concluded 
that  he  was  our  Lord.  So  I  went  up  the  hill. 

Chr.  But  did  not  you  see  the  house  that  stood  there,  on 
the  top  of  that  hill  on  the  side  of  which  Moses  met  you  ? 


50  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Faith.  Yes,  and  the  lions  too,  before  I  came  at  it :  but  for 
the  lions,  I  think  they  were  asleep,  for  it  was  about  noon  ;  and, 
because  I  had  so  much  of  the  day  before  me,  I  passed  by  the 
porter,  and  came  down  the  hill. 

Chr.  He  told  me,  indeed,  that  he  saw  you  go  by ;  but  I 
wish  that  you  had  called  at  the  house,  for  they  would  have 
showed  you  so  many  rarities,  that  you  would  scarce  have  forgot 
them  to  the  day  of  your  death. — But  pray  tell  me,  did  you  meet 
nobody  in  the  Valley  of  Humility  ? 

Faith.  Yes ;  I  met  with  one  Discontent,  Avho  would  willingly 
have  persuaded  me  to  go  back  again  with  him  :  his  reason  was, 
for  that  the  valley  was  altogether  without  honour. 

Chr.    Met  you  with  nothing  else  in  that  valley  ? 

Faith.  Yes,  I  met  with  Shame  ;  but  of  all  the  men  that  I  met 
with  on  my  pilgrimage,  he,  I  think,  bears  the  wrong  name.  The 
others  would  be  said  nay,  after  a  little  argumentation  and 
somewhat  else  ;  but  this  bold-faced  Shame  would  never  have  done. 
But  at  last  I  told  him  that  it  was  but  in  vain  to  attempt 
further  in  this  business ;  for  those  things  that  he  disdained,  in 
those  did  I  see  most  glory :  and  so  at  last  I  got  past  this  im- 
portunate one. 

Chr.  I  am  glad,  my  brother,  that  thou  didst  Avithstand  this 
villain  so  bravely ;  for  of  all,  as  thou  sayest,  I  think  he  has  the 
wrong  name ;  for  he  is  so  bold  as  to  follow  us  in  the  streets, 
and  to  attempt  to  put  us  to  shame  before  all  men ;  that  is,  to 
make  us  ashamed  of  that  which  is  good.  But  did  you  meet  with 
nobody  else  in  that  valley  ? 

Faith.  No,  not  I ;  for  I  had  sunshine  all  the  rest  of  the  way 
through  that,  and  also  through  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of 
Death. 

Chr.  'Twas  well  for  you ;  I  am  sure  it  fared  far  otherwise 
with  me.  I  had  for  a  long  season,  as  soon  almost  as  I  entered 
into  that  valley,  a  dreadful  combat  with  that  foul  fiend  Apollyon ; 
yea,  I  thought  verily  he  would  have  killed  me,  especially  when 
he  got  me  down,  and  crushed  me  under  him,  as  if  he  would 
have  crushed  me  to  pieces :  for  as  he  threw  me,  my  sword  flew 
out  of  my  hand — nay,  he  told  me  he  was  sure  of  me ;  but  I 
cried  to  God,  and  he  heard  me,  and  delivered  me  out  of  all  my 
troubles.  Then  I  entered  into  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death, 
and  had  no  light  for  almost  half  the  way  through  it.  I  thought 
I  should  have  been  killed  there  over  and  over  :  but  at  last  day 
brake,  and  the  sun  arose,  and  I  went  through  that  which  was 
behind  with  far  more  ease  and  quiet. 

Moreover,   I   saw   in   my   dream,   that,   as  they  went  on,   Faith- 


OWE  c 

D  BID    HIM 


52  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

ful,  as  he  chanced  to  look  on  one  side,  saw  a  man  whose  name 
was  Talkative,  walking  at  a  distance  beside  them ;  for  in  this 
place  there  was  room  enough  for  them  all  to  walk.  He  was  a 
tall  man,  and  something  more  comely  at  a  distance  than  at  hand. 
To  this  man  Faithful  addressed  himself  in  this  manner  :— 

Faith.  Friend,  whither  away  ?  Are  you  going  to  the  heav- 
enly country  ? 

Talk.    I  am  going  to  that  same  place. 

Faith.  That  is  well  :  then  I  hope  we  may  have  your  good 
company. 

Talk.    With  a  very  good  will,   will  I  be  your  companion. 
Faith.    Come    on,    then,    and    let    us    go    together,    and    let    us 
spend    our    time    in    discoursing    of   things    that    are    profitable. 

Talk.  To  talk  of  things  that  are  good,  to  me  is  very  accept- 
able, with  you,  or  with  any  other ;  and  I  am  glad  that  I  have  met 
with  those  that  incline  to  so  good  a  work. 

Faith.  Well,  then,  said  Faithful,  what  is  that  one  thing  that 
we  shall  at  this  time  found  our  discourse  upon  ? 

Talk.  What  you  will :  I  will  talk  of  things  heavenly,  of  things 
earthly ;  things  moral,  or  things  evangelical ;  things  sacred,  or 
things  profane ;  things  past,  or  things  to  come ;  things  foreign, 
or  things  at  home  ;  things  more  essential,  or  things  circumstantial, 
provided  that  all  be  done  to  our  profit. 

Faith.  Now  did  Faithful  begin  to  wonder ;  and  stepping  to 
Christian  (for  he  walked  all  this  while  by  himself),  he  said  to  him, 
but  softly,  What  a  brave  companion  we  have  got  !  Surely  this 
man  will  make  a  very  excellent  pilgrim. 

Chr.    At   this    Christian    modestly    smiled,    and   said,    This    man, 
with    whom    you    are    so    taken,    will    beguile    with    this    tongue    of 
his   twenty   of  them   that  know   him   not. 
Faith.    Do  you  know  him,  then  ? 

Chr.    Know  him  !    yes,  better  than  he  knows  himself. 
Faith.    Pray,  what  is  he  ? 

Chr.  His  name  is  Talkative :  he  dwelleth  in  our  town.  I 
wonder  that  you  should  be  a  stranger  to  him ;  only  I  consider 
that  our  town  is  large. 

Faith.    Whose  son  is  he  ?   and  whereabout  doth  he  dwell  ? 
Chr.    He    is    the    son    of    one    Say- well ;    he    dwelt    in    Prating 
Row ;    and    he    is    known    to    all    that    are    acquainted    with    him    by 
the   name   of  Talkative   of  Prating   Row ;    and,    notwithstanding   his 
fine  tongue,  he  is  but  a  sorry  fellow. 

Faith.    Well,  he  seems  to  be  a  very  pretty  man. 
Chr.    That  is,   to  them  that  have  not  a  thorough   acquaintance 
with  him,  for  he  is  best  abroad  ;    near  home  he  is  ugly  enough. 


CHRISTIAN  AND   FAITHFUL  53 

Faith.  Well,  I  see  that  saying  and  doing  are  two  things,  and 
hereafter  I  shall  better  observe  this  distinction. 

Then  Faithful  stepped  forward  again,  and  said  to  Talkative, 
Come,  what  cheer  ?  How  is  it  now  ? 

Talk.  Thank  you,  well ;  I  thought  we  should  have  had  a 
great  deal  of  talk  by  this  time. 

Faith.  Well,  if  you  will,  we  will  fall  to  it  now  ;  and  since  you 
left  it  with  me  to  state  the  question,  let  it  be  this  :  How  doth  the 
saving  grace  of  God  discover  itself  when  it  is  in  the  heart  of  man  ? 

2'rt/A1.  Then  Talkative  at  first  began  to  blush  ;  but  recovering 
himself,  he  thus  replied  :  You  come  now  to  experience,  to  con- 
science, and  God.  This  kind  of  discourse  I  did  not  expect ;  nor 
am  I  disposed  to  give  an  answer  to  such  questions,  because  I 
count  not  myself  bound  thereto,  unless  you  take  upon  you  to  be 
a  catechiser ;  and  though  you  should  so  do,  yet  I  may  refuse 
to  make  you  my  judge.  But,  I  pray,  will  you  tell  me  why  you 
ask  me  such  questions  ? 

Faith.  Because  I  saw  you  forward  to  talk,  and  because  I 
knew  not  that  you  had  aught  else  but  notion.  Besides,  to  tell 
you  the  truth,  I  have  heard  of  you  that  you  are  a  man  whose 
religion  lies  in  talk,  and  that  your  conversation  gives  this  your 
mouth- profession  the  lie. 

Talk.  Since  you  are  so  ready  to  take  up  reports,  and  to 
judge  so  rashly  as  you  do,  I  cannot  but  conclude  you  are  some 
peevish  or  melancholic  man,  not  fit  to  be  discoursed  with  ;  and 
so  adieu. 

Chr.  Then  came  up  Christian  and  said  to  his  brother,  I  told 
you  how  it  would  happen ;  your  words  and  his  lusts  could  not 
agree.  He  had  rather  leave  your  company  than  reform  his  life. 
But  he  is  gone,  as  I  said  ;  let  him  go,  the  loss  is  no  man's  but 
his  own.  He  has  saved  us  the  trouble  of  going  from  him ;  for 
he  continuing  as  he  is,  he  would  have  been  but  a  blot  in  our 
company. 

Thus  they  went  on,  talking  of  what  they  had  seen  by  the 
way,  and  so  made  that  way  easy  which  would  otherwise,  no 
doubt,  have  been  tedious  to  them  ;  for  now  they  went  through  a 
wilderness. 

When  they  were  almost  quite  out  of  this  wilderness,  Faithful 
chanced  to  cast  his  eye  back,  and  espied  one  coming  after  them, 
and  he  knew  him.  Oh  !  said  Faithful  to  his  brother,  who  comes 
yonder  ?  Then  Christian  looked,  and  said,  It  is  my  good  friend 
Evangelist.  Ay,  and  my  good  friend  too,  said  Faithful ;  for  it 
was  he  that  set  me  on  the  way  to  the  gate.  Now  was  Evangelist 
come  up  with  them,  and  thus  saluted  them  :— 


54  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Evan.  Peace  be  to  you,  dearly  beloved  ;  and  peace  be  to  your 
helpers. 

Chr.  Welcome,  welcome,  my  good  Evangelist ;  the  sight  of 
thy  countenance  brings  to  my  remembrance  thy  ancient  kindness 
and  unwearied  labours  for  my  eternal  good. 

Faith.  And  a  thousand  times  welcome,  said  good  Faithful ; 
thy  company,  O  sweet  Evangelist,  how  desirable  is  it  to  us  poor 
pilgrims  ! 

Evan.  Then  said  Evangelist,  How  hath  it  fared  with  you,  my 
friends,  since  the  time  of  our  last  parting  ?  What  have  you  met 
with  ?  and  how  have  you  behaved  yourselves  ? 

Then  Christian  and  Faithful  told  him  of  all  things  that  had 
happened  to  them  in  the  way ;  and  how,  and  with  what  difficulty, 
they  had  arrived  to  that  place. 

Evan.  Right  glad  am  I,  said  Evangelist,  not  that  you  have  met 
with  trials,  but  that  you  have  been  victors,  and  for  that  you  have, 
notwithstanding  many  weaknesses,  continued  in  the  way  to  this  very 
day.  My  sons,  you  have  heard,  in  the  words  of  the  truth  of  the 
gospel,  that  you  must  "  through  many  tribulations  enter  into  the 
kingdom  of  heaven ;  "  and,  again,  that  "  in  every  city  bonds  and 
afflictions  abide  you  :  "  and  therefore  you  cannot  expect  that  you 
should  long  go  on  your  pilgrimage  without  them,  in  some  sort  or 
other.  You  have  found  something  of  the  truth  of  these  testimonies 
upon  you  already,  and  more  will  immediately  follow  :  for  now,  as 
you  see,  you  are  almost  out  of  this  wilderness,  and  therefore  you 
will  soon  come  into  a  town  that  you  will  by-and-by  see  before  you ; 
and  in  that  town  you  will  be  hardly  beset  with  enemies,  who  will 
strain  hard  but  they  will  kill  you  :  and  be  you  sure  that  one  or 
both  of  you  must  seal  the  testimony  Avhich  you  hold  with  blood  ; 
but  be  you  faithful  unto  death,  and  the  King  will  give  you  a  crown 
of  life.  He  that  shall  die  there,  although  his  death  will  be  un- 
natural, and  his  pains  perhaps  great,  will  yet  have  the  better  of  his 
fellow ;  not  only  because  he  will  be  arrived  at  the  Celestial  City 
soonest,  but  because  he  will  escape  many  miseries  that  the  other 
will  meet  with  in  the  rest  of  his  journey.  But  when  you  are 
come  to  the  town,  and  shall  find  fulfilled  what  I  have  here  related, 
then  remember  your  friend,  and  quit  yourselves  like  men ;  and 
"  commit  the  keeping  of  your  souls  to  God  in  well-doing,  as  unto 
a  faithful  Creator." 


CHAPTER   VII 

VANITY   FAIR 

THEN    I    saw   in    my    dream,    that    when    they    were    got    out 
of  the  wilderness,   they  presently  saw  a  town  before  them, 
and  the  name  of   that   town    is    Vanity;-  and  at  the  town 
there   is   a   fair   kept,    called   Vanity   Fair.      It   is   kept   all   the   year 
long.      It  beareth  the  name  of  Vanity  Fair,  because  the  town  where 
it   is   kept  is  lighter  than  vanity,  and  also  because  all  that  is  there 
sold,   or  that  cometh  thither,  is  vanity. 

This  fair  is  no  new-erected  business,  but  a  thing  of  ancient 
standing  :  I  will  show  you  the  original  of  it. 

Almost  five  thousand  years  ago,  there  were  pilgrims  walking 
to  the  Celestial  City,  as  these  two  honest  persons  are  ;  and  Beelze- 
bub, Apollyon,  and  Legion,  with  their  companions,  perceiving,  by 
the  path  that  the  pilgrims  made,  that  their  way  to  the  city  lay 
through  this  town  of  Vanity,  they  contrived  here  to  set  up  a  fair— 
a  fair  wherein  should  be  sold  all  sorts  of  vanity ;  and  that  it 
should  last  all  the  year  long.  Therefore  at  this  fair  are  all  such 
merchandise  sold,  as  houses,  lands,  trades,  places,  honours,  prefer- 
ments, titles,  countries,  kingdoms,  lusts,  pleasures ;  and  delights  of 
all  sorts. 

And,  moreover,  at  this  fair  there  are  at  all  times  to  be  seen 
jugglings,  cheats,  games,  plays,  fools,  apes,  knaves,  and  rogues,  and 
that  of  every  kind. 

And  as,  in  other  fairs  of  less  moment,  there  are  the  several 
rows  and  streets  under  their  proper  names,  where  such  and  such 
wares  are  vended ;  so  here,  likewise,  you  have  the  proper  places, 
rows,  streets  (viz.,  countries  and  kingdoms),  where  the  wares  of  this 
fair  are  soonest  to  be  found.  Here  is  the  Britain  Row,  the  French 
Row,  the  Italian  Row,  the  Spanish  Row,  the  German  Row,  where 
several  sorts  of  vanities  are  to  be  sold. 

Now,  as  I  said,  the  way  to  the  Celestial  City  lies  just  through 
this  town  where  this  lusty  fair  is  kept ;  and  he  that  will  go  to 
the  city,  and  yet  not  go  through  this  town,  must  needs  go  out  of 
the  world.  The  Prince  of  princes  himself,  when  here,  went  through 

55 


56  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

this  town  to  his  own  country,  and  that  upon  a  fair-day  too:  yea, 
and,  as  I  think,  it  was  Beelzebub,  the  chief  lord  of  this  fair,  that 
invited  him  to  buy  of  his  vanities  ;  yea,  he  would  have  made  him 
lord  of  the  fair,  would  he  but  have  done  him  reverence  as  he  went 
through  the  town  ;  yea,  because  he  was  such  a  person  of  honour, 
Beelzebub  had  him  from  street  to  street,  and  showed  him  all  the 
kingdoms  of  the  world  in  a  little  time,  that  he  might,  if  possible, 
allure  that  Blessed  One  to  cheapen  and  buy  some  of  his  vanities. 
But  he  had  no  mind  to  the  merchandise,  and  therefore  left  the 
town,  without  laying  out  so  much  as  one  farthing  upon  these 
vanities.  This  fair,  therefore,  is  an  ancient  thing,  of  long  standing, 
and  a  very  great  fair. 

Now  these  pilgrims  must  needs  go  through  this  fair.  Well, 
so  they  did  ;  but,  behold,  even  as  they  entered  into  the  fair,  all 
the  people  in  the  fair  were  moved,  and  the  town  itself,  as  it  were, 
in  a  hubbub  about  them,  and  that  for  several  reasons  :  for,— 

First,  The  pilgrims  were  clothed  with  such  kind  of  raiment  as 
was  diverse  from  the  raiment  of  any  that  traded  in  that  fair. 
The  people,  therefore,  of  the  fair  made  a  great  gazing  upon  them  : 
some  said  they  were  fools ;  some,  they  were  bedlams ;  and  some, 
they  were  outlandish  men. 

Secondly,  And  as  they  wondered  at  their  apparel,  so  they  did 
likewise  at  their  speech  ;  for  few  could  understand  what  they  said. 
They  naturally  spoke  the  language  of  Canaan  ;  but  they  that 
kept  the  fair  were  the  men  of  this  world  :  so  that,  from  one 
end  of  the  fair  to  the  other,  they  seemed  barbarians  each  to  the 
other. 

Thirdly,  But  that  which  did  not  a  little  amuse  the  merchan- 
disers was,  that  these  pilgrims  set  very  light  by  all  their  wares. 
They  cared  not  so  much  as  to  look  upon  them  ;  and  if  they  called 
upon  them  to  buy,  they  would  put  their  fingers  in  their  ears,  and 
cry,  "  Turn  away  mine  eyes  from  beholding  vanity ;  ':  and  look 
upwards,  signifying  that  their  trade  and  traffic  was  in  heaven. 

One  chanced,  mockingly,  beholding  the  carriage  of  the  men, 
to  say  unto  them,  What  will  you  buy  ?  But  they,  looking  gravely 
upon  him,  said,  We  buy  the  truth.  At  that  there  was  an  occasion 
taken  to  despise  the  men  the  more,  some  mocking,  some  taunting, 
some  speaking  reproachfully,  and  some  calling  upon  others  to 
smite  them.  At  last  things  came  to  a  hubbub  and  great  stir  in  the 
fair,  insomuch  that  all  order  was  confounded.  Now  was  word 
presently  brought  to  the  great  one  of  the  fair,  who  quickly  came 
down,  and  deputed  some  of  his  most  trusty  friends  to  take 
those  men  into  examination,  about  whom  the  fair  was  almost  over- 
turned. So  the  men  were  brought  to  examination  ;  and  they  that 


58  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

sat   upon   them   asked   whence   they   came,    whither   they   went,    and 
what  they  did  there  in  such  an  unusual  garb.      The  men  told  them 
that  they  were  pilgrims   and  strangers   in  the  world,   and  that  they 
were  going  to  their  own  country,  which  was  the  heavenly  Jerusalem; 
and  that  they  had  given  no  occasion  to  the  men  of  the  town,  nor 
yet  to  the  merchandisers,  thus   to  abuse  them,  and  to  let  them  in 
their  journey,   except   it   was   for  that,   when  one   asked   them   what 
they   would   buy,   they   said   they   would   buy   the   truth.      But   they 
that  were   appointed  to   examine  them   did  not  believe  them  to   be 
any    other   than   bedlams    and   mad,    else   such   as    came   to   put    all 
things  into  a  confusion  in  the  fair.      Therefore  they  took  them  and 
beat  them,  and  besmeared  them  with  dirt,  and  then  put  them  into 
the   cage,   that  they  might   be   made  a  spectacle  to   all   the   men   of 
the  fair.  •    There,  therefore,  they  lay  for  some  time,  and  were  made 
the    objects   of   any   man's    sport,   or   malice,   or  revenge ;    the   great 
one    of   the   fair   laughing   still    at    all    that    befell    them.      But    the 
men     being    patient,     and     "  not     rendering    railing    for    railing,    but 
contrariwise  blessing,"  and  giving  good  words  for  bad,  and  kindness 
for   injuries   done,   some   men   in   the   fair   that   were   more   observing 
and   less   prejudiced   than   the   rest,   began   to   check   and   blame   the 
baser   sort   for   their    continual    abuses    done    by   them    to   the    men. 
They   therefore,    in   angry   manner,    let   fly   at   them   again,    counting 
them   as   bad  as   the   men   in  the   cage,   and  telling  them  that   they 
seemed    confederates,    and   should   be    made   partakers    of   their   mis- 
fortunes.     The   others   replied,    that   for   aught   they    could   see,    the 
men   were    quiet    and   sober,   and   intended   nobody   any   harm ;    and 
that    there    were    many    that    traded    in    their    fair    that    Avere    more 
worthy   to   be   put   into   the   cage,   yea,    and   pillory   too,   than   were 
the    men    that    they    had    abused.      Thus,    after    divers    words    had 
passed   on   both   sides    (the   men   behaving   themselves    all   the   while 
very  wisely  and  soberly  before  them),  they  fell  to  some  blows,  and 
did  harm  one  to  another.      Then  were  these  two  poor  men  brought 
before   their   examiners   again,   and   were  charged   as   being  guilty   of 
the   late   hubbub   that   had   been   in    the    fair.      So  they    beat    them 
pitifully,   and  hanged  irons  upon  them,   and  led  them  in  chains  up 
and    down  the   fair,    for   an  example   and  terror  to   others,   lest  any 
should   speak  in  their  behalf,   or  join   themselves   unto  them.      But 
Christian    and    Faithful    behaved    themselves    yet    more    wisely,    and 
received   the   ignominy   and   shame   that   was   cast   upon   them   with 
so  much  meekness  and  patience,  that  it  won  to  their  side  (though 
but  few  in  comparison  of  the  rest)  several  of  the  men  in  the  fair. 
This  put  the  other  party  yet  into  a  greater  rage,  insomuch  that  they 
concluded  the  death   of  these  two  men.     Wherefore  they  threatened 
that   neither  cage   nor  irons   should   serve  their  turn,   but   that  they 


VANITY   FAIR 


59 


should  die  for  the  abuse  they  had  done,  and  for  deluding  the  men 
of  the  fair. 

Then    were    they    remanded    to    the    cage    again,    until    further 


order  should  be  taken  with  them.      So  they  put  them  in,  and  made 
their  feet  fast  in  the  stocks. 

Here,  therefore,  they  called  again  to  mind  what  they  had 
heard  from  their  faithful  friend  Evangelist,  and  were  more  confirmed 
in  their  way  and  sufferings  by  what  he  told  them  would  happen  to 


60  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

them.  They  also  now  comforted  each  other,  that  whose  lot  it  was 
to  surfer,  even  he  should  have  the  best  of  it ;  therefore  each  man 
secretly  wished  that  he  might  have  the  preferment  :  but  committing 
themselves  to  the  all- wise  disposal  of  Him  that  ruleth  all  things, 
with  much  content  they  abode  in  the  condition  in  which  they  were 
until  they  should  be  otherwise  disposed  of. 

Then  a  convenient  time  being  appointed,  they  were  brought 
forth  to  their  trial,  in  order  to  their  condemnation.  The  judge's 
name  was  Lord  Hate-good.  Their  indictment  was  one  and  the 
same  in  substance,  though  somewhat  varying  in  form  ;  the  contents 
whereof  were  these  :— 

"  That  they  were  enemies  to,  and  disturbers  of,  their  trade ; 
that  they  had  made  commotions  and  divisions  in  the  town,  and 
had  won  a  party  to  their  own  most  dangerous  opinions,  in  con- 
tempt of  the  law  of  their  prince." 

Then  Faithful  began  to  answer,  that  he  had  only  set  himself 
against  that  which  had  set  itself  against  Him  that  is  higher  than 
the  highest.  And,  said  he,  as  for  disturbance,  I  made  none,  being 
myself  a  man  of  peace  :  the  parties  that  were  won  to  us,  were  won 
by  beholding  our  truth  and  innocence,  and  they  are  only  turned 
from  the  worse  to  the  better.  And  as  to  the  king  you  talk  of, 
since  he  is  Beelzebub,  the  enemy  of  our  Lord,  I  defy  him  and  all 
his  angels. 

Then  proclamation  was  made,  that  they  that  had  aught  to  say 
for  their  lord  the  king  against  the  prisoner  at  the  bar,  should 
forthwith  appear,  and  give  in  their  evidence.  So  there  came  in 
three  witnesses,  to  wit,  Envy,  Superstition,  and  Pickthank.  They 
were  then  asked  if  they  knew  the  prisoner  at  the  bar,  and  what 
they  had  to  say  for  their  lord  the  king  against  him. 

Then  stood  forth  Envy,  and  said  to  this  effect:  My  lord,  I 
have  known  this  man  a  long  time,  and  will  attest,  upon  oath  before 
this  honourable  bench,  that  he  is— 

Judge.    Hold,  give  him  his  oath. 

So  they  sware  him.  Then  said  he,  My  lord,  this  man,  not- 
withstanding his  plausible  name,  is  one  of  the  vilest  men  in  our 
country  :  he  neither  regardeth  prince  nor  people,  law  nor  custom, 
but  doth  all  that  he  can  to  possess  all  men  with  certain  of  his 
disloyal  notions,  which  he  in  the  general  calls  principles  of  faith 
and  holiness.  He  doth  at  once  not  only  condemn  all  our  laudable 
doings,  but  us  in  the  doing  of  them. 

Judge.  Then  did  the  judge  say  to  him,  Hast  thou  any  more  to 
say  ? 

Envy.  My  lord,  I  could  say  much  more,  only  I  would  not  be 
tedious  to  the  court.  Yet,  if  need  be,  when  the  other  gentlemen 


VANITY   FAIR  61 

have  given  in  their  evidence,  rather  than  anything  shall  be  wanting 
that  will  dispatch  him,  I  will  enlarge  my  testimony  against  him. 
So  he  was  bid  to  stand  by. 

Then  they  called  Superstition,  and  bid  him  look  upon  the 
prisoner  at  the  bar ;  they  also  asked  what  he  could  say  for  their 
lord  the  king  against  him.  Then  they  sware  him  ;  so  he  began  : — 

Super.  My  lord,  I  have  no  great  acquaintance  with  this  man, 
nor  do  I  desire  to  have  further  knowledge  of  him.  However,  this 
I  know,  that  he  is  a  very  pestilent  fellow,  from  some  discourse  the 
other  clay  that  I  had  with  him  in  this  town ;  for  then,  talking 
with  him,  I  heard  him  say  that  our  religion  was  naught,  and  such 
by  which  a  man  could  by  no  means  please  God  :  and  this  is  that 
which  I  have  to  say. 

Then  was  Pickthank  sworn,  and  bid  say  what  he  knew  in 
behalf  of  their  lord  the  king,  against  the  prisoner  at  the  bar. 

Pick-  My  lord,  and  you  gentlemen  all,  this  fellow  I  have 
known  of  a  long  time,  and  have  heard  him  speak  things  that 
ought  not  to  be  spoken  ;  for  he  hath  railed  on  our  noble  prince 
Beelzebub,  and  hath  spoken  contemptibly  of  his  honourable  friends, 
whose  names  are  the  Lord  Old  Man,  the  Lord  Carnal  Delight,  the 
Lord  Luxurious,  the  Lord  Desire  of  Vain  Glory,  my  old  Lord 
Lechery,  Sir  Having  Greedy,  with  all  the  rest  of  our  nobility  :  and 
he  hath  said,  moreover,  that  if  all  men  were  of  his  mind,  if  possible, 
there  is  not  one  of  these  noble  men  should  have  any  longer  a  being 
in  this  town.  Besides,  he  hath  not  been  afraid  to  rail  on  you, 
my  lord,  who  are  now  appointed  to  be  his  judge,  calling  you  an 
ungodly  villain,  with  many  other  such-like  vilifying  terms,  with 
which  he  hath  bespattered  most  of  the  gentry  of  our  town. 

When  this  Pickthank  had  told  his  tale,  the  judge  directed  his 
speech  to  the  prisoner  at  the  bar,  saying,  Thou  runagate,  heretic, 
and  traitor,  hast  thou  heard  what  these  honest  gentlemen  have 
witnessed  against  thee  ? 

Faith.    May  I  speak  a  few  words  in  my  own  defence  ? 

Judge.  Sirrah,  sirrah,  thou  deservest  to  live  no  longer,  but  to 
be  slain  immediately  upon  the  place  ;  yet,  that  all  men  may  see 
our  gentleness  towards  thee,  let  us  hear  what  thou  hast  to  say. 

Faith.  1.  I  say,  then,  in  answer  to  what  Mr.  Envy  hath  spoken, 
I  never  said  aught  but  this,  that  what  rule,  or  laws,  or  custom, 
or  people,  were  flat  against  the  word  of  God,  are  opposite  to 
Christianity.  If  I  have  said  amiss  in  this,  convince  me  of  my 
error,  and  I  am  ready  here  before  you  to  make  my  recantation. 

2.  As  to  the  second,  to  wit,  Mr.  Superstition,  and  his  charge 
against  me,  I  said  only  this,  that  in  the  worship  of  God  there  is 
required  a  divine  faith. 


62  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

3.  As  to  what  Mr.  Pickthank  hath  said,  I  say  (avoiding  terms, 
as  that  I  am  said  to  rail,  and  the  like),  that  the  prince  of  this 
town,  with  all  the  rabblement,  his  attendants,  by  this  gentleman 
named,  are  more  fit  for  being  in  hell  than  in  this  town  and  country : 
and  so  the  Lord  have  mercy  upon  me  ! 

Then  the  judge  called  to  the  jury  (who  all  this  while  stood  by 
to  hear  and  observe),  Gentlemen  of  the  jury,  you  see  this  man  about 
whom  so  great  an  uproar  hath  been  made  in  this  town ;  you  have 
also  heard  what  these  worthy  gentlemen  have  witnessed  against 
him  ;  also  you  have  heard  his  reply  and  confession  :  it  lieth  now 
in  your  breasts  to  hang  him,  or  save  his  life. 

Then  went  the  jury  out,  whose  names  were  Mr.  Blindman,  Mr. 
No-good,  Mr.  Malice,  Mr.  Love-lust,  Mr.  Live-loose,  Mr.  Heady, 
Mr.  High-mind,  Mr.  Enmity,  Mr.  Liar,  Mr.  Cruelty,  Mr.  Hate-light, 
and  Mr.  Implacable ;  who  every  one  gave  in  his  private  verdict 
against  him  among  themselves,  and  afterwards  unanimously  con- 
cluded to  bring  him  in  guilty  before  the  judge.  And  first  among 
themselves,  Mr.  Blindman,  the  foreman,  said,  I  see  clearly  that 
this  man  is  a  heretic.  Then  said  Mr.  No-good,  Away  with  such 
a  fellow  from  the  earth  !  Ay,  said  Mr.  Malice,  for  I  hate  the  very 
look  of  him.  Then  said  Mr.  Love-lust,  I  could  never  endure  him. 
Nor  I,  said  Mr.  Live-loose,  for  he  would  always  be  condemning 
my  way.  Hang  him,  hang  him  !  said  Mr.  Heady.  A  sorry  scrub  !  said 
Mr.  High-mind.  My  heart  riseth  against  him,  said  Mr.  Enmity. 
He  is  a  rogue,  said  Mr.  Liar.  Hanging  is  too  good  for  him,  said 
Mr.  Cruelty.  Let  us  dispatch  him  out  of  the  way,  said  Mr.  Hate- 
light.  Then  said  Mr.  Implacable,  Might  I  have  all  the  world  given 
me,  I  could  not  be  reconciled  to  him  ;  therefore  let  us  forthwith 
bring  him  in  guilty  of  death.  And  so  they  did ;  therefore  he  was 
presently  condemned  to  be  had  from  the  place  where  he  was  to 
the  place  from  whence  he  came,  and  there  to  be  put  to  the  most 
cruel  death  that  could  be  invented. 

They  therefore  brought  him  out,  to  do  with  him  according  to 
their  law ;  and  first  they  scourged  him,  then  they  buffeted  him, 
then  they  lanced  his  flesh  with  knives  ;  •  after  that  they  stoned  him 
with  stones,  then  pricked  him  with  their  swords  ;  and  last  of  all 
they  burned  him  to  ashes  at  the  stake.  Thus  came  Faithful  to 
his  end. 

Now  I  saw  that  there  stood  behind  the  multitude  a  chariot 
and  a  couple  of  horses  waiting  for  Faithful,  who  (so  soon  as  his 
adversaries  had  dispatched  him)  was  taken  up  into  it,  and  straight- 
way was  carried  up  through  the  clouds,  with  sound  of  trumpet,  the 
nearest  way  to  the  Celestial  Gate.  But  as  for  Christian,  he  had 
some  respite,  and  was  remanded  back  to  prison ;  so  he  remained 


VANITY   FAIR 


63 


there  for  a  space.  But  He  who  overrules  all  things,  having  the 
power  of  their  rage  in  his  own  hand,  so  wrought  it  about  that 
Christian  for  that  time  escaped  them,  and  went  his  way. 


CHAPTER    VIII 

DOUBTING   CASTLE 

NOW  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian  went  not  forth 
alone  ;  for  there  was  one  whose  name  was  Hopeful  (being 
so  made  by  the  beholding  of  Christian  and  Faithful  in 
their  words  and  behaviour  in  their  sufferings  at  the  fair),  who 
joined  himself  unto  him,  and,  entering  into  a  brotherly  covenant, 
told  him  that  he  would  be  his  companion.  Thus  one  died  to  bear 
testimony  to  the  truth,  and  another  rises  out  of  his  ashes  to  be  a 
companion  with  Christian  in  his  pilgrimage.  This  Hopeful  also  told 
Christian,  that  there  were  many  more  of  the  men  in  the  fair  that 
would  take  their  time,  and  follow  after. 

So  I  saw  that  quickly  after  they  were  got  out  of  the  fair,  they 
overtook  one  that  was  going  before  them,  whose  name  was  By-ends : 
so  they  said  to  him,  What  countryman,  sir  ?  and  how  far  go  you 
this  way  ?  He  told  them  that  he  came  from  the  town  of  Fair- 
speech,  and  that  he  was  going  to  the  Celestial  City  ;  but  told 
them  not  his  name. 

From  Fair-speech !  said  Christian.  Is  there  any  good  that 
lives  there  ? 

By.    Yes,  said  By-ends,   I  hope. 

Chr.    Pray,  sir,  what  may  I  call  you  ?    said  Christian. 

By.  I  am  a  stranger  to  you,  and  you  to  me  :  if  you  be  going 
this  way,  I  shall  be  glad  of  your  company ;  if  not,  I  must  be 
content. 

Chr.  This  town  of  Fair-speech,  said  Christian,  I  have  heard  of ; 
and,  as  I  remember,  they  say  it  is  a  wealthy  place. 

By.  Yes,  I  will  assure  you  that  it  is  ;  and  I  have  very  many 
rich  kindred  there. 

Chr.  Pray,  who  are  your  kindred  there,  if  a  man  may  be  so 
bold  ? 

By.  Almost  the  whole  town  ;  and,  in  particular,  my  Lord 
Turn-about,  my  Lord  Time-server,  my  Lord  Fair-speech,  from  whose 
ancestors  that  town  first  took  its  name  :  also  Mr.  Smooth-man,  Mr. 
Facing-both-ways,  Mr.  Anything ;  and  the  parson  of  our  parish 

64 


DOUBTING   CASTLE  65 

Mr.  Two-tongues,  was  my  mother's  own  brother  by  father's  side  : 
and,  to  tell  you  the  truth,  I  am  become  a  gentleman  of  good 
quality  ;  yet  my  great-grandfather  was  but  a  waterman,  looking 
one  way  and  rowing  another,  and  I  got  most  of  my  estate  by  the 
same  occupation. 

Chr.    Are  you  a  married  man  ? 

By.  Yes,  and  my  wife  is  a  very  virtuous  woman,  the  daughter 
of  a  virtuous  woman :  she  was  my  Lady  Feigning's  daughter, 
therefore  she  came  of  a  very  honourable  family,  and  is  arrived  to 
such  a  pitch  of  breeding  that  she  knows  how  to  carry  it  to  all, 
even  to  prince  and  peasant.  It  is  true,  we  somewhat  differ  in 
religion  from  those  of  the  stricter  sort,  yet  but  in  two  small  points : 
First,  we  never  strive  against  wind  and  tide.  Secondly,  we  are 
always  most  zealous  when  Religion  goes  in  his  silver  slippers  ;  we 
love  much  to  walk  with  him  in  the  street,  if  the  sun  shines  and 
the  people  applaud  him. 

Then  Christian  stepped  a  little  aside  to  his  fellow  Hopeful, 
saying,  It  runs  in  my  mind  that  this  is  one  By-ends,  of  Fair-speech; 
and  if  it  be  he,  we  have  as  very  a  knave  in  our  company  as 
dwelleth  in  all  these  parts.  Then  said  Hopeful,  Ask  him  ;  methinks 
he  should  not  be  ashamed  of  his  name.  So  Christian  came  up 
with  him  again,  and  said,  Sir,  you  talk  as  if  you  knew  something 
more  than  all  the  world  doth  ;  and  if  I  take  not  my  mark  amiss, 
I  deem  I  have  half  a  guess  of  you.  Is  not  your  name  Mr.  By- 
ends,  of  Fair-speech  ? 

By.  This  is  not  my  name,  but  indeed  it  is  a  nickname  that 
is  given  me  by  some  that  cannot  abide  me ;  and  I  must  be 
content  to  bear  it  as  a  reproach,  as  other  good  men  have  borne 
theirs  before  me. 

Chr.  I  thought,  indeed,  that  you  were  the  man  that  I  heard 
of ;  and,  to  tell  you  what  I  think,  I  fear  this  name  belongs  to  you 
more  properly  than  you  are  willing  we  should  think  it  doth. 

By.  Well,  if  you  will  thus  imagine,  I  cannot  help  it ;  you  shall 
find  me  a  fair  company-keeper,  if  you  will  still  admit  me  your 
associate. 

Chr.  If  you  will  go  with  us,  you  must  go  against  wind  and 
tide ;  the  which,  I  perceive,  is  against  your  opinion.  You  must 
also  own  Religion  in  his  rags,  as  well  as  when  in  his  silver  slippers ; 
and  stand  by  him,  too,  when  bound  in  irons,  as  well  as  when  he 
walketh  the  streets  with  applause. 

By.  You  must  not  impose  or  lord  it  over  my  faith  ;  leave  me 
to  my  liberty,  and  let  me  go  with  you. 

Chr.  Not  a  step  further,  unless  you  will  do  in  what  I  pro- 
pound as  we. 

5 


66  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Then,  said  By-ends,  I  shall  never  desert  my  old  principles, 
since  they  are  harmless  and  profitable.  If  I  may  not  go  with  you, 
I  must  do  as  I  did  before  you  overtook  me  —even  go  by  myself, 
until  some  overtake  me  that  will  be  glad  of  my  company. 

Now  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian  and  Hopeful  forsook 
him,  and  kept  their  distance  before  him  till  they  came  to  a  delicate 
plain,  called  Ease,  where  they  went  with  much  content ;  but  that 
plain  was  but  narrow,  so  they  were  quickly  got  over  it.  Now,  at 
the  farther  side  of  that  plain  was  a  little  hill  called  Lucre,  and  in 
that  hill  a  silver  mine,  which  some  of  them  that  had  formerly  gone 
that  way,  because  of  the  rarity  of  it,  had  turned  aside  to  see ; 
but  going  too  near  the  brim  of  the  pit,  the  ground,  being  deceitful 
under  them,  broke,  and  they  were  slain ;  some  also  had  been 
maimed  there,  and  could  not,  to  their  dying  day,  be  their  own  men 
again. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  a  little  off  the  road,  over 
against  the  silver  mine,  stood  Dcmas  (gentleman-like)  to  call 
passengers  to  come  and  see  ;  who  said  to  Christian  and  his  fellow, 
Ho  !  turn  aside  hither,  and  I  will  show  you  a  thing. 

Chr.  What  thing  so  deserving  as  to  turn  us  out  of  the  way  to 
see  it  ? 

Demas.  Here  is  a  silver  mine,  and  some  digging  in  it  for 
treasure.  If  you  will  come,  with  a  little  pains  you  may  richly 
provide  for  yourselves. 

Hope.    Then  said  Hopeful,  Let  us  go  see. 

Chr.  Not  I,  said  Christian.  I  have  heard  of  this  place  before 
now,  and  how  many  have  there  been  slain ;  and,  besides,  that 
treasure  is  a  snare  to  those  that  seek  it,  for  it  hindereth  them  in 
their  pilgrimage. 

Then  Christian  called  to  Demas,  saying,  Is  not  the  place 
dangerous  ?  hath  it  not  hindered  many  in  their  pilgrimage  ? 

Demas.  Not  very  dangerous,  except  to  those  that  are  careless. 
But  withal  he  blushed  as  he  spake. 

Chr.  Then  said  Christian  to  Hopeful,  Let  us  not  stir  a  step, 
but  still  keep  on  our  way. 

Hope.  I  will  warrant  you,  when  By-ends  comes  up,  if  he  hath 
the  same  invitation  as  we,  he  will  turn  in  thither  to  see. 

Chr.  No  doubt  thereof,  for  his  principles  lead  him  that  way, 
and  a  hundred  to  one  but  he  dies  there. 

Demas.  Then  Demas  called  again,  saying,  But  will  you  not 
come  over  and  see  ? 

Chr.  Then  Christian  roundly  answered,  saying,  Demas,  thou 
art  an  enemy  to  the  right  ways  of  the  Lord  of  this  way,  and 
hast  already  been  condemned  for  thine  own  turning  aside,  by  one 


DOUBTING   CASTLE 


67 


of  his  Majesty's  judges,  and  why  seekest  thou  to  bring  us  into 
the  like  condemnation  ?  Besides,  if  we  at  all  turn  aside,  our 
Lord  the  King  will  certainly  hear  thereof,  and  will  there  put 
us  to  shame,  where  we  would  stand  with  boldness  before  him. 

Demas  cried  again  that  he  also  was  one  of  their  fraternity ; 
and  that  if  they  Avould  tarry  a  little,  he  also  himself  would  walk 
with  them. 


Chr.  Then  said  Christian,  What  is  thy  name  ?  Is  it  not  the 
same  by  the  which  I  have  called  thee  ? 

Demas.    Yes,  my   name   is   Demas  ;    I   am  the   son   of  Abraham. 

Chr.  I  know  you  :  Gehazi  was  your  great-grandfather,  and 
Judas  your  father,  and  you  have  trod  in  their  steps.  It  is  but 
a  devilish  prank  that  thou  usest  :  thy  father  was  hanged  for  a 
traitor,  and  thou  deservest  no  better  reward.  Assure  thyself  that, 
when  we  come  to  the  King,  we  will  tell  him  of  this  thy  behaviour. 
Thus  they  went  their  way. 

By   this    time    By-ends    and    his    companions    were    come    again 


68  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

within  sight,  and  they  at  the  first  beck  went  over  to  Demas. 
Now,  whether  they  fell  into  the  pit  by  looking  over  the  brink 
thereof,  or  whether  they  went  down  to  dig,  or  whether  they  were 
smothered  in  the  bottom  by  the  damps  that  commonly  arise,  of 
these  things  I  am  not  certain ;  but  this  I  observed,  that  they 
never  were  seen  again  in  the  way. 

Now  I  saw  that,  just  on  the  other  side  of  this  plain,  the 
pilgrims  came  to  a  place  where  stood  an  old  monument  hard  by 
the  highway-side,  at  the  sight  of  which  they  were  both  concerned, 
because  of  the  strangeness  of  the  form  thereof ;  for  it  seemed  to 
them  as  if  it  had  been  a  woman  transformed  into  the  shape  of 
a  pillar.  Here,  therefore,  they  stood  looking  and  looking  upon  it, 
but  could  not  for  a  time  tell  what  they  should  make  thereof. 
At  last  Hopeful  espied,  written  above  upon  the  head  thereof, 
a  writing  in  an  unusual  hand ;  but  he  being  no  scholar,  called 
to  Christian  (for  he  was  learned)  to  see  if  he  could  pick  out  the 
meaning  :  so  he  came,  and  after  a  little  laying  of  the  letters  to- 

§  ether,  he  found  the  same  to  be  this,  "  Remember  Lot's  wife." 
o  he  read  it  to  his  fellow ;  after  which  they  both  concluded 
that  that  was  the  pillar  of  salt  into  which  Lot's  wife  was  turned, 
for  her  looking  back  with  a  covetous  heart,  when  she  was  going 
from  Sodom.  Which  sudden  and  amazing  sight  gave  them  oc- 
casion for  much  discourse. 

I  saw  then  that  they  went  on  their  way  to  a  pleasant  river, 
which  David  the  king  called,  "  the  river  of  God ;  "  but  John, 
"  the  river  of  the  water  of  life."  Now,  their  way  lay  just  upon 
the  bank  of  this  river  :  here,  therefore,  Christian  and  his  companion 
walked  with  great  delight ;  they  drank  also  of  the  water  of  the 
river,  which  was  pleasant  and  enlivening  to  their  weary  spirits. 
Besides,  on  the  banks  of  this  river,  on  either  side,  were  green 
trees  with  all  manner  of  fruit ;  and  the  leaves  they  ate  to  prevent 
surfeits  and  other  diseases  that  are  incident  to  those  that  heat 
their  blood  by  travel.  On  either  side  of  the  river  was  also  a 
meadow,  curiously  beautified  with  lilies  ;  and  it  was  green  all  the 
year  long.  In  this  meadow  they  lay  down  and  slept,  for  here 
they  might  lie  down  safely.  When  they  awoke,  they  gathered 
again  of  the  fruit  of  the  trees,  and  drank  again  of  the  water  of 
the  river,  and  then  lay  down  again  to  sleep.  Thus  they  did 
several  days  and  nights.  So  when  they  were  disposed  to  go  on 
(for  they  were  not  as  yet  at  their  journey's  end),  they  ate,  and 
drank,  and  departed. 

Now,  I  beheld  in  my  dream  that  they  had  not  journeyed  far, 
but  the  river  and  the  way  for  a  time  parted,  at  which  they 
were  not  a  little  sorry  ;  yet  they  durst  not  go  out  of  the  way. 


70  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Now  the  way  from  the  river  was  rough,  and  their  feet  tender  by 
reason  of  their  travel ;  so  the  souls  of  the  pilgrims  were  much 
discouraged  because  of  the  way.  Wherefore,  still  as  they  went 
on,  they  wished  for  a  better  way.  Now,  a  little  before  them, 
there  was  on  the  left-hand  of  the  road  a  meadow,  and  a  stile 
to  go  over  into  it,  and  that  meadow  is  called  By-path  Meadow. 
Then  said  Christian  to  his  fellow,  If  this  meadow  lieth  along  by 
our  wayside,  let  us  go  over  into  it.  Then  he  went  to  the  stile 
to  see,  and  behold  a  path  lay  along  by  the  way  on  the  other 
side  of  the  fence.  'Tis  according  to  my  wish,  said  Christian. 
Here  is  the  easiest  going ;  come,  good  Hopeful,  and  let  us  go 
over. 

Hope.    But   how   if  this   path  should   lead  us   out   of  the   way  ? 

Chr.  That  is  not  likely,  said  the  other.  Look,  doth  it  not 
go  along  by  the  wayside  ?  So  Hopeful,  being  persuaded  by  his 
fellow,  went  after  him  over  the  stile.  When  they  were  gone  over, 
and  were  got  into  the  path,  they  found  it  very  easy  for  their 
feet ;  and  withal  they,  looking  before  them,  espied  a  man  walking 
as  they  did,  and  his  name  was  Vain-confidence :  so  they  called 
after  him,  and  asked  him  whither  that  way  led.  He  said,  To 
the  Celestial  Gate.  Look,  said  Christian,  did  not  I  tell  you  so  ? 
By  this  you  may  see  we  are  right.  So  they  followed,  and  he 
went  before  them.  But,  behold,  the  night  came  on,  and  it  grew 
very  dark ;  so  that  they  that  were  behind  lost  sight  of  him  that 
went  before. 

He  therefore  that  went  before  (Vain-confidence  by  name),  not 
seeing  the  way  before  him,  fell  into  a  deep  pit,  which  was  on 
purpose  there  made  by  the  prince  of  those  grounds,  to  catch 
vain-glorious  fools  withal,  and  was  dashed  in  pieces  with  his  fall. 

Now  Christian  and  his  fellow  heard  him  fall,  so  they  called 
to  know  the  matter ;  but  there  was  none  to  answer,  only  they 
heard  a  groaning.  Then  said  Hopeful,  Where  are  we  now  ? 
Then  was  his  fellow  silent,  as  mistrusting  that  he  had  led  him 
out  of  the  way ;  and  now  it  began  to  rain,  and  thunder,  and 
lighten,  in  a  most  dreadful  manner,  and  the  water  rose  amain. 

Then  Hopeful  groaned  within  himself,  saying,  Oh  that  I  had 
kept  on  my  way  ! 

Chr.  Who  could  have  thought  that  this  path  should  have  led 
us  out  of  the  way  ? 

Hope.  I  was  afraid  on't  at  the  very  first,  and  therefore  gave 
you  that  gentle  caution.  I  would  have  spoken  plainer,  but  that 
you  are  older  than  I. 

Chr.  Good  brother,  be  not  offended.  I  am  sorry  I  have 
brought  thee  out  of  the  way,  and  that  I  have  put  thee  into  such 


DOUBTING   CASTLE  71 

imminent  danger.  Pray,  my  brother,  forgive  me ;  I  did  not  do 
it  of  an  evil  intent. 

Hope.  Be  comforted,  my  brother,  for  I  forgive  thee ;  and 
believe,  too,  that  this  shall  be  for  our  good. 

Chr.  I  am  glad  I  have  with  me  a  merciful  brother.  But 
we  must  not  stand  here  ;  let  us  try  to  go  back  again. 

Hope.    But,    good   brother,    let    me   go   before. 

Chr.  No,  if  you  please,  let  me  go  first,  that,  if  there  be  any 
danger,  I  may  be  first  therein ;  because  by  my  means  we  are 
both  gone  out  of  the  way. 

Hope.  No,  said  Hopeful,  you  shall  not  go  first ;  for  your 
mind  being  troubled,  may  lead  you  out  of  the  way  again. 

Now,  by  this  time  the  waters  were  greatly  risen,  by  reason 
of  which  the  way  of  going  back  was  very  dangerous.  Yet  they 
adventured  to  go  back ;  but  it  was  so  dark,  and  the  flood  so 
high,  that  in  their  going  back  they  had  like  to  have  been  drowned 
nine  or  ten  times. 

Neither  could  they,  with  all  the  skill  they  had,  get  again 
to  the  stile  that  night.  Wherefore  at  last,  lighting  under  a  little 
shelter,  they  sat  down  there  until  daybreak ;  but  being  weary, 
they  fell  asleep.  Now  there  was,  not  far  from  the  place  where 
they  lay,  a  castle,  called  Doubting  Castle,  the  owner  whereof 
was  Giant  Despair ;  and  it  was  in  his  grounds  they  now  were 
sleeping.  Wherefore  he,  getting  up  in  the  morning  early,  and 
walking  up  and  down  in  his  fields,  caught  Christian  and  Hopeful 
asleep  in  his  grounds.  Then  with  a  grim  and  surly  voice  he  bid 
them  awake,  and  asked  them  whence  they  were,  and  what  they 
did  in  his  grounds.  They  told  him  they  were  pilgrims,  and  that 
they  had  lost  their  way.  Then  said  the  giant,  You  have  this 
night  trespassed  on  me,  by  trampling  in  and  lying  on  my  grounds, 
and  therefore  you  must  go  along  with  me.  So  they  were  forced 
to  go,  because  he  was  stronger  than  they.  They  also  had  but 
little  to  say,  for  they  knew  themselves  in  a  fault.  The  giant, 
therefore,  drove  them  before  him,  and  put  them  into  his  castle, 
in  a  very  dark  dungeon,  nasty  and  stinking  to  the  spirits  of 
these  two  men.  Here,  then,  they  lay  from  Wednesday  morning 
till  Saturday  night,  without  one  bit  of  bread,  or  drop  of  drink, 
or  light,  or  any  to  ask  how  they  did  :  they  were,  therefore, 
here  in  evil  case,  and  were  far  from  friends  and  acquaintance. 
Now  in  this  place  Christian  had  double  sorrow,  because  it  was 
through  his  unadvised  counsel  that  they  were  brought  into  this 
distress. 

Now  Giant  Despair  had  a  wife,  and  her  name  was  Diffidence  : 
so,  when  he  was  gone  to  bed,  he  told  his  wife  what  he  had  done ; 


72  THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 

to  wit,  that  he  had  taken  a  couple  of  prisoners,  and  cast  them 
into  his  dungeon  for  trespassing  on  his  grounds.  Then  he  asked 
her  also  what  he  had  best  do  further  to  them.  So  she  asked 
him  what  they  were,  whence  they  came,  and  whither  they  were 
bound ;  and  he  told  her.  Then  she  counselled  him  that  when 
he  arose  in  the  morning  he  should  beat  them  without  mercy. 
So  when  he  arose  he  getteth  him  a  grievous  crab-tree  cudgel, 
and  goes  down  into  the  dungeon  to  them,  and  there  first  falls 
to  rating  of  them  as  if  they  were  dogs,  although  they  never  gave 
him  a  word  of  distaste ;  then  he  fell  upon  them,  and  beat  them 
fearfully,  in  such  sort  that  they  were  not  able  to  help  themselves, 
or  to  turn  them  upon  the  floor.  This  done  he  withdraws,  and 
leaves  them  there  to  condole  their  misery,  and  to  mourn  under 
their  distress :  so  all  that  day  they  spent  their  time  in  nothing 
but  sighs  and  bitter  lamentations.  The  next  night  she,  talking 
with  her  husband  further  about  them,  and  understanding  that 
they  were  yet  alive,  did  advise  him  to  counsel  them  to  make 
away  with  themselves.  So,  when  morning  was  come,  he  goes 
to  them  in  a  surly  manner  as  before,  and  perceiving  them  to  be 
very  sore  with  the  stripes  that  he  had  given  them  the  day  before, 
he  told  them  that,  since  they  were  never  like  to  come  out  of 
that  place,  their  only  way  would  be  forthwith  to  make  an  end 
of  themselves,  either  with  knife,  halter,  or  poison  :  For  why, 
said  he,  should  you  choose  life,  seeing  it  is  attended  with  so  much 
bitterness  ?  But  they  desired  him  to  let  them  go.  With  that 
he  looked  ugly  upon  them,  and  rushing  to  them,  had  doubtless 
made  an  end  of  them  himself,  but  that  he  fell  into  one  of  his 
fits  (for  he  sometimes,  in  sunshiny  weather,  fell  into  fits),  and 
lost  for  a  time  the  use  of  his  hands.  Wherefore  he  withdrew, 
and  left  them,  as  before,  to  consider  what  to  do.  Then  did  the 
prisoners  consult  between  themselves  whether  it  was  best  to  take 
his  counsel  or  no  ;  and  thus  they  began  to  discourse  :— 

Chr.  Brother,  said  Christian,  what  shall  we  do  ?  The  life 
that  we  now  live  is  miserable.  For  my  part,  I  know  not  whether 
it  is  best  to  live  thus  or  to  die  out  of  hand.  "  My  soul  chooseth 
strangling  rather  than  life,"  and  the  grave  is  more  easy  for  me 
than  this  dungeon  !  Shall  we  be  ruled  by  the  giant  ? 

Hope.  Indeed  our  present  condition  is  dreadful,  and  death 
would  be  far  more  welcome  to  me  than  thus  for  ever  to  abide. 
But  yet,  let  us  consider,  the  Lord  of  the  country  to  which  we 
are  going  hath  said,  "  Thou  shalt  do  no  murder "  —no,  not  to 
another  man's  person  ;  much  more  then  are  we  forbidden  to  take 
his  counsel  to  kill  ourselves.  And  let  us  consider,  again,  that  all  the 
law  is  not  in  the  hand  of  Giant  Despair  ;  others,  so  far  as  I  can  under- 


71  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

stand,  have  been  taken  by  him  as  well  as  we,  and  yet  have  escaped 
out  of  his  hands.  Who  knows  but  that  God,  who  made  the  world,  may 
cause  that  Giant  Despair  may  die,  or  that,  at  some  time  or  other, 
he  may  forget  to  lock  us  in ;  or  that  he  may  in  a  short  time 
have  another  of  his  fits  before  us,  and  may  lose  the  use  of  his 
limbs  ?  And  if  ever  that  should  come  to  pass  again,  for  my 
part,  I  am  resolved  to  pluck  up  the  heart  of  a  man.  and  to 
try  my  utmost  to  get  from  under  his  hand.  I  was  a  fool  that 
I  did  not  try  to  do  it  before ;  but,  however,  my  brother,  let 
us  be  patient,  and  endure  awhile.  The  time  may  come  that 
may  give  us  a  happy  release ;  but  let  us  not  be  our  own  mur- 
derers. With  these  words  Hopeful  at  present  did  moderate  the 
mind  of  his  brother  ;  so  they  continued  together  in  the  dark  that 
day,  in  their  sad  and  doleful  condition. 

Well,  towards  evening  the  giant  goes  down  into  the  dungeon 
again,  to  see  if  his  prisoners  had  taken  his  counsel ;  but  when 
he  came  there,  he  found  them  alive.  And,  truly,  alive  was  all ; 
for  now,  what  for  want  of  bread  and  water,  and  by  reason 
of  the  wounds  they  received  when  he  beat  them,  they  could  do 
little  but  breathe.  But,  I  say,  he  found  them  alive ;  at  which 
he  fell  into  a  grievous  rage,  and  told  them  that,  seeing  they  had 
disobeyed  his  counsel,  it  should  be  worse  with  them  than  if  they 
had  never  been  born. 

At  this  they  trembled  greatly,  and  I  think  that  Christian 
fell  into  a  swoon ;  but  coming  a  little  to  himself  again,  they  re- 
newed their  discourse  about  the  giant's  counsel,  and  whether  yet 
they  had  best  take  it  or  no.  Now  Christian  again  seemed  for 
doing  it ;  but  Hopeful  made  his  second  reply  as  followeth  :— 

Hope.  My  brother,  said  he,  rememberest  thou  not  how  valiant 
thou  hast  been  heretofore  ?  Apollyon  could  not  crush  thee,  nor 
could  all  that  thou  didst  hear,  or  see,  or  feel  in  the  Valley  of 
the  Shadow  of  Death.  What  hardship,  terror,  and  amazement 
hast  thou  already  gone  through,  and  art  thou  now  nothing  but 
fears  ?  Thou  seest  that  I  am  in  the  dungeon  with  thee,  a  far 
weaker  man  by  nature  than  thou  art ;  also  this  giant  has  wounded 
me  as  well  as  thee,  and  hath  also  cut  off  the  bread  and  water 
from  my  mouth ;  and  with  thee  I  mourn  without  the  light. 
But  let  us  exercise  a  little  more  patience  :  remember  how  thou 
playedst  the  man  at  Vanity  Fair,  and  wast  neither  afraid  of  the 
chain  nor  cage,  nor  yet  of  bloody  death.  Wherefore  let  us  bear 
up  with  patience  as  well  as  we  can. 

Now,  night  being  come  again,  and  the  giant  and  his  wife 
being  in  bed,  she  asked  him  concerning  the  prisoners,  and  if  they 
had  taken  his  counsel.  To  which  he  replied,  They  are  sturdy 


DOUBTING   CASTLE  75 

rogues ;  they  choose  rather  to  bear  all  hardships  than  to  make 
away  with  themselves.  Then  said  she,  Take  them  into  the  castle- 
yard  to-morrow,  and  show  them  the  bones  and  skulls  of  those 
that  thou  hast  already  dispatched,  and  make  them  believe,  ere 
a  week  conies  to  an  end,  thou  also  wilt  tear  them  in  pieces,  as 
thou  hast  done  their  fellows  before  them. 

So  when  the  morning  was  come,  the  giant  goes  to  them 
again,  and  takes  them  into  the  castle-yard,  and  shows  them  as 
his  wife  had  bidden  him.  These,  said  he,  were  pilgrims,  as  you 
are,  once,  and  they  trespassed  on  my  grounds,  as  you  have  done ; 
and  when  I  thought  fit,  I  tore  them  in  pieces ;  and  so  within 
ten  days  I  will  do  you.  Get  you  down  to  your  den  again  : 
and  with  that  he  beat  them  all  the  way  thither.  They  lay, 
therefore,  all  day  on  Saturday  in  a  lamentable  case,  as  before. 
Now,  when  night  was  come,  and  when  Mrs.  Diffidence  and  her 
husband  the  giant  were  got  to  bed,  they  began  to  renew  their 
discourse  of  their  prisoners  ;  and,  withal,  the  old  giant  wondered 
that  he  could  neither  by  his  blows  nor  counsel  bring  them  to 
an  end.  And  with  that  his  wife  replied — I  fear,  said  she,  that 
they  live  in  hopes  that  some  will  come  to  relieve  them,  or  that 
they  have  picklocks  about  them,  by  the  means  of  which  they  hope 
to  escape.  And  sayest  thou  so,  my  dear  ?  said  the  giant ;  I  will 
therefore  search  them  in  the  morning. 

Well,  on  Saturday,  about  midnight,  they  began  to  pray,  and 
continued  in  prayer  till  almost  break  of  day. 

Now,  a  little  before  it  was  day,  good  Christian,  as  one  half 
amazed,  brake  out  into  this  passionate  speech  :  What  a  fool, 
quoth  he,  am  I,  thus  to  lie  in  a  stinking  dungeon,  when  I  may 
as  well  walk  at  liberty  !  I  have  a  key  in  my  bosom,  called 
Promise,  that  will,  I  am  persuaded,  open  any  lock  in  Doubting 
Castle.  Then  said  Hopeful,  That's  good  news,  good  brother ; 
pluck  it  out  of  thy  bosom  and  try. 

Then  Christian  pulled  it  out  of  his  bosom,  and  began  to 
try  at  the  dungeon-door,  whose  bolt,  as  he  turned  the  key, 
gave  back,  and  the  door  flew  open  with  ease,  and  Christian  and 
Hopeful  both  came  out.  Then  he  went  to  the  outward  door  that 
leads  into  the  castle-yard,  and  with  his  key  opened  that  door 
also.  After  that,  he  went  to  the  iron  gate,  for  that  must  be  opened 
too.  But  that  lock  went  desperately  hard ;  yet  the  key  did  open 
it.  Then  they  thrust  open  the  gate  to  make  their  escape  with 
speed ;  but  that  gate  as  it  opened  made  such  a  creaking  that 
it  waked  Giant  Despair,  who,  hastily  rising  to  pursue  his  prisoners, 
felt  his  limbs  to  fail,  for  his  fits  took  him  again,  so  that  he  could 
by  no  means  go  after  them.  Then  they  went  on,  and  came  to 


76 


THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 


the    King's    highway    again,    and    so    were    safe,    because    they    were 
out   of  his   jurisdiction. 

Now,  when  they  were  gone  over  the  stile,  they  began  to 
contrive  with  themselves  what  they  should  do  at  that  stile,  to 
prevent  those  that  should  come  after  from  falling  into  the  hands 
of  Giant  Despair.  So  they  consented  to  erect  there  a  pillar, 
and  to  engrave  upon  the  side  thereof  this  sentence  :  "  Over  this 
stile  is  the  way  to  Doubting  Castle,  which  is  kept  by  Giant 
Despair,  who  despiseth  the  King  of  the  Celestial  Country,  and 
seeks  to  destroy  his  holy  pilgrims."  Many,  therefore,  that  fol- 
lowed after,  read  what  was  written,  and  escaped  the  danger. 


CHAPTER   IX 

THE    DELECTABLE    MOUNTAINS 

THEY  went  then  till  they  came  to  the  Delectable  Mountains, 
which  mountains  belong  to  the  Lord  of  that  hill  of  which 
we  have  spoken  before ;  so  they  went  up  to  the  moun- 
tains, to  behold  the  gardens  and  orchards,  the  vineyards  and 
fountains  of  water ;  where  also  they  drank,  and  washed  them- 
selves, and  did  freely  eat  of  the  vineyards.  Now  there  were  on 
the  top  of  these  mountains  Shepherds  feeding  their  flocks,  and 
they  stood  by  the  highway-side.  The  pilgrims,  therefore,  went  to 
them,  and  leaning  upon  their  staffs  (as  is  common  with  weary 
pilgrims  when  they  stand  to  talk  with  any  by  the  way),  they 
asked,  Whose  Delectable  Mountains  are  these  ?  and  whose  be  the 
sheep  that  feed  upon  them  ? 

Shep.  These  mountains  are  Immanuel's  Land,  and  they  are 
within  sight  of  his  city  ;  and  the  sheep  also  are  his,  and  he  laid 
down  his  life  for  them. 

Chr.    Is  this  the  way  to  the  Celestial  City  ? 

Shep.    You   are  just   in  your  way. 

Chr.    How   far   is   it  thither  ? 

Shep.  Too  far  for  any  but  those  who  shall  get  thither  in- 
deed. 

Chr.    Is  the  way  safe  or  dangerous  ? 

Shep.  Safe  for  those  for  whom  it  is  to  be  safe ;  •'  but  trans- 
gressors shall  fall  therein." 

Chr.  Is  there  in  this  place  any  relief  for  pilgrims  that  are 
weary  and  faint  in  the  way  ? 

Shep.  The  Lord  of  these  mountains  hath  given  us  a  charge, 
"  not  to  be  forgetful  to  entertain  strangers ;  ':  therefore  the  good 
of  the  place  is  before  you. 

I  saw  also  in  my  dream  that,  when  the  Shepherds  per- 
ceived that  they  were  wayfaring  men,  they  also  put  questions 
to  them  (to  which  they  made  answer,  as  in  other  places),  as, 
Whence  came  you  ?  and,  How  got  you  into  the  way  ?  and,  By 
what  means  have  you  so  persevered  therein  ?  for  but  few  of 

77 


78  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

them  that  begin  to  come  hither  do  show  their  face  on  these 
mountains.  But  when  the  Shepherds  heard  their  answers,  being 
pleased  therewith,  they  looked  very  lovingly  upon  them,  and  said, 
Welcome  to  the  Delectable  Mountains. 

The  Shepherds,  I  say,  whose  names  were  Knowledge,  Ex- 
perience, Watchful,  and  Sincere,  took  them  by  the  hand,  and 
had  them  to  their  tents,  and  made  them  partake  of  that  which 
was  ready  at  present.  They  said,  moreover,  We  would  that  you 
should  stay  here  a  while,  to  be  acquainted  with  us,  and  yet 
more  to  solace  yourselves  with  the  good  of  these  Delectable  Moun- 
tains. They  then  told  them  that  they  were  content  to  stay. 
So  they  went  to  rest  that  night,  because  it  was  very  late. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  in  the  morning  the  Shepherds 
called  up  Christian  and  Hopeful  to  walk  with  them  upon  the 
mountains.  So  they  went  forth  with  them,  and  walked  awhile, 
having  a  pleasant  prospect  on  every  side.  Then  said  the  Shep- 
herds one  to  another,  Shall  we  show  these  pilgrims  some  wonders  ? 
So,  when  they  had  concluded  to  do  it,  they  had  them  first  to 
the  top  of  a  hill  called  Error,  which  was  very  steep  on  the  farthest 
side,  and  bid  them  look  down  to  the  bottom.  So  Christian  and 
Hopeful  looked  down,  and  saw  at  the  bottom  several  men  dashed 
all  to  pieces  by  a  fall  that  they  had  from  the  top.  Then  said 
Christian,  What  meaneth  this  ?  The  Shepherds  answered,  Have  you 
not  heard  of  them  that  were  made  to  err,  by  hearkening  to 
Hymenaeus  and  Philetus  ?  They  answered,  Yes.  Then  said  the 
Shepherds,  Those  that  you  see  dashed  in  pieces  at  the  bottom 
of  this  mountain  are  they ;  and  they  have  continued  to  this  day 
unburied,  as  you  see,  for  an  example  to  others,  to  take  heed 
how  they  clamber  too  high,  or  how  they  come  too  near  the  brink 
of  this  mountain. 

Then  I  saw  that  they  had  them  to  the  top  of  another  moun- 
tain, and  the  name  of  that  is  Caution,  and  bid  them  look  afar 
off;  which  when  they  did,  they  perceived,  as  they  thought,  several 
men  walking  up  and  down  among  the  tombs  that  were  there : 
and  they  perceived  that  the  men  were  blind,  because  they  stum- 
bled sometimes  upon  the  tombs,  and  because  they  could  not  get 
out  from  among  them.  Then  said  Christian,  What  means  this  ? 

The  Shepherds  then  answered,  Did  you  not  see,  a  little  below 
these  mountains,  a  stile  that  led  into  a  meadow,  on  the  left 
hand  of  this  way  ?  They  answered,  Yes.  Then  said  the  Shepherds, 
From  that  stile  there  goes  a  path  that  leads  directly  to  Doubting 
Castle,  which  is  kept  by  Giant  Despair,  and  these  men  (pointing 
to  them  among  the  tombs)  came  once  on  pilgrimage,  as  you  do 
now,  even  until  they  came  to  that  same  stile.  And  because 


THE   DELECTABLE   MOUNTAINS  79 

the  right  way  was  rough  in  that  place,  they  chose  to  go  out 
of  it  into  that  meadow,  and  there  were  taken  by  Giant  Despair, 
and  cast  into  Doubting  Castle ;  where,  after  they  had  a  while 
been  kept  in  the  dungeon,  he  at  last  did  put  out  their  eyes,  and 
led  them  among  those  tombs,  where  he  has  left  them  to  wander 
to  this  very  day.  Then  Christian  and  Hopeful  looked  one  upon 
another  with  tears  gushing  out,  but  yet  said  nothing  to  the 
Shepherds. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  the  Shepherds  had  them  to 
another  place,  in  a  bottom,  where  was  a  door  on  the  side  of  a 
hill ;  and  they  opened  the  door,  and  bid  them  look  in.  They 
looked  in,  therefore,  and  saw  that  within  it  was  very  dark  and 
smoky  ;  they  also  thought  that  they  heard  there  a  rumbling  noise, 
as  of  fire,  and  that  they  smelt  the  scent  of  brimstone.  Then  said 
Christian,  What  means  this  ?  The  Shepherds  told  them,  This  is  a 
by-way  to  hell,  a  way  that  hypocrites  go  in  at — namely,  such  as 
sell  their  Master,  with  Judas  ;  such  as  blaspheme  the  gospel,  with 
Alexander ;  and  that  lie  and  dissemble,  with  Ananias  and  Sapphira 
his  wife. 

Hope.  Then  said  Hopeful  to  the  Shepherds,  I  perceive  that 
these  had  on  them,  even  every  one,  a  show  of  pilgrimage,  as  we 
have  now ;  had  they  not  ? 

Shep.    Yes,  and  held  it  a  long  time  too. 

Hope.  How  far  might  they  go  on  in  pilgrimage  in  their  days, 
since  they,  notwithstanding,  were  thus  miserably  cast  away  ? 

Shep.    Some  further,  and  some  not  so  far  as  these  mountains. 

Then  said  the  pilgrims  one  to  the  other,  We  have  need  to  cry 
to  the  Strong  for  strength. 

Shep.  Ay,  and  you  will  have  need  to  use  it  when  you  have  it 
too! 

By  this  time  the  pilgrims  had  a  desire  to  go  forwards,  and  the 
Shepherds  a  desire  they  should  ;  so  they  walked  together  towards 
the  end  of  the  mountains.  Then  said  the  Shepherds  one  to  another, 
Let  us  here  show  the  pilgrims  the  gates  of  the  Celestial  City,  if 
they  have  skill  to  look  through  our  perspective-glass.  The  pilgrims 
then  lovingly  accepted  the  motion  ;  so  they  had  them  to  the  top 
of  a  high  hill  called  Clear,  and  gave  them  the  glass  to  look. 

Then  they  tried  to  look,  but  the  remembrance  of  that  last 
thing  that  the  Shepherds  had  shown  them  made  their  hands  shake; 
by  means  of  which  impediment  they  could  not  look  steadily  through 
the  glass  ;  yet  they  thought  they  saw  something  like  the  gate,  and 
also  some  of  the  glory  of  the  place. 

When  they  were  about  to  depart,  one  of  the  Shepherds  gave 
them  a  note  of  the  way.  Another  of  them  bid  them  beware  of 


80 


THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 


the  Flatterer.  The  third  bid  them  take  heed  that  they  slept  not 
upon  the  Enchanted  Ground.  And  the  fourth  bid  them  Godspeed. 
So  they  went  on  till  they  came  at  a  place  where  they  saw  a 
way  put  itself  into  their  way,  and  seemed  withal  to  lie  as  straight 
as  the  way  which  they  should  go ;  and  here  they  knew  not  which 
of  the  two  to  take,  for  both  seemed  straight  before  them  :  there- 
fore here  they  stood  still  to  consider.  And  as  they  were  thinking 


about  the  way,  behold,  a  man  black  of  flesh,  but  covered  with  a 
very  light  robe,  came  to  them,  and  asked  them  why  they  stood 
there.  They  answered,  they  were  going  to  the  Celestial  City,  but 
knew  not  which  of  these  ways  to  take.  Follow  me,  said  the  man  ;  it 
is  thither  that  I  am  going.  So  they  followed  him  in  the  way  that 
but  now  [came  into  the  road,  which  by  degrees  turned,  and  turned 
them  so  far  from  the  city  that  they  desired  to  go  to,  that  in  a 
little  time  their  faces  were  turned  away  from  it  :  yet  they  followed 


THE  DELECTABLE  MOUNTAINS  81 

him.  But  by-and-by,  before  they  were  aware,  he  led  them  both 
within  the  compass  of  a  net,  in  which  they  were  both  so  entangled 
that  they  knew  not  what  to  do ;  and  with  that  the  white  robe 
fell  off  the  black  man's  back.  Then  they  saw  where  they  were. 
Wherefore  there  they  lay  crying  some  time,  for  they  could  not  get 
themselves  out. 

Chr.  Then  said  Christian  to  his  fellow,  Now  do  I  see  myself 
in  an  error.  Did  not  the  Shepherds  bid  us  beware  of  the  Flatterer  ? 
As  is  the  saying  of  the  wise  man,  so  we  have  found  it  this  day, 
"  A  man  that  flattereth  his  neighbour  spreadeth  a  net  for  his  feet." 

Hope.  They  also  gave  us  a  note  of  directions  about  the  way, 
for  our  more  sure  finding  thereof ;  but  therein  we  have  also  for- 
gotten to  read,  and  have  not  kept  ourselves  from  the  "  paths  of  the 
destroyer." 

Thus  they  lay  bewailing  themselves  in  the  net.  At  last  they 
espied  a  Shining  One  coming  towards  them  with  a  whip  of  small 
cords  in  his  hand.  When  he  was  come  to  the  place  where  they 
were,  he  asked  them  whence  they  came,  and  what  they  did  there. 
They  told  him  that  they  were  poor  pilgrims  going  to  Zion,  but 
were  led  out  of  their  way  by  a  black  man  clothed  in  white,  who 
bid  us,  said  they,  follow  him,  for  he  was  going  thither  too.  Then 
said  he  with  the  whip,  It  is  Flatterer,  "  a  false  apostle,  that  hath 
transformed  himself  into  an  angel  of  light."  So  he  rent  the  net, 
and  let  the  men  out.  Then  said  he  to  them,  Follow  me,  that  I 
may  set  you  in  your  way  again.  So  he  led  them  back  to  the  way 
they  had  left  to  follow  the  Flatterer.  Then  he  asked  them, 
saying,  Where  did  you  lie  the  last  night  ?  They  said,  With  the 
Shepherds  upon  the  Delectable  Mountains.  He  asked  them  then 
if  they  had  not  of  the  Shepherds  a  note  of  directions  for  the  way. 
They  answered,  Yes.  But  did  you  not,  said  he,  when  you  were 
at  a  stand,  pluck  out  and  read  your  note  ?  They  answered,  No. 
He  asked  them,  WThy  ?  They  said  they  forgot.  He  asked,  more- 
over, if  the  Shepherds  did  not  bid  them  beware  of  the  Flatterer. 
They  answered,  Yes  ;  but  we  did  not  imagine,  said  they,  that  this 
fine-spoken  man  had  been  he. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  he  commanded  them  to  lie 
down ;  which  when  they  did,  he  chastised  them  sore,  to  teach  them 
the  good  way  wherein  they  should  walk,  and  as  he  chastised  them, 
he  said,  "  As  many  as  I  love,  I  rebuke  and  chasten :  be  zealous 
therefore,  and  repent."  This  done,  he  bids  them  go  on  their  way, 
and  take  good  heed  to  the  other  directions  of  the  Shepherds.  So 
they  thanked  him  for  all  his  kindness,  and  went  softly  along  the 
right  way  until  they  came  into  a  certain  country  whose  air  naturally 
tended  to  make  one  drowsy,  if  he  came  a  stranger  into  it.  And 
6 


THE   DELECTABLE   MOUNTAINS  83 

here  Hopeful  began  to  be  very  dull  and  heavy  to  sleep  :  wherefore 
he  said  unto  Christian,  I  do  now  begin  to  grow  so  drowsy  that  I 
can  scarcely  hold  open  mine  eyes  ;  let  us  lie  down  here,  and  take 
one  nap. 

By  no  means,  said  the  other ;  lest  sleeping  we  never  awake 
more. 

Hope.  Why,  my  brother  ?  sleep  is  sweet  to  the  labouring 
man  ;  we  may  be  refreshed,  if  we  take  a  nap. 

Chr.  Do  not  you  remember  that  one  of  the  Shepherds  bid  us 
beware  of  the  Enchanted  Ground  ?  He  meant  by  that,  that  we 
should  beware  of  sleeping.  "  Therefore  let  us  not  sleep,  as  do 
others  ;  but  let  us  watch,  and  be  sober." 

Hope.  I  acknowledge  myself  in  a  fault ;  and  had  I  been  here 
alone,  I  had  by  sleeping  run  the  danger  of  death.  I  see  it  is  true 
that  the  wise  man  saith,  "  Two  are  better  than  one."  Hitherto 
hath  thy  company  been  my  mercy ;  and  thou  shalt  have  a  good 
reward  for  thy  labour. 


CHAPTER   X 

THE    PASSING    OF   THE    RIVER 

NOW  I  saw  in  my  dream,  that  by  this  time  the  pilgrims 
were  got  over  the  Enchanted  Ground ;  and  entering 
into  the  country  of  Beulah,  whose  air  was  very  sweet  and 
pleasant,  the  way  lying  directly  through  it,  they  solaced  themselves 
there  for  a  season.  Yea,  here  they  heard  continually  the  singing 
of  birds,  and  saw  every  day  the  flowers  appear  in  the  earth,  and 
heard  the  voice  of  the  turtle  in  the  land.  In  this  country  the  sun 
shineth  night  and  day  :  wherefore  this  was  beyond  the  Valley  of 
the  Shadow  of  Death,  and  also  out  of  the  reach  of  Giant  Despair ; 
neither  could  they  from  this  place  so  much  as  see  Doubting  Castle. 
Here  they  were  within  sight  of  the  city  they  were  going  to  ;  also 
here  met  them  some  of  the  inhabitants  thereof:  for  in  this  land  the 
Shining  Ones  commonly  walked,  because  it  was  upon  the  borders  of 
heaven.  Here  they  had  no  want  of  corn  and  wine ;  for  in  this 
place  they  met  with  abundance  of  what  they  had  sought  for  in  all 
their  pilgrimages. 

Now,  as  they  walked  in  this  land,  they  had  more  rejoicing 
than  in  parts  more  remote  from  the  kingdom  to  which  they  were 
bound ;  and  drawing  near  to  the  city,  they  had  yet  a  more 
perfect  view  thereof.  It  was  builded  of  pearls  and  precious  stones, 
also  the  streets  thereof  were  paved  with  gold  ;  so  that  by  reason 
of  the  natural  glory  of  the  city,  and  the  reflection  of  the  sunbeams 
upon  it,  Christian  with  desire  fell  sick.  Hopeful  also  had  a  fit  or 
two  of  the  same  disease.  Wherefore  here  they  lay  by  it  a  while, 
crying  out  because  of  their  pangs,  "If  ye  see  my  Beloved,  tell 
him  that  I  am  sick  of  love." 

But  being  a  little  strengthened,  and  better  able  to  bear  their 
sickness,  they  walked  on  their  way,  and  came  yet  nearer  and  nearer, 
where  were  orchards,  vineyards,  and  gardens,  and  their  gates  opened 
into  the  highway.  Now,  as  they  came  up  to  these  places,  behold 
the  gardener  stood  in  the  way  ;  to  whom  the  pilgrims  said,  Whose 
goodly  vineyards  and  gardens  are  these  ?  He  answered,  They  are 
the  King's,  and  are  planted  here  for  his  own  delights,  and  also  for 

84 


THE   PASSING   OF   THE   RIVER  85 

solace  of  pilgrims.  So  the  gardener  had  them  into  the  vineyards, 
and  bid  them  refresh  themselves  with  the  dainties  ;  he  also  showed 
them  there  the  King's  walks,  and  the  arbours  where  he  delighted  to 
be  :  and  here  they  tarried  and  slept. 

Now  I  beheld  in  my  dream  that  they  talked  more  in  their 
sleep  at  this  time  than  ever  they  did  in  all  their  journey ;  for  it 
is  the  nature  of  the  fruit  of  the  grapes  of  these  vineyards  "to  go 
down  so  sweetly  as  to  cause  the  lips  of  them  that  are  asleep  to 
speak." 

When  they  awoke  they  addressed  themselves  to  go  up  to  the 
city.  But,  as  I  said,  the  reflection  of  the  sun  upon  the  city 
(for  the  city  was  pure  gold)  was  so  extremely  glorious,  that  they 
could  not,  as  yet,  with  open  face  behold  it,  but  through  an  instru- 
ment made  for  that  purpose.  So  I  saw  that,  as  they  went  on, 
there  met  them  two  men  in  raiment  that  shone  like  gold,  also 
their  faces  shone  as  the  light. 

These  men  asked  the  pilgrims  whence  they  came ;  and  they 
told  them.  They  also  asked  them  where  they  had  lodged,  what 
difficulties  and  dangers,  what  comforts  and  pleasures,  they  had  met 
in  the  way ;  and  they  told  them.  Then  said  the  men  that  met 
them,  You  have  but  two  difficulties  more  to  meet  with,  and  then 
you  are  in  the  city. 

Christian  then  and  his  companion  asked  the  men  to  go  along 
with  them  ;  so  they  told  them  that  they  would.  But,  said  they, 
you  must  obtain  it  by  your  own  faith.  So  I  saw  in  my  dream 
that  they  went  on  together  till  they  came  in  sight  of  the  gate. 

Now  I  further  saw,  that  between  them  and  the  gate  was  a 
river ;  but  there  was  no  bridge  to  go  over.  The  river  was  very 
deep.  At  the  sight,  therefore,  of  this  river  the  pilgrims  were  much 
stunned ;  but  the  men  that  went  with  them  said,  You  must  go 
through,  or  you  cannot  come  at  the  gate. 

The  pilgrims  then  began  to  inquire  if  there  was  no  other  way 
to  the  gate.  To  which  they  answered,  Yes ;  but  there  hath  not 
any,  save  two — to  wit,  Enoch  and  Elijah — been  permitted  to  tread 
that  path  since  the  foundation  of  the  world,  nor  shall  until  the 
last  trumpet  shall  sound.  The  pilgrims  then,  especially  Christian, 
began  to  despond,  and  looked  this  way  and  that,  but  could  find 
no  way  by  which  they  might  escape  the  river.  Then  they  asked 
the  men  if  the  waters  were  all  of  the  same  depth.  They  said, 
No  :  yet  they  could  not  help  them  in  that  case ;  for,  said  they, 
you  shall  find  it  deeper  or  shallower,  as  you  believe  in  the  King 
of  the  place. 

Then    they    addressed    themselves  to    the    water,    and    entering, 
Christian  began  to  sink,  and  crying  out  to  his  good  friend  Hopeful, 


86  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

he    said,    I    sink    in    deep    waters ;     the    billows    go    over   my    head ; 
all  the  waves   go   over  me. 

Then  said  the  other,  Be  of  good  cheer,  my  brother ;  I  feel 
the  bottom,  and  it  is  good.  Then  said  Christian,  Ah  !  my  friend, 
the  sorrows  of  death  have  compassed  me  about ;  I  shall  not 
see  the  land  that  floweth  with  milk  and  honey.  And  with  that 
a  great  darkness  and  horror  fell  upon  Christian,  so  that  he  could 
not  see  before  him.  Also  here  he  in  a  great  measure  lost  his 
senses,  so  that  he  could  neither  remember  nor  orderly  talk  of 
any  of  those  sweet  refreshments  that  he  had  met  with  in  the 
way  of  his  pilgrimage.  But  all  the  words  that  he  spoke  still 
tended  to  discover  that  he  had  horror  of  mind,  and  heart-fears 
that  he  should  die  in  that  river,  and  never  obtain  entrance  in 
at  the  gate.  Here  also,  as  they  who  stood  by  perceived,  he  was 
much  in  the  troublesome  thoughts  of  the  sins  that  he  had  com- 
mitted, both  since  and  before  he  began  to  be  a  pilgrim.  It  was 
also  observed  that  he  was  troubled  with  apparitions  of  hobgoblins 
and  evil  spirits  ;  for  ever  and  anon  he  would  intimate  so  much 
by  words. 

Hopeful  therefore  here  had  much  ado  to  keep  his  brother's 
head  above  water  ;  yea,  sometimes  he  would  be  quite  gone  down, 
and  then,  ere  a  while,  he  would  rise  up  again,  half  dead.  Hope- 
ful also  would  endeavour  to  comfort  him,  saying,  Brother,  I  see 
the  gate,  and  men  standing  by  to  receive  us.  But  Christian 
would  answer,  'Tis  you,  'tis  you  they  wait  for ;  you  have  been 
hopeful  ever  since  I  knew  you.  And  so  have  you,  said  he  to 
Christian.  Ah,  brother  !  said  he,  surely  if  I  were  right,  he  would 
now  arise  to  help  me ;  but  for  my  sins  he  hath  brought  me  into 
the  snare,  and  hath  left  me.  Then  said  Hopeful,  My  brother, 
these  troubles  and  distresses  that  yCfu  go  through  are  no  sign 
that  God  hath  forsaken  you ;  but  are  sent  to  v  try  you,  whether 
you  will  call  to  mind  that  which  heretofore  you  hav^,  received 
of  his  goodness,  and  live  upon  him  in  your  distresses. 

Then  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian  was  in  a  muse  a 
while.  To  whom  also  Hopeful  added  these  words,  Be  of  good 
cheer ;  Jesus  Christ  maketh  thee  whole.  And  with  that  Christian 
brake  out  with  a  loud  voice,  Oh,  I  see  him  again !  and  he  tells 
me,  "  When  thou  passest  through  the  waters,  I  will  be  with  thee  ; 
and  through  the  rivers,  they  shall  not  overflow  thee."  Then  they 
both  took  courage,  and  the  enemy  was  after  that  as  still  as  a  stone, 
until  they  were  gone  over.  Christian  therefore  presently  found 
ground  to  stand  upon,  and  so  it  followed  that  the  rest  of  the 
ground  was  but  shallow.  Thus  they  got  over. 

Now,    upon    the    bank    of   the    river,    on    the    other    side,    they 


88  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

saw  the  two  Shining  Men  again,  who  there  waited  for  them. 
Wherefore  being  come  out  of  the  river,  they  saluted  them,  saying, 
"  We  are  ministering  spirits,  sent  forth  to  minister  to  those  that 
shall  be  heirs  of  salvation."  Thus  they  went  towards  the  gate. 

Now  you  must  note  that  the  city  stood  upon  a  mighty  hill  ; 
but  the  pilgrims  went  up  that  hill  with  ease,  because  they  had 
these  two  men  to  lead  them  up  by  the  arms  :  they  had  like- 
wise left  their  mortal  garments  behind  them  in  the  river ;  for 
though  they  went  in  with  them,  they  came  out  without  them. 
They  therefore  went  up  here  with  much  agility  and  speed,  though 
the  foundation  upon  which  the  city  was  framed  was  higher  than 
the  clouds  ;  they  therefore  went  up  through  the  regions  of  the 
air,  sweetly  talking  as  they  went,  being  comforted  because  they 
safely  got  over  the  river,  and  had  such  glorious  companions  to 
attend  them. 

The  talk  that  they  had  with  the  Shining  Ones  was  about 
the  glory  of  the  place  ;  who  told  them  that  the  beauty  and 
glory  of  it  was  inexpressible.  There,  said  they,  is  "  Mount  Zion, 
the  heavenly  Jerusalem,  the  innumerable  company  of  angels,  and 
the  spirits  of  just  men  made  perfect."  You  are  going  now,  said 
they,  to  the  paradise  of  God,  wherein  you  shall  see  the  tree  of 
life,  and  eat  of  the  never-fading  fruits  thereof ;  and  when  you 
come  there  you  shall  have  white  robes  given  you,  and  your  walk 
and  talk  shall  be  every  day  with  the  King,  even  all  the  days  of 
eternity.  There  you  shall  not  see  again  such  things  as  you  saw 
when  you  were  in  the  lower  region  upon  the  earth — to  wit, 
sorrow,  sickness,  affliction,  and  death  :  "  for  the  former  things  are 
passed  away." 

The  men  then  asked,  What  must  we  do  in  the  holy  place  ? 
To  whom  it  was  answered,  You  must  there  receive  the  comforts 
of  all  your  toil,  and  have  joy  for  all  your  sorrow ;  you  must 
reap  what  you  have  sown,  even  the  fruit  of  all  your  prayers, 
and  tears,  and  sufferings  for  the  King  by  the  way.  There  you 
shall  enjoy  your  friends  again  that  are  gone  thither  before  you ; 
and  there  you  shall  with  joy  receive  even  every  one  that  follows 
into  the  holy  place  after  you. 

Now  while  they  were  thus  drawing  towards  the  gate,  be- 
hold a  company  of  the  heavenly  host  came  out  to  meet  them  ; 
to  whom  it  was  said  by  the  other  two  Shining  Ones,  These  are 
the  men  that  have  loved  our  Lord  when  they  were  in  the  world, 
and  that  have  forsaken  all  for  his  holy  name  ;  and  he  hath  sent 
us  to  fetch  them,  and  we  have  brought  them  thus  far  on  their 
desired  journey,  that  they  may  go  in  and  look  their  Redeemer 
in  the  face  with  joy.  Then  the  heavenly  host  gave  a  great 


THE   PASSING   OF   THE   RIVER 


89 


shout,  saying,  "  Blessed  are  they  that  are  called  to  the  marriage 
supper  of  the  Lamb."  There  came  out  also  at  this  time  to  meet 
them  several  of  the  King's  trumpeters,  clothed  in  white  and  shining 
raiment,  who,  with  melodious  voices,  made  even  the  heavens  to 
echo  with  their  sound.  These  trumpeters  saluted  Christian  and 
his  fellow  with  ten  thousand  welcomes  from  the  world ;  and  this 
they  did  with  shouting  and  sound  of  trumpet. 

This   done,   they   compassed   them   round   on   every   side :    some 
went   before,   some   behind,    and   some   on   the   right   hand,   some   on 


^'MMA^m^^m-K^^ 


the  left  (as  it  were  to  guard  them  through  the  upper  regions), 
continually  sounding  as  they  went,  with  melodious  noise,  in  notes 
on  high  ;  so  that  the  very  sight  was  to  them  that  could  behold 
it  as  if  heaven  itself  was  come  down  to  meet  them.  Here  also 
they  had  the  city  itself  in  view  ;  and  they  thought  they  heard 
all  the  bells  therein  ring,  to  welcome  them  thereto.  But,  above 
all,  the  warm  and  joyful  thoughts  that  they  had  about  their 
own  dwelling  there,  with  such  company,  and  that  for  ever  and 
ever  — oh,  by  what  tongue  or  pen  can  their  glorious  joy  be  ex- 
pressed !  Thus  they  came  up  to  the  gate. 


90  THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS 

Now  when  they  were  come  up  to  the  gate,  there  was  written 
over  it  in  letters  of  gold  :— 

"  BLESSED  ARE  THEY  THAT  DO  HIS  COMMANDMENTS, 
THAT  THEY  MAY  HAVE  RIGHT  TO  THE  TREE  OF  LIFE,  AND 
MAY  ENTER  IN  THROUGH  THE  GATES  INTO  THE  CITY." 

Now  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  these  two  men  went  in  at 
the  gate ;  and,  lo !  as  they  entered,  they  were  transfigured,  and 
they  had  raiment  put  on  that  shone  like  gold.  There  were  also 
that  met  them  with  harps  and  crowns,  and  gave  them  to  them  ; 
the  harps  to  praise  withal,  and  the  crowns  in  token  of  honour. 
Then  I  heard  in  my  dream  that  all  the  bells  in  the  city  rang  again 
for  joy,  and  that  it  was  said  unto  them,  "  ENTER  YE  INTO  THE 
JOY  OF  YOUR  LORD."  I  also  heard  the  men  themselves  sing  with 
a  loud  voice,  saying,  "  BLESSING,  AND  HONOUR,  AND  GLORY,  AND 
POWER,  BE  UNTO  HlM  THAT  SITTETH  UPON  THE  THRONE,  AND  UNTO 
THE  LAMB,  FOR  EVER  AND  EVER." 

Now,  just  as  the  gates  were  opened  to  let  in  the  men,  I 
looked  in  after  them,  and  behold,  the  city  shone  like  the  sun ;  the 
streets  also  were  paved  with  gold ;  and  in  them  walked  many 
men  with  crowns  on  their  heads,  palms  in  their  hands,  and  golden 
harps,  to  sing  praises  withal. 

There  were  also  of  them  that  had  wings,  and  they  answered 
one  another  without  intermission,  saying,  "  Holy,  holy,  holy  is 
the  Lord  !  "  And  after  that  they  shut  up  the  gates,  which,  when 
I  had  seen,  I  wished  myself  among  them. 


END  OF  PART  I 


PART  SECOND 


GO  now,  my  little  Book,  to  every  place 
Where  my  First  Pilgrim  has  but  shown  his  face; 
Call  at  their  door.     If  any  say,  Who's  there  ? 
Then  answer  thou,  CHRISTIANA  is  here. 
If  they  bid  thee  come  in,  then  enter  thou, 
With  all  thy  boys  ;    and  then,  as  thou  know'st  how, 
Tell  who  they  are,  also  from  whence  they  came  ; 
Perhaps  they'll  know  them  by  their  looks  or  name. 

Tell  them  that  they  have  left  their  house  and  home, 
Are  turned  Pilgrims,  seek  a  World  to  come  : 
That  they  have  met  with  hardships  in  the  way  ; 
That  they  do  meet  with  troubles  night  and  day  ; 
That  they  have  trod  on  serpents,  fought  with  devils, 
Have  also  overcome  a  many  evils. 

Go  tell  them  also  of  those  dainty  things 
That  Pilgrimage  unto  the  Pilgrim  brings. 
Let  them  acquainted  be,  too,  how  they  are 
Beloved  of  their  King,  under  his  care  ; 
What  goodly  mansions  for  them  he  provides, 
Though  they  meet  with  rough  winds  and  swelling  tides  ; 
How  brave  a  calm  they  will  enjoy  at  last, 
Who  to  their  Lord  and  by  his  ways  hold  fast. 

JOHX  BUNYAN. 


Page  93 


CHAPTER  I 

CHRISTIANA,    HER   SONS,    AND   MERCY   BECOME    PILGRIMS 

SOME     time     since,    to    tell     you     my    dream    that    I    had    of 
Christian  the   Pilgrim,    and   of  his  dangerous  journey  towards 
the    Celestial    Country,    was    pleasant    to    me    and    profitable 
to    you.      I   told   you   then,   also,   what   I   saw   concerning    his    wife 
and   children,    and    how    unwilling    they    were    to    go    with    him   on 
pilgrimage — insomuch    that    he    was    forced    to    go    on    his    progress 
without    them ;    for    he    durst    not    run    the    danger    of   that    which 
he    feared    would    come     by    staying     with     them    in    the    City    of 
Destruction :    wherefore,    as   I   then   showed   you,    he   left   them   and 
departed. 

This  Christiana  (for  that  was  her  name  from  the  day  that 
she  with  her  children  betook  themselves  to  a  pilgrim's  life),  after 
her  husband  was  gone  over  the  river,  and  she  could  hear  of  him 
no  more,  began  to  have  thoughts  working  in  her  mind.  First, 
for  that  she  had  lost  her  husband,  and  for  that  the  loving 
bond  of  that  relation  was  utterly  broken  betwixt  them,  and 
this  cost  her  many  a  tear.  But  this  was  not  all  ;  for  Christiana 
did  also  begin  to  consider  with  herself,  whether  her  unbecoming 
behaviour  towards  her  husband  was  not  one  cause  that  she  saw 
him  no  more,  and  that  in  such  sort  he  was  taken  away  from 
her.  And  upon  this  came  into  her  mind,  by  swarms,  all  her 
unkind,  unnatural,  and  ungodly  carriage  to  her  dear  friend  ; 
which  also  clogged  her  conscience,  and  did  load  her  with  guilt. 
She  was,  moreover,  much  broken  with  recalling  to  remembrance 
the  restless  groans,  brinish  tears,  and  self-bemoanings  of  her  hus- 
band, and  how  she  did  harden  her  heart  against  all  his  entreaties 
and  loving  persuasions,  of  her  and  her  sons,  to  go  with  him ; 
yea,  there  was  not  anything  that  Christian  either  said  to  her, 
or  did  before  her,  all  the  while  that  his  burden  did  hang  on  his 
back,  but  it  returned  upon  her  like  a  flash  of  lightning,  and  rent 

93 


94  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

the  caul  of  her  heart  in  sunder ;  especially  that  bitter  outcry 
of  his,  "  What  shall  I  do  to  be  saved  ?  ':  did  ring  in  her  ears 
most  dolefully. 

Then  said  she  to  her  children,  Sons,  we  are  all  undone.  I 
have  sinned  away  your  father,  and  he  is  gone :  he  would  have 
had  us  with  him,  but  I  would  not  go  myself ;  I  also  have  hin- 
dered you  of  life.  With  that  the  boys  fell  all  into  tears,  and 
cried  out  to  go  after  their  father.  Oh,  said  Christiana,  that 
it  had  been  but  our  lot  to  go  with  him  !  then  had  it  fared  well 
with  us,  beyond  what  it  is  like  to  do  now.  For  though  I  formerly 
foolishly  imagined,  concerning  the  troubles  of  your  father,  that 
they  proceeded  of  a  foolish  fancy  that  he  had,  or  for  that  he 
was  overrun  with  melancholy  humours  ;  yet  now  it  will  not  out 
of  my  mind  but  that  they  sprang  from  another  cause — to  wit, 
for  that  the  light  of  life  was  given  him,  by  the  help  of  which, 
as  I  perceive,  he  has  escaped  the  snares  of  death.  Then  they 
all  wept  again,  and  cried  out,  Oh,  woe  worth  the  day  ! 

The  next  night  Christiana  had  a  dream  ;  and,  behold,  she  saw 
as  if  a  broad  parchment  was  opened  before  her,  in  which  was 
recorded  the  sum  of  her  ways ;  and  the  times,  as  she  thought, 
looked  very  black  upon  her.  Then  she  cried  out  aloud  in  her 
sleep,  "  Lord,  have  mercy  upon  me,  a  sinner !  "  and  the  little 
children  heard  her. 

After  this,  she  thought  she  saw  two  very  ill-favoured  ones 
standing  by  her  bedside,  and  saying,  What  shall  we  do  with  this 
woman  ?  for  she  cries  out  for  mercy,  waking  and  sleeping.  If  she 
be  suffered  to  go  on  as  she  begins,  we  shall  lose  her,  as  we  have 
lost  her  husband.  Wherefore  we  must,  by  one  way  or  other,  seek 
to  take  her  off  from  the  thoughts  of  what  shall  be  hereafter,  else 
all  the  world  cannot  help  but  she  will  become  a  pilgrim. 

Now  she  awoke  in  a  great  sweat,  also  a  trembling  was  upon 
her ;  but  after  a  while  she  fell  to  sleeping  again.  And  then  she 
thought  she  saw  Christian  her  husband  in  a  place  of  bliss  among 
many  immortals,  with  a  harp  in  his  hand,  standing  and  playing 
upon  it  before  One  that  sat  upon  a  throne,  with  a  rainbow  about 
his  head. 

Next  morning  when  she  was  up,  had  prayed  to  God,  and  talked 
with  her  children  awhile,  one  knocked  hard  at  the  door ;  to  whom 
she  spake,  saying,  If  thou  comest  in  God's  name,  come  in.  So  he 
said,  Amen ;  and  opened  the  door,  and  saluted  her  with,  Peace  be 
to  this  house.  The  which  when  he  had  done,  he  said,  Christiana, 
knowest  thou  wherefore  I  am  come  ?  Then  she  blushed  and 
trembled  ;  also  her  heart  began  to  wax  warm  with  desires  to  know 
from  whence  he  came,  and  what  was  his  errand  to  her.  So  he  said 


CHRISTIANA  AND   MERCY   BECOME   PILGRIMS 


95 


unto  her,  My  name  is  Secret ;  I  dwell  with  those  that  are  on  high. 
It  is  talked  of  where  I  dwell,  as  if  thou  hadst  a  desire  to  go 
thither ;  also  there  is  a  report  that  thou  art  aware  of  the  evil 
thou  hast  formerly  done  to  thy  husband,  in  hardening  of  thy  heart 


against  his  way,   and  in  keeping  of  these  babes  in  their  ignorance 
Christiana,   the  Merciful   One   hath   sent   me  to   tell   thee  that  he   is 
a  God   ready  to  forgive,  and  that  he  taketh  delight  to  multiply  the 
pardon    of   offences.      He    also   would    have   thee    to   know    that   he 
inviteth    thee   to    come   into    his    presence,    where    is    Christian,    thy 


96  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

husband,  with  legions  more,  his  companions,  ever  beholding  that 
face  that  doth  minister  life  to  beholders ;  and  they  shall  all  be  glad 
when  they  shall  hear  the  sound  of  thy  feet  step  over  thy  Father's 
threshold. 

Christiana  at  this  was  greatly  abashed  in  herself,  and  bowed 
her  head  to  the  ground.  This  visitor  proceeded,  and  said,  Christiana, 
here  is  also  a  letter  for  thee,  which  I  have  brought  to  thee  from 
thy  husband's  King.  So  she  took  it,  and  opened  it,  and  it  smelt 
after  the  manner  of  the  best  perfume;  also  it  was  written  in 
letters  of  gold.  The  contents  of  the  letter  were  these  :  Thtt.V  the 
King  would  have  her  to  do  as  Christian  her  husband  ;  for  that  was 
the  way  to  come  to  his  city,  and  to  dwell  in  his  presence  with 
joy  for  ever.  At  this  the  good  woman  was  quite  overcome ;  so 
she  cried  out  to  her  visitor,  Sir,  will  you  carry  me  and  my  children 
with  you,  that  we  also  may  go  and  worship  the  King  ? 

Then  said  the  visitor,  Christiana,  the  bitter  is  before  the  sweet. 
Thou  must  through  troubles,  as  did  he  that  went  before  thee, 
enter  this  Celestial  City.  Wherefore  I  advise  thee  to  do  as  did 
Christian  thy  husband.  Go  to  the  Wicket-gate  yonder,  over  the 
plain ;  for  that  stands  at  the  head  of  the  way  up  which  thou 
must  go,  and  I  wish  thee  all  good  speed.  Also  I  advise  that  thou 
put  this  letter  in  thy  bosom ;  that  thou  read  therein  to  thyself, 
and  to  thy  children,  until  those  have  got  it  by  heart ;  for  it  is 
one  of  the  songs  that  thou  must  sing  while  thou  art  in  this  house 
of  thy  pilgrimage;  also  this  thou  must  deliver  in  at  the  farther  gate. 

So  Christiana  called  her  sons  together,  and  did  thus  address 
herself  unto  them  :  Come,  my  children,  let  us  pack  up,  and  be 
gone  to  the  gate  that  leads  to  the  Celestial  Country,  that  we  may 
see  your  father,  and  be  with  him  and  his  companions  in  peace, 
according  to  the  laws  of  that  land. 

Then  did  her  children  burst  out  into  tears,  for  joy  that  the 
heart  of  their  mother  was  so  inclined.  So  their  visitor  bid  them 
farewell ;  and  they  began  to  prepare  to  set  out  for  their  journey. 

But  while  they  were  thus  about  to  be  gone,  two  of  the  women 
that  were  Christiana's  neighbours  came  up  to  the  house,  and 
knocked  at  her  door.  To  whom  she  said  as  before,  If  you  come  in 
God's  name,  come  in.  At  this  the  women  were  stunned,  for  this 
kind  of  language  they  used  not  to  hear,  or  to  perceive  to  drop 
from  the  lips  of  Christiana.  Yet  they  came  in  ;  but,  behold,  they 
found  the  good  woman  preparing  to  be  gone  from  her  house. 

So  they  began,  and  said,  Neighbour,  pray  what  is  your  meaning 
by  this  ? 

Christiana  answered,  and  said  to  the  eldest  of  them,  whose 
name  was  Mrs.  Timorous,  I  am  preparing  for  a  journey.  (This 


CHRISTIANA  AND   MERCY  BECOME   PILGRIMS          97 

Timorous  was  daughter  to  him  that  met  Christian  upon  the  hill  of 
Difficulty,  and  would  have  had  him  go  back  for  fear  of  the  lions.) 

Tim.    For  what  journey,  I  pray  you  ? 

Chr.    Even  to  go  after  my  good  husband. 

Tim.  I  hope  not  so,  good  neighbour ;  pray,  for  your  poor 
children's  sake,  do  not  so  unwomanly  cast  away  yourself. 

Chr.  Nay,  my  children  shall  go  with  me  ;  not  one  of  them  is 
willing  to  stay  behind. 

Tim.  I  wonder  in  my  very  heart  what  or  who  has  brought 
you  into  this  mind  ? 

Chr.  O  neighbour  !  knew  you  but  as  much  as  I  do,  I  doubt 
not  but  that  you  would  go  with  me. 

Tim.  Pr'ythee,  what  new  knowledge  hast  thou  got,  that  so 
worketh  off  thy  mind  from  thy  friends,  and  that  tempteth  thee 
to  go  nobody  knows  where  ? 

Chr.  Then  Christiana  replied,  I  have  been  sorely  afflicted  since 
my  husband's  departure  from  me,  but  especially  since  he  went  over 
the  river.  But  that  which  troubleth  me  most  is  my  churlish 
carriage  to  him  when  he  was  under  his  distress.  Besides,  I  am 
now  as  he  was  then  ;  nothing  will  serve  me  but  going  on  pilgrim- 
age. I  was  a-dreaming  last  night  that  I  saw  him.  O  that  my  soul 
was  with  him  !  The  Prince  of  the  place  has  also  sent  for  me,  with 
promises  of  entertainment,  if  I  shall  come  to  him :  his  messenger 
was  here  even  now,  and  has  brought  me  a  letter,  which  invites  me 
to  come.  And  with  that  she  plucked  out  the  letter,  and  read  it, 
and  said  to  them,  What  now  will  you  say  to  this  ? 

Tim.  O  the  madness  that  hath  possessed  thee  and  thy  husband 
to  run  yourselves  upon  such  difficulties  !  You  have  heard,  I  am 
sure,  what  your  husband  did  meet  with,  even  in  a  manner  at  the 
first  step  that  he  took  on  his  way,  as  our  neighbour  Obstinate  can 
yet  testify,  for  he  went  along  with  him  ;  yea,  and  Pliable  too,  until 
they,  like  wise  men,  were  afraid  to  go  any  further.  We  also  heard, 
over  and  above,  how  he  met  with  the  lions,  Apollyon,  the  Shadow 
of  Death,  and  many  other  things.  Nor  is  the  danger  he  met  with 
at  Vanity  Fair  to  be  forgotten  by  thee.  For  if  he,  though  a  man, 
was  so  hard  put  to  it,  what  canst  thou,  being  but  a  poor  woman,  do  ? 

But  Christiana  said  unto  her,  Tempt  me  not,  my  neighbour. 
And  for  that  you  tell  me  of  all  these  troubles  which  I  am  like  to 
meet  with  in  the  way,  they  are  so  far  from  being  to  me  a  dis- 
couragement, that  they  show  I  am  in  the  right.  "The  bitter  must 
come  before  the  sweet,"  and  that  also  will  make  the  sweet  the 
sweeter.  Wherefore,  since  you  came  not  to  my  house  in  God's 
name,  as  I  said,  I  pray  you  to  be  gone,  and  not  to  disquiet  me 
further. 


98  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Then  Timorous  reviled  her,  and  said  to  her  fellow,  Come, 
neighbour  Mercy,  let  us  leave  her  in  her  own  hands,  since  she 
scorns  our  counsel  and  company.  But  Mercy  was  at  a  stand,  and 
could  not  so  readily  comply  with  her  neighbour.  She  said  within  herself, 
If  my  neighbour  will  needs  be  gone,  I  will  go  a  little  way  with  her, 
and  help  her;  for  what  Christiana  had  said  had  taken  some  hold 
upon  her  mind.  Wherefore  she  said  within  herself  again,  I  will  yet 
have  more  talk  with  this  Christiana  ;  and  if  I  find  truth  and  life  in 
what  she  shall  say,  I  myself,  with  my  heart,  shall  also  go  with  her. 
Wherefore  Mercy  began  thus  to  reply  to  her  neighbour  Timorous  : — 

Mer.  Neighbour,  I  did  indeed  come  with  you  to  see  Christiana 
this  morning ;  and  since  she  is,  as  you  see,  a-taking  her  last  fare- 
well of  the  country,  I  think  to  walk,  this  sunshiny  morning,  a 
little  way  with  her,  to  help  her  on  her  way.  But  she  told  her 
not  of  her  second  reason,  but  kept  it  to  herself. 

Tim.  Well,  I  see  you  have  a  mind  to  go  a-fooling  too ;  but 
take  heed  in  time,  and  be  wise.  While  we  are  out  of  danger,  we 
are  out ;  but  when  we  are  in,  we  are  in. 

So  Mrs.  Timorous  returned  to  her  house,  and  Christiana  betook 
herself  to  her  journey.  But  when  Timorous  was  got  home  to  her 
house,  she  sends  for  some  of  her  neighbours,  to  wit,  Mrs.  Bat's- 
eyes,  Mrs.  Inconsiderate,  Mrs.  Light-mind,  and  Mrs.  Know-nothing. 
So  when  they  were  come  to  her  house,  she  falls  to  telling  of  the  story 
of  Christiana,  and  of  her  intended  journey.  And  thus  she  began 
her  tale  :— 

Tim.  Neighbours,  having  had  little  to  do  this  morning,  I  went 
to  give  Christiana  a  visit ;  and  when  I  came  at  the  door,  I  knocked, 
as  you  know  it  is  our  custom.  And  she  answered,  If  you  come 
in  God's  name,  come  in.  So  in  I  went,  thinking  all  was  well ; 
but  when  I  came  in,  I  found  her  preparing  herself  to  depart  the 
town,  she  and  also  her  children.  So  I  asked  her  what  was  her 
meaning  by  that ;  and  she  told  me,  in  short,  that  she  was  now  of 
a  mind  to  go  on  pilgrimage,  as  did  her  husband.  She  told  me 
also  a  dream  that  she  had,  and  how  the  King  of  the  country 
where  her  husband  was  had  sent  her  an  inviting  letter  to  come 
thither. 

Then  said  Mrs.  Know-nothing,  And  what !  do  you  think  she 
will  go  ? 

Tim.  Ay,  go  she  will,  whatever  comes  on't ;  and  methinks  I 
know  it  by  this  :  for  that  which  was  my  great  argument  to 
persuade  her  to  stay  at  home  (to  wit,  the  troubles  she  was  like  to 
meet  with  on  the  way)  is  one  great  argument  with  her  to  put  her 
forward  on  her  journey. 

Mrs.     Bats-eyes.    O    this    blind    and    foolish     woman !     will    she 


CHRISTIANA  AND   MERCY   BECOME   PILGRIMS          99 

not  take  warning  by  her  husband's  afflictions  ?  For  my  part,  I  see, 
if  he  were  here  again,  he  would  rest  himself  content  in  a  whole 
skin,  and  never  run  so  many  hazards  for  nothing. 

Mrs.  Inconsiderate  also  replied,  saying,  Away  with  such 
fantastical  fools  from  the  town !  a  good  riddance,  for  my  part, 
I  say,  of  her.  Should  she  stay  where  she  dwells,  and  retain  this 
her  mind,  who  could  live  quietly  by  her  ?  for  she  will  either  be 
dumpish  or  unneighbourly,  or  talk  of  such  matters  as  no  wise  body 
can  abide.  Wherefore,  for  my  part,  I  shall  never  be  sorry  for  her 
departure.  Let  her  go,  and  let  better  come  in  her  room.  It  was 
never  a  good  world  since  these  whimsical  fools  dwelt  in  it. 

By  this  time  Christiana  was  got  on  her  way,  and  Mercy  went 
along  with  her.  So  as  they  went,  her  children  being  there  also, 
Christiana  began  to  discourse.  And,  Mercy,  said  Christiana,  I  take 
this  as  an  unexpected  favour,  that  thou  shouldest  set  forth  out  of 
doors  with  me  to  accompany  me  a  little  in  my  way. 

Mer.  Then  said  young  Mercy  (for  she  was  but  young),  If  I  thought 
it  would  be  to  purpose  to  go  with  you,  I  would  never  go  near  the 
town  any  more. 

Chr.  Well,  Mercy,  said  Christiana,  cast  in  thy  lot  with  me.  I 
well  know  what  will  be  the  end  of  our  pilgrimage.  My  husband 
is  where  he  would  not  but  be  for  all  the  gold  in  the  Spanish  mines. 
Nor  shalt  thou  be  rejected,  though  thou  goest  but  upon  my 
invitation.  The  King,  who  hath  sent  for  me  and  my  children,  is 
one  that  delighteth  in  mercy.  Besides,  if  thou  wilt,  I  will  hire 
thee,  and  thou  shalt  go  along  with  me  as  my  servant.  Yet  we 
Avill  have  all  things  in  common  betwixt  thee  and  me :  only  go 
along  with  me. 

Mer.  But  how  shall  I  be  assured  that  I  also  shall  be 
entertained  ?  Had  I  this  hope  but  from  one  that  can  tell,  I  would 
make  no  stick  at  all,  but  would  go,  being  helped  by  Him  that  can 
help,  though  the  way  be  never  so  tedious. 

Chr.  Well,  loving  Mercy,  I  will  tell  thee  what  thou  shalt  do : 
Go  with  me  to  the  Wicket-gate,  and  there  I  will  further  inquire 
for  thee  ;  and  if  there  thou  shalt  not  meet  with  encouragement,  I 
will  be  content  that  thou  return  to  thy  place.  I  will  also  pay 
thee  for  thy  kindness  which  thou  showest  to  me  and  my  children 
in  the  accompanying  of  us  in  our  way  as  thou  dost. 

Mer.  Then  will  I  go  thither,  and  will  take  what  shall  follow ; 
and  the  Lord  grant  that  my  lot  may  there  fall  even  as  the  King 
of  heaven  shall  have  his  heart  upon  me. 

Christiana  was  then  glad  at  her  heart,  not  only  that  she  had 
a  companion,  but  also  for  that  she  had  prevailed  with  this  poor 
maid  to  fall  in  love  with  her  own  salvation.  So  they  went  on 


100  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

together,  and  Mercy  began  to  weep.      Then  said  Christiana,  Where- 
fore weepeth  my  sister  so  ? 

Mer.  Alas  !  said  she,  who  can  but  lament,  that  shall  but 
rightly  consider  what  a  state  and  condition  my  poor  relations  are 
in,  that  yet  remain  in  our  sinful  town  ?  And  that  which  makes 
my  grief  the  more  heavy  is,  because  they  have  no  instructor,  nor 
any  to  tell  them  what  is  to  come. 

Chr.  Thou  dost  for  thy  friends  as  my  good  Christian  did  for 
me  when  he  left  me  :  he  mourned  for  that  I  would  not  heed  nor 
regard  him.  I  hope,  Mercy,  that  these  tears  of  thine  will  not  be 
lost ;  for  the  Truth  hath  said,  that  "  They  that  sow  in  tears  shall 
reap  in  joy ;  ':  and,  "  He  that  goeth  forth  and  weepeth,  bearing 
precious  seed,  shall  doubtless  come  again  with  rejoicing,  bringing 
his  sheaves  with  him." 

Now  when  Christiana  came  to  the  Slough  of  Despond,  she 
began  to  be  at  a  stand ;  for,  said  she,  this  is  the  place  in  which  my 
dear  husband  had  like  to  have  been  smothered  with  mud.  She 
perceived,  also,  that  notwithstanding  the  command  of  the  King  to 
make  this  place  for  pilgrims  good,  yet  it  was  rather  worse  than 
formerly.  Here  Christiana,  therefore,  with  her  boys,  did  make  a 
stand.  But  said  Mercy,  Come,  let  us  venture ;  only  let  us  be 
wary.  Then  they  looked  well  to  their  steps,  and  made  a  shift  to 
get  staggeringly  over. 

Yet  Christiana  had  like  to  have  been  in,  and  that  not  once  or 
twice.  Now  they  had  no  sooner  got  over,  but  they  thought  they 
heard  words  that  said  unto  them,  "  Blessed  is  she  that  believeth, 
for  there  shall  be  a  performance  of  those  things  which  were  told 
her  from  the  Lord." 

Then  they  went  on  again  ;  and  said  Mercy  to  Christiana,  Had 
I  as  good  ground  to  hope  for  a  loving  reception  at  the  Wicket- 
gate  as  you,  I  think  no  Slough  of  Despond  would  discourage  me. 

Well,  said  the  other,  you  know  your  sore,  and  I  know  mine ; 
and,  good  friend,  we  shall  all  have  enough  evil  before  we  come 
to  our  journey's  end. 

Now  methought  I  saw  Christiana,  and  Mercy,  and  the  boys, 
go  all  of  them  up  to  the  gate ;  to  which  when  they  were  come, 
they  betook  themselves  to  a  short  debate  about  how  they  must 
manage  their  calling  at  the  gate,  and  what  should  be  said  unto 
him  that  did  open  to  them.  So  it  was  concluded,  since  Christiana 
was  the  eldest,  that  she  should  knock  for  entrance,  and  that 
she  should  speak  to  him  that  did  open,  for  the  rest.  So  Chris- 
tiana began  to  knock  ;  and,  as  her  poor  husband  did,  she  knocked 
and  knocked  again.  But,  instead  of  any  that  answered,  they  all 
thought  that  they  heard  as  if  a  dog  came  barking  upon  them 


CHRISTIANA  AND   MERCY  BECOME   PILGRIMS        101 

—a  dog,  and  a  great  one  too ;  and  this  made  the  women  and 
children  afraid.  Nor  durst  they  for  a  while  to  knock  any  more, 
for  fear  the  mastiff  should  fly  upon  them.  Now,  therefore,  they 
were  greatly  tumbled  up  and  down  in  their  minds,  and  knew 
not  what  to  do  :  knock  they  durst  not,  for  fear  of  the  dog ; 
go  back  they  durst  not,  for  fear  the  Keeper  of  the  gate  should 
espy  them  as  they  so  went,  and  should  be  offended  with  them. 
At  last  they  thought  of  knocking  again,  and  knocked  more  ve- 
hemently than  they  did  at  first.  Then  said  the  Keeper  of  the 
gate,  Who  is  there  ?  So  the  dog  left  off  to  bark,  and  he  opened 
unto  them. 

Then  Christiana  made  low  obeisance,  and  said,  Let  not  our 
Lord  be  offended  with  his  handmaidens,  for  that  we  have  knocked 
at  his  princely  gate.  Then  said  the  Keeper,  Whence  come  ye  ? 
and  what  is  it  that  you  would  have  ? 

Christiana  answered,  We  are  come  from  whence  Christian 
did  come,  and  upon  the  same  errand  as  he ;  to  wit,  to  be,  if 
it  shall  please  you,  graciously  admitted,  by  this  gate,  into  the 
way  that  leads  to  the  Celestial  City.  And  I  answer,  my  Lord, 
in  the  next  place,  that  I  am  Christiana,  once  the  wife  of  Chris- 
tian, that  now  is  gotten  above. 

With  that  the  Keeper  of  the  gate  did  marvel,  saying,  What  ! 
is  she  now  become  a  pilgrim,  that  but  a  while  ago  abhorred 
that  life  ?  Then  she  bowed  her  head,  and  said,  Yes  ;  and  so 
are  these  my  sweet  babes  also. 

Then  he  took  her  by  the  hand  and  led  her  in,  and  said  also, 
"  Suffer  the  little  children  to  come  unto  me ;  "  and  with  that 
he  shut  up  the  gate.  This  done,  he  called  to  a  trumpeter  that 
was  above,  over  the  gate,  to  entertain  Christiana  with  shouting 
and  sound  of  trumpet  for  joy.  So  he  obeyed,  and  sounded,  and 
filled  the  air  with  his  melodious  notes. 

Now  all  this  while  poor  Mercy  did  stand  without,  trembling 
and  crying,  for  fear  that  she  was  rejected.  But  when  Christiana 
had  got  admittance  for  herself  and  for  her  boys,  then  she  began 
to  make  intercession  for  Mercy. 

And  she  said,  My  Lord,  I  have  a  companion  of  mine  that 
stands  yet  without,  that  is  come  hither  upon  the  same  account 
as  myself — one  that  is  much  dejected  in  her  mind,  for  that  she 
comes,  as  she  thinks,  without  sending  for ;  whereas  I  was  sent 
for  by  my  husband's  King  to  come. 

Now  Mercy  began  to  be  very  impatient,  and  each  minute  was 
as  long  to  her  as  an  hour ;  wherefore  she  prevented  Christiana 
from  a  fuller  interceding  for  her,  by  knocking  at  the  gate  herself. 
And  she  knocked  then  so  loud  that  she  made  Christiana  start. 


102  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Then  said  the  Keeper  of  the  gate,  Who  is  there  ?  And  Chris- 
tiana said,  It  is  my  friend. 

So  he  opened  the  gate,  and  looked  out ;  but  Mercy  was 
fallen  down  without  in  a  swoon,  for  she  fainted,  and  was  afraid 
that  no  gate  should  be  opened  to  her. 

Then  he    took  her  by  the  hand,   and  said,  Damsel,   I  bid  thee 

arise. 

O  sir,  said  she,  I  am  faint ;  there  is  scarce  life  left  in  me. 
But  he  answered,  Fear  not,  but  stand  upon  thy  feet,  and  tell 
me  wherefore  thou  art  come. 

Mer.  I  am  come  for  that  unto  which  I  was  never  invited, 
as  my  friend  Christiana  was.  Hers  was  from  the  King,  and  mine 
was  but  from  her.  Wherefore  I  fear  I  presume. 

Keep.    Did  she  desire  thee  to  come  with  her  to  this  place  ? 

Mer.  Yes ;  and  as  my  Lord  sees,  I  am  come ;  and  if  there 
is  any  grace  and  forgiveness  of  sins  to  spare,  I  beseech  that  thy 
poor  handmaid  may  be  a  partaker  thereof. 

Then  he  took  her  again  by  the  hand,  and  led  her  gently  in, 
and  said,  I  pray  for  all  them  that  believe  on  me,  by  what  means 
soever  they  come  unto  me.  Then  said  he  to  those  that  stood  by, 
Fetch  something,  and  give  it  Mercy  to  smell  on,  thereby  to  stay 
her  faintings.  So  they  fetched  her  a  bundle  of  myrrh,  and  a 
while  after  she  was  revived. 


CHAPTER   II 

THE  INTERPRETER'S  HOUSE 

AND  now  were  Christiana  and  her  boys,  and  Mercy,  re- 
ceived of  the  Lord  at  the  head  of  the  way,  and  spoke 
kindly  unto  by  him.  Then  said  they  yet  further  unto  him, 
We  are  sorry  for  our  sins,  and  beg  of  our  Lord  his  pardon,  and 
further  information  what  we  must  do. 

Now  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  he  spake  many  good  words 
unto  them,  whereby  they  were  greatly  gladdened.  He  also  had 
them  up  to  the  top  of  the  gate,  and  showed  them  by  what  deed 
they  were  saved ;  and  told  them  withal,  that  that  sight  they 
would  have  again,  as  they  went  along  the  way,  to  their  comfort. 

So  he  left  them  a  while  in  the  summer  parlour  below,  where 
they  entered  into  a  talk  by  themselves ;  and  thus  Christiana 
began  :  O  Lord,  how  glad  am  I  that  we  are  got  in  hither ! 

Mer.  So  you  well  may ;  but  I  of  all  have  cause  to  leap 
for  joy. 

Chr.  I  thought  one  time,  as  I  stood  at  the  gate  (because  I 
had  knocked,  and  none  did  answer),  that  all  our  labour  had 
been  lost,  especially  when  that  ugly  cur  made  such  a  heavy 
barking  against  us. 

Mer.  But  my  worst  fear  was  after  I  saw  that  you  was  taken 
into  his  favour,  and  that  I  was  left  behind.  Now,  thought  I, 
it  is  fulfilled  which  is  written,  "  Two  women  shall  be  grinding 
at  the  mill ;  the  one  shall  be  taken,  and  the  other  left."  I  had 
much  ado  to  forbear  crying  out,  Undone !  And  afraid  I  was 
to  knock  any  more ;  but  when  I  looked  up  to  what  was  written 
over  the  gate,  I  took  courage.  I  also  thought  that  I  must  either 
knock  again  or  die  :  so  I  knocked,  but  I  cannot  tell  how ;  for 
my  spirit  now  struggled  between  life  and  death. 

Chr.  Can  you  not  tell  how  you  knocked  ?  I  am  sure  your 
knocks  were  so  earnest  that  the  very  sound  of  them  made  me 
start.  I  thought  I  never  heard  such  knocking  in  all  my  life ; 
I  thought  you  would  come  in  by  a  violent  hand,  or  take  the 
kingdom  by  storm. 

103 


104  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Mer.  Alas !  to  be  in  my  case,  who  that  so  was  could  but 
have  done  so  ?  You  saw  that  the  door  was  shut  upon  me,  and 
that  there  was  a  most  cruel  dog  thereabout.  Who,  I  say,  that 
was  so  faint-hearted  as  I,  would  not  have  knocked  with  all  their 
might  ?  But,  pray,  what  said  my  Lord  to  my  rudeness  ?  Was 
he  not  angry  with  me  ? 

Chr.  When  he  heard  your  lumbering  noise,  he  gave  a  won- 
derful, innocent  smile  :  I  believe  what  you  did  pleased  him  well, 
for  he  showed  no  sign  to  the  contrary.  But  I  marvel  in  my 
heart  why  he  keeps  such  a  dog :  had  I  known  that  before,  I 
should  not  have  had  heart  enough  to  have  ventured  myself  in 
this  manner.  But  now  we  are  in,  we  are  in,  and  I  am  glad 
with  all  my  heart. 

Mer.  I  will  ask,  if  you  please,  next  time  he  comes  down, 
why  he  keeps  such  a  filthy  cur  in  his  yard ;  I  hope  he  will  not 
take  it  amiss. 

Do  so,  said  the  children,  and  persuade  him  to  hang  him  ; 
for  we  are  afraid  he  will  bite  us  when  we  go  hence. 

So  at  last  he  came  down  to  them  again,  and  Mercy  said, 
"  Righteous  art  thou,  O  Lord,  when  I  plead  with  thee ;  yet  let 
me  talk  with  thee  of  thy  judgments  :  "  wherefore  dost  thou  keep 
so  cruel  a  dog  in  thy  yard,  at  the  sight  of  which  such  women  and 
children  as  we  are  ready  to  fly  from  the  gate  for  fear  ? 

He  answered  and  said,  That  dog  has  another  owner ;  he  also 
is  kept  close  in  another  man's  ground,  only  my  pilgrims  hear  his 
barking :  he  belongs  to  the  castle  which  you  see  there  at  a 
distance,  but  can  come  up  to  the  walls  of  this  place.  He  has 
frighted  many  an  honest  pilgrim  from  worse  to  better,  by  the 
great  voice  of  his  roaring.  Indeed,  he  that  owneth  him  doth 
not  keep  him  out  of  any  good-will  to  me  or  mine,  but  with  intent 
to  keep  the  pilgrims  from  coming  to  me,  and  that  they  may  be  afraid 
to  come  and  knock  at  this  gate  for  entrance.  Sometimes  also 
he  has  broken  out,  and  has  worried  some  that  I  loved ;  but  I 
take  all  at  present  patiently.  I  also  give  my  pilgrims  timely  help, 
so  that  they  are  not  delivered  to  his  power,  to  do  with  them 
what  his  doggish  nature  would  prompt  him  to.  But  what, 
my  purchased  one !  I  trow,  hadst  thou  known  never  so  much 
beforehand,  thou  wouldst  not  have  been  afraid  of  a  dog.  The 
beggars  that  go  from  door  to  door  will,  rather  than  lose  a  supposed 
alms,  run  the  hazard  of  the  bawling,  barking,  and  biting  too,  of  a 
dog  ;  and  shall  a  dog,  a  dog  in  another  man's  yard,  a  dog  whose 
barking  I  turn  to  the  profit  of  pilgrims,  keep  any  one  from  coming 
to  me  ? 

Mer.     Then    said    Mercy,    I    confess    my    ignorance :     I    spake 


THE   INTERPRETER'S   HOUSE  105 

what  I  understood  not :    I  acknowledge  that  thou    dost    all    things 
well. 

Chr.  Then  Christiana  began  to  talk  of  their  journey,  and 
to  inquire  after  the  way.  So  he  fed  them,  and  washed  their 
feet,  and  set  them  in  the  way  of  his  steps,  according  as  he  had 
dealt  with  her  husband  before. 

So  I  saw  in  my  dream  that  they  walked  on  their  way,  and 
had  the  weather  very  comfortable  to  them. 

Now  there  was,  on  the  other  side  of  the  wall  that  fenced  in 
the  way  up  which  Christiana  and  her  companions  were  to  go, 
a  garden,  and  that  garden  belonged  to  him  whose  was  that  bark- 
ing dog  of  whom  mention  was  made  before.  And  some  of  the 
fruit-trees  that  grew  in  that  garden  shot  their  branches  over  the 
wall ;  and  being  mellow,  they  that  found  them  did  gather  them 
up,  and  eat  of  them  to  their  hurt.  So  Christiana's  boys  (as  boys 
are  apt  to  do),  being  pleased  with  the  trees,  and  with  the  fruit 
that  hung  thereon,  did  pluck  them,  and  began  to  eat.  Their 
mother  did  also  chide  them  for  so  doing,  but  still  the  boys  went 
on. 

Well,  said  she,  my  sons,  you  transgress,  for  that  fruit  is 
none  of  ours.  But  she  did  not  know  that  it  belonged  to  the 
enemy;  I'll  warrant  you,  if  she  had,  she  would  have  been  ready 
to  die  for  fear.  But  that  passed,  and  they  went  on  their  way. 
Now  by  that  they  were  gone  about  two  bowshots  from  the  place 
that  led  them  into  the  way,  they  espied  two  very  ill-favoured 
ones  coming  down  apace  to  meet  them.  With  that,  Christiana, 
and  Mercy  her  friend,  covered  themselves  with  their  veils,  and 
so  kept  on  their  journey ;  the  children  also  went  on  before  : 
so  at  last  they  met  together.  Then  they  that  came  down 
to  meet  them  came  just  up  to  the  women,  as  if  they  would 
embrace  them ;  but  Christiana  said,  Stand  back,  or  go  peaceably 
as  you  should.  Yet  these  two,  as  men  that  are  deaf,  regarded 
not  Christiana's  words,  but  began  to  lay  hands  upon  them. 
At  that  Christiana,  waxing  very  wroth,  spurned  at  them  with 
her  feet.  Mercy  also,  as  well  as  she  could,  did  what  she  could 
to  shift  them.  Christiana  again  said  to  them,  Stand  back  and 
be  gone,  for  we  have  no  money  to  lose,  being  pilgrims,  as  you 
see,  and  such,  too,  as  live  upon  the  charity  of  our  friends. 

Then  said  one  of  the  two  men,  We  make  no  assault  upon 
you  for  money,  but  are  come  out  to  tell  you,  that  if  you  will 
but  grant  one  small  request  which  we  shall  ask,  we  will  make 
women  of  you  for  ever. 

Now  Christiana,  imagining  what  they  should  mean,  made 
answer  again,  We  will  neither  hear,  nor  regard,  nor  yield  to  what 


106  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

you  shall  ask.  We  are  in  haste,  and  cannot  stay ;  our  business 
is  a  business  of  life  and  death.  So  again  she  and  her  companion 
made  a  fresh  essay  to  go  past  them ;  but  they  letted  them  in 
their  way. 

And  they  said,  We  intend  no  hurt  to  your  lives  :  'tis  another 
thing  we  would  have. 

Ay,  quoth  Christiana,  you  would  have  us  body  and  soul, 
for  I  know  'tis  for  that  you  are  come ;  but  we  will  die  rather 
upon  the  spot,  than  to  suffer  ourselves  to  be  brought  into  such 
snares  as  shall  hazard  our  wellbeing  hereafter.  And  with  that 
they  both  shrieked  out,  and  cried,  Murder !  murder !  But  the 
men  still  made  their  approach  upon  them,  with  design  to  prevail 
against  them.  They  therefore  cried  out  again. 

Now  they  being,  as  I  said,  not  far  from  the  gate  in  at  which 
they  came,  their  voice  was  heard  from  whence  they  were,  thither  ; 
wherefore  some  of  the  house  came  out,  and  knowing  that  it  was 
Christiana's  tongue,  they  made  haste  to  her  relief.  But  by  that 
they  were  got  within  sight  of  them,  the  women  were  in  a  very 
great  scuffle ;  the  children  also  stood  crying  by.  Then  did  he 
that  came  in  for  their  relief  call  out  to  the  ruffians,  saying, 
What  is  that  thing  you  do  ?  Would  you  make  my  Lord's  people 
to  transgress  ?  He  also  attempted  to  take  them ;  but  they  did 
make  their  escape  over  the  wall  into  the  garden  of  the  man 
to  whom  the  great  dog  belonged,  so  the  dog  became  their  pro- 
tector. This  Reliever  then  came  up  to  the  women,  and  asked 
them  how  they  did.  So  they  answered,  We  thank  thy  Prince, 
pretty  well,  only  we  have  been  somewhat  affrighted ;  we  thank 
thee  also  for  that  thou  earnest  in  to  our  help,  otherwise  we  had 
been  overcome. 

Reliever.  So  after  a  few  more  words,  this  Reliever  said  as 
followeth :  I  marvelled  much  when  you  were  entertained  at  the 
gate  above,  seeing  ye  knew  that  ye  were  but  weak  women,  that 
you  petitioned  not  the  Lord  for  a  conductor ;  then  might  you 
have  avoided  these  troubles  and  dangers ;  for  he  would  have 
granted  you  one. 

Chr.  Alas  !  said  Christiana,  we  were  so  taken  with  our  present 
blessing,  that  dangers  to  come  were  forgotten  by  us  :  besides,  who 
could  have  thought  that  so  near  the  King's  palace  there  could 
have  lurked  such  naughty  ones  ?  Indeed,  it  had  been  well  for  us 
had  we  asked  our  Lord  for  a  protector ;  but  since  our  Lord  knew 
it  would  be  for  our  profit,  I  wonder  he  sent  not  one  along  with  us. 
ReL  It  is  not  always  necessary  to  grant  things  not  asked  for, 
lest  by  so  doing  they  become  of  little  esteem.  Had  my  Lord 
granted  you  a  conductor,  you  would  not  so  have  bewailed  that 


THE   INTERPRETER'S   HOUSE  107 

oversight  of  yours,  in  not  asking  for  one,  as  now  you  have  occasion 
to  do.  So  all  things  work  for  good,  and  tend  to  make  you  more 
wary. 

Chr.  Shall  we  go  back  again  to  my  Lord,  and  confess  our 
folly,  and  ask  one  ? 

Rel.  To  go  back  again  you  need  not,  for  in  all  places  where  you 
shall  come  you  shall  find  no  want  at  all  ;  for  in  every  one  of  my  Lord's 
lodgings,  which  he  has  prepared  for  the  reception  of  his  pilgrims, 
there  is  sufficient  to  furnish  them  against  all  attempts  whatsoever. 
But,  as  I  said,  "  he  will  be  inquired  of  by  them,  to  do  it  for 
them."  And  'tis  a  poor  thing  that  is  not  worth  asking  for. 

When  he  had  thus  said,  he  went  back  to  his  place,  and  the 
pilgrims  went  on  their  way. 

Mer.  Then  said  Mercy,  What  a  sudden  blank  is  here!  I  made 
account  we  had  been  past  all  danger,  and  that  we  should  never 
see  sorrow  more. 

Chr.  Thy  innocence,  my  sister,  said  Christiana  to  Mercy,  may 
excuse  thee  much  ;  but  as  for  me,  my  fault  is  so  much  the  greater, 
for  that  I  saw  the  danger  before  I  came  out  of  the  doors,  and  yet 
did  not  provide  for  it  when  provision  might  have  been  had.  I 
am  much  to  be  blamed. 

Mer.  Then  said  Mercy,  How  knew  you  this  before  you  came 
from  home  ?  Pray  open  to  me  this  riddle. 

Chr.  Why,  I  will  tell  you.  Before  I  set  foot  out  of  doors, 
one  night,  as  I  lay  in  my  bed,  I  had  a  dream  about  this :  for 
methought  I  saw  two  men,  as  like  these  as  ever  any  in  the  world 
could  look,  stand  at  my  bed's  feet,  plotting  how  they  might  pre- 
vent my  salvation.  I  will  tell  you  their  very  words  :  they  said 
('twas  when  I  was  in  my  troubles),  What  shall  we  do  with  this 
woman  ?  for  she  cries  out,  waking  and  sleeping,  for  forgiveness. 
If  she  be  suffered  to  go  on  as  she  begins,  we  shall  lose  her,  as  we 
have  lost  her  husband.  This,  you  know,  might  have  made  me 
take  heed,  and  have  provided  when  provision  might  have  been  had. 

Thus,  now  when  they  had  talked  away  a  little  more  time, 
they  drew  near  to  a  house  which  stood  in  the  way,  which  house 
was  built  for  the  relief  of  pilgrims.  So  they  drew  on  towards  the 
house  of  the  Interpreter  ;  and  when  they  came  to  the  door,  they 
heard  a  great  talk  in  the  house.  Then  they  gave  ear,  and  heard, 
as  they  thought,  Christiana  mentioned  by  name  ;  for  you  must  know 
that  there  went  along,  even  before  her,  a  talk  of  her  and  her  children's 
going  on  pilgrimage.  And  this  was  the  more  pleasing  to  them,  because 
they  had  heard  that  she  was  Christian's  wife,  that  woman  who  was, 
some  time  ago,  so  unwilling  to  hear  of  going  on  pilgrimage.  Thus, 
therefore,  they  stood  still,  and  heard  the  good  people  within 


108  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

commending  her,  who  they  little  thought  stood  at  the  door.  At 
last  Christiana  knocked,  as  she  had  done  at  the  gate  before.  Now, 
when  she  had  knocked,  there  came  to  the  door  a  young  damsel, 
and  opened  the  door,  and  looked,  and,  behold,  two  women  were 
there. 

Dam.  Then  said  the  damsel  to  them,  With  whom  would  you 
speak  in  this  place  ? 

Chr.  Christiana  answered,  We  understand  that  this  is  a 
privileged  place  for  those  that  are  become  pilgrims,  and  we  now 
at  this  door  are  such ;  wherefore  we  pray  that  we  may  be  par- 
takers of  that  for  which  we  at  this  time  are  come  ;  for  the  day, 
as  thou  seest,  is  very  far  spent,  and  we  are  loath  to-night  to  go 
any  further. 

Dam.  Pray,  what  may  I  call  your  name,  that  I  may  tell  it 
to  my  Lord  within  ? 

Chr.  My  name  is  Christiana :  I  was  the  wife  of  that  pilgrim 
that  some  years  ago  did  travel  this  way  ;  and  these  be  his  four 
children.  This  maiden  also  is  my  companion,  and  is  going  on 
pilgrimage  too. 

Then  Innocent  ran  in  (for  that  was  her  name),  and  said  to 
those  within,  Can  you  think  who  is  at  the  door  ?  There  is 
Christiana,  and  her  children,  and  her  companion,  all  waiting  for 
entertainment  here  !  Then  they  leaped  for  joy,  and  went  and  told 
their  Master.  So  he  came  to  the  door,  and,  looking  upon  her,  he 
said,  Art  thou  that  Christiana  whom  Christian  the  good  man  left 
behind  him,  when  he  betook  himself  to  a  pilgrim's  life  ? 

Chr.  I  am  that  woman  that  was  so  hard-hearted  as  to  slight 
my  husband's  troubles,  and  that  left  him  to  go  on  his  journey 
alone  ;  and  these  are  his  four  children  :  but  now  I  also  am  come, 
for  I  am  convinced  that  no  way  is  right  but  this. 

Inter.  But  why  standest  thou  thus  at  the  door  ?  Come  in,  thou 
daughter  of  Abraham.  We  were  talking  of  thee  but  now,  for 
tidings  have  come  to  us  before,  how  thou  art  become  a  pilgrim. 
Come,  children,  come  in ;  come,  maiden,  come  in !  So  he  had  them 
all  into  the  house. 

So  when  they  were  within,  they  were  bidden  to  sit  down  and 
rest  them ;  the  which  when  they  had  done,  those  that  attended 
upon  the  pilgrims  in  the  house  came  into  the  room  to  see  them. 
And  one  smiled,  and  another  smiled,  and  they  all  smiled,  for  joy 
that  Christiana  was  become  a  pilgrim.  They  also  looked  upon  the 
boys  ;  they  stroked  them  over  their  faces  with  the  hand  in  token 
of  their  kind  reception  of  them.  They  also  carried  it  lovingly  to 
Mercy ;  and  bid  them  all  welcome  into  their  Master's  house. 
After  a  while,  because  supper  was  not  ready,  the  Interpreter  took 


THE   INTERPRETER'S   HOUSE 


109 


them  into  his  Significant  Rooms,  and  showed  them  what  Christiana's 
husband    had    seen    some    time    before.      Here,    therefore,   they    saw 


the  man  in  the  cage,  the  man  that  cut  his  way  through  his  enemies, 
and  the  picture  of  the  biggest  of  them  all  ;  together  with  the  rest 
of  those  things  that  were  then  so  profitable  to  Christian. 


110  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

This  done,  and  after  those  things  had  been  somewhat  digested 
by  Christiana  and  her  company,  the  Interpreter  takes  them  apart 
again,  and  has  them  first  into  a  room  where  was  a  man  that  could 
look  no  way  but  downwards,  with  a  muck-rake  in  his  hand. 
There  stood  also  one  over  his  head  with  a  celestial  crown  in  his 
hand,  and  proffered  him  that  crown  for  his  muck-rake ;  but  the 
man  did  neither  look  up  nor  regard,  but  raked  to  himself  the  straws, 
the  small  sticks,  and  the  dust  of  the  floor. 

Then  said  Christiana,  I  persuade  myself  that  I  know  somewhat 
the  meaning  of  this  ;  for  this  is  the  figure  of  a  man  of  this  world  : 
is  it  not,  good  sir  ? 

Inter.  Thou  hast  said  right,  said  he,  and  his  muck-rake  doth 
show  his  carnal  mind.  And  whereas  thou  seest  him  rather  give 
heed  to  rake  up  straws  and  sticks,  and  the  dust  of  the  floor,  than 
to  do  what  He  says  that  calls  to  him  from  above  with  the  celestial 
crown  in  his  hand ;  it  is  to  show  that  heaven  is  but  as  a  fable  to 
some,  and  that  things  here  are  counted  the  only  things  substantial. 
Now,  whereas  it  was  also  showed  thee  that  the  man  could  look  no 
way  but  downwards,  it  is  to  let  thee  know  that  earthly  things, 
when  they  are  with  power  upon  men's  minds,  quite  carry  their 
hearts  away  from  God. 

Chr.    Then  said  Christiana,  O   deliver  me  from  this  muck-rake  ! 

Inter.  That  prayer,  said  the  Interpreter,  has  lain  by  till  it  is 
almost  rusty  :  "  Give  me  not  riches,"  is  scarce  the  prayer  of  one 
of  ten  thousand.  Straws,  and  sticks,  and  dust,  with  most,  are 
the  great  things  now  looked  after. 

With  that  Christiana  and  Mercy  wept,  and  said,  It  is,  alas  ! 
too  true. 

When  the  Interpreter  had  showed  them  this,  he  had  them  into 
the  very  best  room  in  the  house  (a  very  brave  room  it  was)  : 
so  he  bid  them  look  round  about,  and  see  if  they  could  find 
anything  profitable  there.  Then  they  looked  round  and  round,  for 
there  was  nothing  to  be  seen  but  a  very  great  spider  on  the  wall, 
and  that  they  overlooked. 

Mer.  Then  said  Mercy,  Sir,  I  see  nothing ;  but  Christiana  held 
her  peace. 

Inter.  But,  said  the  Interpreter,  look  again.  She  therefore 
looked  again,  and  said,  Here  is  not  anything  but  an  ugly  spider, 
who  hangs  by  her  hands  upon  the  wall.  Then  said  he,  Is  there 
but  one  spider  in  all  this  spacious  room  ?  Then  the  water  stood 
in  Christiana's  eyes,  for  she  was  a  woman  quick  of  apprehension ; 
and  she  said,  Yea,  Lord,  there  are  more  here  than  one  ;  yea,  and 
spiders  whose  venom  is  far  more  destructive  than  that  which  is  in 
her.  The  Interpreter  then  looked  pleasantly  on  her,  and  said, 


THE   INTERPRETER'S   HOUSE  111 

Thou  hast  said  the  truth.  This  made  Mercy  to  blush,  and  the 
boys  to  cover  their  faces  ;  for  they  all  began  now  to  understand 
the  riddle. 

Then  said  the  Interpreter  again,  "  The  spider  taketh  hold  with 
her  hands  "  (as  you  see),  "  and  is  in  king's  palaces."  And  where- 
fore is  this  recorded,  but  to  show  you  that  how  full  of  the  venom 
of  sin  soever  you  be,  yet  you  may,  by  the  hand  of  faith,  lay  hold 
of  and  dwell  in  the  best  room  that  belongs  to  the  King's  house 
above. 

Chr.  I  thought,  said  Christiana,  of  something  of  this,  but  I 
could  not  imagine  it  all.  I  thought  that  we  were  like  spiders,  and 
that  we  looked  like  ugly  creatures,  in  what  fine  rooms  soever  we 
were  ;  but  that  by  this  spider,  we  were  to  learn  how  to  act  faith, 
that  came  not  into  my  thoughts  :  and  yet  she  has  taken  hold 
with  her  hands,  and,  as  I  see,  dwelleth  in  the  best  room  in  the 
house.  God  has  made  nothing  in  vain. 

Then  they  seemed  all  to  be  glad ;  but  the  water  stood  in  their 
eyes  ;  yet  they  looked  one  upon  another,  and  also  bowed  before 
the  Interpreter. 

He  had  them  then  into  another  room,  where  were  a  hen  and 
chickens,  and  bid  them  observe  awhile.  So  one  of  the  chickens 
went  to  the  trough  to  drink,  and  every  time  she  drank  she  lifted 
up  her  head  and  her  eyes  towards  heaven.  See,  said  he,  what  this 
little  chick  doth,  and  learn  of  her  to  acknowledge  whence  your 
mercies  come,  by  receiving  them  with  looking  up. 

After  this  he  led  them  into  his  garden,  where  was  great  variety 
of  flowers ;  and  he  said,  Do  you  see  all  these  ?  So  Christiana 
said,  Yes.  Then  said  he  again,  Behold,  the  flowers  are  diverse 
in  stature,  in  quality,  and  colour,  and  smell,  and  virtue  ;  and  some 
are  better  than  others  ;  also,  where  the  gardener  hath  set  them, 
there  they  stand,  and  quarrel  not  with  one  another. 

Again,  he  had  them  into  his  field,  which  he  had  sown  with 
wheat  and  corn  ;  but  when  they  beheld,  the  tops  of  all  were  cut 
off,  and  only  the  straw  remained.  He  said  again,  This  ground 'was 
dunged,  and  ploughed,  and  sowed  ;  but  what  shall  we  do  with  the 
crop  ?  Then  said  Christiana,  Burn  some,  and  make  muck  of  the 
rest.  Then  said  the  Interpreter  again,  Fruit,  you  see,  is  that 
thing  you  look  for,  and  for  want  of  that  you  condemn  it  to  the 
fire,  and  to  be  trodden  under  foot  of  men  :  beware  that  in  this 
you  condemn  not  yourselves. 

Then,  as  they  were  coming  in  from  abroad,  they  espied  a 
little  robin  with  a  great  spider  in  his  mouth  :  so  the  Interpreter 
said,  Look  here.  So  they  looked,  and  Mercy  wondered ;  but 
Christiana  said,  What  a  disparagement  is  it  to  such  a  pretty  little 


112  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

bird  as  the  robin-redbreast  is,  he  being  also  a  bird  above  many, 
that  loveth  to  maintain  a  kind  of  sociableness  with  men  !  I  had 
thought  they  had  lived  upon  crumbs  of  bread,  or  upon  other  such 
harmless  matter  :  I  like  him  worse  than  I  did. 

The  Interpreter  then  replied,  This  robin  is  an  emblem,  very 
apt  to  set  forth  some  professors  by  ;  for  to  sight  they  are,  as  this 
robin,  pretty  of  note,  colour,  and  carriage.  But  when  they  are 
by  themselves,  as  the  robin,  they  can  catch  and  gobble  up  spiders, 
they  can  change  their  diet,  drink  iniquity,  and  swallow  down  sin 
like  water. 

Now  supper  was  ready,  the  table  spread,  and  all  things  set  on 
the  board ;  so  they  sat  down  and  did  eat,  when  one  had  given 
thanks.  And  the  Interpreter  did  usually  entertain  those  that  lodged 
with  him  with  music  at  meals  ;  so  the  minstrels  played.  There  was 
also  one  that  did  sing,  and  a  very  fine  voice  he  had. 

When  the  song  and  music  was  ended,  the  Interpreter  asked 
Christiana  what  it  was  that  at  first  did  move  her  to  betake  herself 
to  a  pilgrim's  life.  Christiana  answered,  First,  the  loss  of  my 
husband  came  into  my  mind,  at  which  I  was  heartily  grieved  ;  but 
all  that  was  but  natural  affection.  Then,  after  that,  came  the 
troubles  and  pilgrimage  of  my  husband  into  my  mind,  and  also 
how  like  a  churl  I  had  carried  it  to  him  as  to  that.  So  guilt 
took  hold  of  my  mind,  and  would  have  drawn  me  into  the  pond, 
but  that  opportunely  I  had  a  dream  of  the  well-being  of  my  husband, 
and  a  letter  sent  me  by  the  King  of  that  country  where  my  hus- 
band dwells,  to  come  to  him.  The  dream  and  the  letter  together 
so  wrought  upon  my  mind,  that  they  forced  me  to  this  way. 

Then  said  the  Interpreter,  Thy  beginning  is  good,  thy  latter 
end  shall  greatly  increase.  So  he  addressed  himself  to  Mercy, 
and  said  unto  her,  And  what  moved  thee  to  come  hither,  sweet- 
heart ? 

Mer.  Why,  when  our  friend  here  was  packing  up  to  be  gone 
from  our  town,  I  and  another  went  accidentally  to  see  her.  So 
we  knocked  at  the  door  and  went  in.  When  we  were  within, 
and  seeing  what  she  was  doing,  we  asked  her  what  was  her 
meaning.  She  said  she  was  sent  for  to  go  to  her  husband  ;  and 
then  she  up  and  told  us  how  she  had  seen  him  in  a  dream, 
dwelling  in  a  curious  place  among  immortals,  wearing  a  crown, 
and  playing  upon  a  harp.  And  I  said  in  my  heart,  If 
this  be  true,  I  will  leave  my  father  and  my  mother,  and  the 
land  of  my  nativity,  and  will,  if  I  may,  go  along  with  Christiana. 

So  I  asked  her  further  of  the  truth  of  these  things,  and 
if  she  would  let  me  go  with  her  :  for  I  saw  now  that  there  was  no 
dwelling,  but  with  the  danger  of  ruin,  any  longer  in  our  town. 


THE  INTERPRETER'S   HOUSE  113 

But  yet  I  came  away  with  a  heavy  heart ;  not  for  that  I  was 
unwilling  to  come  away,  but  for  that  so  many  of  my  relations 
were  left  behind.  And  I  am  come  with  all  the  desire  of  my  heart, 
and  will  go,  if  I  may,  with  Christiana  unto  her  husband  and 
his  King. 

Inter.  Thy  setting  out  is  good,  for  thou  hast  given  credit 
to  the  truth ;  thou  art  a  Ruth,  who  did,  for  the  love  she  bare 
to  Naomi,  and  to  the  Lord  her  God,  leave  father  and  mother, 
and  the  land  of  her  nativity,  to  come  out  and  go  with  a  people 
that  she  knew  not  heretofore. 

Now  supper  was  ended,  and  preparation  was  made  for  bed : 
the  women  were  laid  singly  alone,  and  the  boys  by  themselves. 
Now  when  Mercy  was  in  bed,  she  could  not  sleep  for  joy,  for 
that  now  her  doubts  of  missing  at  last  were  removed  farther 
from  her  than  ever  they  were  before.  So  she  lay  blessing  and 
praising  God,  who  had  had  such  favour  for  her. 

In  the  morning  they  arose  with  the  sun,  and  prepared  them- 
selves for  their  departure.  But  the  Interpreter  would  have  them 
tarry  awhile ;  For,  said  he,  you  must  orderly  go  from  hence. 
Then  said  he  to  the  damsel  that  first  opened  to  them,  Take 
them  and  have  them  into  the  garden  to  the  bath  and  there  wash 
them,  and  make  them  clean  from  the  soil  which  they  have  gath- 
ered by  travelling.  Then  Innocent  the  damsel  took  them,  and 
led  them  into  the  garden,  and  brought  them  to  the  bath ;  so 
she  told  them  that  there  they  must  wash  and  be  clean,  for  so 
her  Master  would  have  the  women  to  do  that  called  at  his  house 
as  they  were  going  on  pilgrimage.  Then  they  went  in  and  washed, 
yea,  they  and  the  boys  and  all ;  and  they  came  out  of  the  bath, 
not  only  sweet  and  clean,  but  also  much  enlivened  and  strengthened 
in  their  joints.  So  when  they  came  in,  they  looked  fairer  a  deal 
than  when  they  went  out  to  the  washing. 

When  they  were  returned  out  of  the  garden  from  the  bath, 
the  Interpreter  took  them,  and  looked  upon  them,  and  said  unto 
them,  "  Fair  as  the  moon."  Then  he  called  for  the  seal,  where- 
with they  used  to  be  sealed  that  were  washed  in  this  bath. 
So  the  seal  was  brought,  and  he  set  his  mark  upon  them,  that 
they  might  be  known  in  the  places  whither  they  were  yet  to  go. 

Then  said  the  Interpreter  again  to  the  damsel  that  waited 
upon  these  women,  Go  into  the  vestry,  and  fetch  out  garments 
for  these  people.  So  she  went  and  fetched  out  white  raiment, 
and  laid  it  down  before  him  ;  so  he  commanded  them  to  put 
it  on  :  it  was  "  fine  linen,  white  and  clean."  When  the  women 
were  thus  adorned,  they  seemed  to  be  a  terror  one  to  the  other  ; 
for  that  they  could  not  see  that  glory  each  one  had  in  herself 

8 


114  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

which  they  could  see  in  each  other.  Now,  therefore,  they 
began  to  esteem  each  other  better  than  themselves.  For,  You 
are  fairer  than  I  am,  said  one  ;  and,  You  are  more  comely  than 
I,  said  another.  The  children  also  stood  amazed,  to  see  into 
what  fashion  they  were  brought. 

The  Interpreter  then  called  for  a  manservant  of  his,  one 
Great-heart,  and  bid  him  take  sword,  and  helmet,  and  shield. 
And  take  these  my  daughters,  said  he ;  conduct  them  to  the 
house  called  Beautiful,  at  which  place  they  will  rest  next.  So 
he  took  his  weapons  and  went  before  them ;  and  the  Inter- 
preter said,  God-speed.  Those  also  that  belonged  to  the  family 
sent  them  away  with  many  a  good  wish. 


CHAPTER  III 

MR.    GREAT-HEART 

NOW  I    saw   in    my  dream    that  they    went    on,   and    Great- 
heart   before  them.     So  they  went,   and  came  to  the  place 
where    Christian's  burden    fell  off    his  back,    and  tumbled 
into   a   sepulchre.     Here   then   they   made   a   pause ;    and   here   also 
they  blessed  God. 

Then  they  went  on  until  they  were  come  to  the  place  that 
Simple,  and  Sloth,  and  Presumption  lay  and  slept  in,  when  Chris- 
tian went  by  on  pilgrimage ;  and,  behold,  they  were  hanged  up 
in  irons  a  little  way  off  on  the  other  side. 

Mer.  Then  said  Mercy  to  him  that  was  their  guide  and  con- 
ductor, What  are  these  three  men  ?  and  for  what  are  they  hanged 
there  ? 

Great.  These  three  men  were  men  of  very  bad  qualities.  They 
had  no  mind  to  be  pilgrims  themselves,  and  whomsoever  they 
could  they  hindered.  They  were  for  sloth  and  folly  themselves, 
and  whomsoever  they  could  persuade  they  made  so  too ;  and 
withal  taught  them  to  presume  that  they  should  do  well  at  last. 
They  were  asleep  when  Christian  went  by ;  and  now  you  go  by 
they  are  hanged. 

Mer.    But  could  they   persuade  any  to  be  of  their   opinion  ? 

Great.  Yes  ;  they  turned  several  out  of  the  way.  There  was 
Slow-pace,  that  they  persuaded  to  do  as  they.  They  also  pre- 
vailed with  one  Short-wind,  with  one  No-heart,  with  one  Linger- 
after-lust,  and  with  one  Sleepy-head,  and  with  a  young  woman, 
her  name  was  Dull,  to  turn  out  of  the  way,  and  become  as  they. 
Besides,  they  brought  up  an  ill  report  of  your  Lord,  persuading 
others  that  he  was  a  hard  taskmaster.  They  also  brought  up 
an  evil  report  of  the  good  land,  saying  it  was  not  half  so  good 
as  some  pretended  it  was. 

Chr.  Nay,  said  Christiana,  if  they  were  such,  they  never  shall 
be  bewailed  by  me.  They  have  but  what  they  deserve ;  and  I 
think  it  is  well  that  they  stand  so  near  the  highway,  that  others 
may  see  and  take  warning. 

115 


116  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Thus  they  went  on  till  they  came  at  the  foot  of  the  Hill 
Difficulty,  where  again  the  good  Mr.  Great-heart  took  an  occa- 
sion to  tell  them  what  happened  there  when  Christian  himself 
went  by.  So  he  had  them  first  to  the  spring.  Lo,  said  he,  this 
is  the  spring  that  Christian  drank  of  before  he  went  up  the  hill. 

Next  he  showed  them  the  two  by-ways  that  were  at  the 
foot  of  the  hill,  where  Formality  and  Hypocrisy  lost  themselves. 
And,  said  he,  these  are  dangerous  paths  :  two  were  here  cast 
away  when  Christian  came  by.  And  although,  as  you  see,  these 
ways  are  since  stopped  up  with  chains,  posts,  and  a  ditch,  yet 
there  are  those  that  will  choose  to  adventure  here  rather  than 
take  the  pains  to  go  up  this  hill. 

Then  they  set  forward,  and  began  to  go  up  the  hill,  and 
up  the  hill  they  went ;  but  before  they  got  to  the  top,  Chris- 
tiana began  to  pant,  and  said,  I  dare  say  this  is  a  breathing 
hill ;  no  marvel  if  they  that  love  their  ease  more  than  their 
souls,  choose  to  themselves  a  smoother  way.  Then  said  Mercy, 
I  must  sit  down ;  also  the  least  of  the  children  began  to  cry. 
Come,  come,  said  Great-heart,  sit  not  down  here,  for  a  little 
above  is  the  Prince's  arbour.  Then  took  he  the  little  boy  by  the 
hand,  and  led  him  up  thereto. 

When  they  were  come  to  the  arbour,  they  were  very  willing 
to  sit  down,  for  they  were  all  in  a  pelting  heat.  Then  said 
Mercy,  How  sweet  is  rest  to  them  that  labour !  And  how  good 
is  the  Prince  of  pilgrims,  to  provide  such  resting-places  for  them  ! 
Of  this  arbour  I  have  heard  much,  but  I  never  saw  it  before. 
But  here  let  us  beware  of  sleeping ;  for,  as  I  have  heard,  that 
cost  poor  Christian  dear. 

Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart  to  the  little  ones,  Come,  my  pretty 
boys,  how  do  you  do  ?  What  think  you  now  of  going  on  pil- 
grimage ?  Sir,  said  the  least,  I  was  almost  beat  out  of  heart ; 
but  I  thank  you  for  lending  me  a  hand  in  my  need.  And  I 
remember  now  what  my  mother  hath  told  me,  namely,  that  the 
way  to  heaven  is  as  a  ladder,  and  the  way  to  hell  is  as  down 
a  hill.  But  I  had  rather  go  up  the  ladder  to  life  than  down  the 
hill  to  death. 

Then  said  Mercy,  But  the  proverb  is,  "  To  go  down  the  hill 
is  easy."  But  James  said  (for  that  was  his  name),  The  day  is 
coming  when,  in  my  opinion,  going  down  the  hill  will  be  the  hardest 
of  all.  'Tis  a  good  boy,  said  his  master ;  thou  hast  given  her 
a  right  answer.  Then  Mercy  smiled,  but  the  little  boy  did  blush. 

Come,  said  Christiana,  will  you  eat  a  bit,  a  little  to  sweeten 
your  mouths,  while  you  sit  here  to  rest  your  legs  ?  For  I  have 
here  a  piece  of  pomegranate,  which  Mr.  Interpreter  put  into  my 


MR.   GREAT-HEART  117 

hand  just  when  I  came  out  of  his  door ;  he  gave  me  also  a 
piece  of  an  honeycomb,  and  a  little  bottle  of  spirits. 

Then  she  gave  to  them,  and  they  did  eat,  both  Mercy  and 
the  boys.  And,  said  Christiana  to  Mr.  Great-heart,  Sir,  will  you 
do  as  we  ?  But  he  answered,  You  are  going  on  pilgrimage,  and 
presently  I  shall  return.  Much  good  may  what  you  have  do  to 
you  !  At  home  I  eat  the  same  every  day. 

Now  when  they  had  eaten  and  drunk,  and  had  chatted  a 
little  longer,  their  guide  said  to  them,  The  day  wears  away  ; 
if  you  think  good,  let  us  prepare  to  be  going.  So  they  got  up  to 
go,  and  the  little  boys  went  before ;  but  Christiana  forgot  to 
take  her  bottle  of  spirits  with  her,  so  she  sent  her  little  boy 
back  to  fetch  it.  Then  said  Mercy,  I  think  this  is  a  losing  place. 
Here  Christian  lost  his  roll ;  and  here  Christiana  left  her  bottle 
behind  her.  Sir,  what  is  the  cause  of  this?  So  their  guide  made 
answer,  and  said,  The  cause  is  sleep  or  forgetfulness.  Some  sleep 
when  they  should  keep  awake,  and  some  forget  when  they  should 
remember  ;  and  this  is  the  very  cause  why  often,  at  the  resting- 
places,  some  pilgrims  in  some  things  come  off  losers. 

So  they  went  on,  till  they  came  to  the  place  where  Mistrust 
and  Timorous  met  Christian  to  persuade  him  to  go  back  for  fear 
of  the  lions.  Now  Mr.  Great-heart  was  a  strong  man,  so  he  was 
not  afraid  of  a  lion  ;  but  yet,  when  they  were  come  up  to  the  place 
where  the  lions  were,  the  boys  that  went  before  were  now  glad 
to  cringe  behind,  for  they  were  afraid  of  the  lions ;  so  they 
stepped  back,  and  went  behind.  At  this  their  guide  smiled,  and 
said,  How  now,  my  boys  !  do  you  love  to  go  before  when  no 
danger  doth  approach,  and  love  to  come  behind  so  soon  as  the 
lions  appear  ? 

Now,  as  they  went  on,  Mr.  Great-heart  drew  his  sword,  with 
intent  to  make  a  way  for  the  pilgrims  in  spite  of  the  lions. 
Then  there  appeared  one  that,  it  seems,  had  taken  upon  him 
to  back  the  lions ;  and  he  said  to  the  pilgrims'  guide,  What 
is  the  cause  of  your  coming  hither  ?  Now,  the  name  of  that  man 
was  Grim,  or  Bloody-man,  because  of  his  slaying  of  pilgrims ; 
and  he  was  of  the  race  of  the  giants. 

Then  said  the  pilgrims'  guide,  These  women  and  children  are 
going  on  pilgrimage  ;  and  this  is  the  way  they  must  go  ;  and  go 
it  they  shall,  in  spite  of  thee  and  the  lions. 

Grim.  This  is  not  their  way,  neither  shall  they  go  therein.  I 
am  come  forth  to  withstand  them,  and  to  that  end  will  back 
the  lions. 

Now,  to  say  truth,  by  reason  of  the  fierceness  of  the  lions, 
and  of  the  grim  carriage  of  him  that  did  back  them,  this  way 


118  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

of  late  had  been  much  unoccupied,  and  was  almost  all  grown 
over  with  grass. 

Then  said  Christiana,  Though  the  highways  have  been  un- 
occupied heretofore,  and  though  the  travellers  have  been  made 
in  times  past  to  walk  through  by-paths,  it  must  not  be  so  now 
I  am  risen — "  now  I  am  risen  a  mother  in  Israel." 

Then  he  swore  by  the  lions  that  it  should  ;  and  therefore  bid 
them  turn  aside,  for  they  should  not  have  passage  there. 

But  Great-heart,  their  guide,  made  first  his  approach  unto 
Grim,  and  laid  so  heavily  at  him  with  his  sword  that  he  forced 
him  to  retreat. 

Then  said  he  that  attempted  to  back  the  lions,  Will  you 
slay  me  upon  my  own  ground  ? 

Great.  It  is  the  King's  highway  that  we  are  in,  and  in  this  way 
it  is  that  thou  hast  placed  the  lions  ;  but  these  women  and  these 
children,  though  weak,  shall  hold  on  their  way  in  spite  of  thy  lions. 
And  with  that  he  gave  him  again  a  downright  blow,  and  brought 
him  upon  his  knees.  With  this  blow  also  he  broke  his  helmet, 
and  with  the  next  he  cut  off  an  arm.  Then  did  the  giant  roar  so 
hideously  that  his  voice  frightened  the  women  ;  and  yet  they  were 
glad  to  see  him  lie  sprawling  upon  the  ground.  Now  the 
lions  were  chained,  and  so  of  themselves  could  do  nothing.  Where- 
fore, when  old  Grim,  that  intended  to  back  them,  was  dead,  Mr. 
Great-heart  said  to  the  pilgrims,  Come  now,  and  follow  me,  and 
no  hurt  shall  happen  to  you  from  the  lions.  They  therefore  went 
on,  but  the  women  trembled  as  they  passed  by  them  ;  the  boys 
also  looked  as  if  they  would  die ;  but  they  all  got  by  without 
further  hurt. 

Now,  when  they  were  within  sight  of  the  porter's  lodge,  they 
soon  came  up  unto  it ;  but  they  made  the  more  haste  after  this 
to  go  thither,  because  it  is  dangerous  travelling  there  in  the  night. 
So  when  they  were  come  to  the  gate,  the  guide  knocked,  and  the 
porter  cried,  Who  is  there  ?  But  as  soon  as  the  guide  had  said, 
It  is  I,  he  knew  his  voice,  and  came  down  ;  for  the  guide  had  oft 
before  that  come  thither  as  a  conductor  of  pilgrims.  When  he 
was  come  down,  he  opened  the  gate,  and  seeing  the  guide  standing 
just  before  it  (for  he  saw  not  the  women,  for  they  were  behind 
him),  he  said  unto  him,  How  now,  Mr.  Great-heart,  what  is  your 
business  here  so  late  to-night  ?  I  have  brought,  answered  he,  some 
pilgrims  hither,  where,  by  my  Lord's  commandment,  they  must 
lodge  :  I  had  been  here  some  time  ago,  had  I  not  been  opposed 
by  the  giant  that  did  use  to  back  the  lions.  But  I,  after  a  long 
and  tedious  combat  with  him,  have  cut  him  off,  and  have  brought 
the  pilgrims  hither  in  safety. 


120  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

For.    Will  you  not  go  in,  and  stay  till  morning  ? 

Great.    No  ;    I  will  return  to  my  Lord  to-night. 

Chr.  Oh,  sir,  I  know  not  how  to  be  willing  you  should  leave 
us  in  our  pilgrimage  :  you  have  been  so  faithful  and  loving  to  us, 
you  have  fought  so  stoutly  for  us,  you  have  been  so  hearty  in 
counselling  of  us,  that  I  shall  never  forget  your  favour  towards  us. 

Then  said  Mercy,  Oh  that  we  might  have  thy  company  to  our 
journey's  end  !  How  can  such  poor  women  as  we  hold  out  in  a 
way  so  full  of  troubles  as  this  way  is,  without  a  friend  and  defender  ? 

Then  said  James,  the  youngest  of  the  boys,  Pray,  sir,  be 
persuaded  to  go  with  us  and  help  us,  because  we  are  so  weak,  and 
the  way  so  dangerous  as  it  is. 

Great.  I  am  at  my  Lord's  commandment :  if  he  shall  allot  me 
to  be  your  guide  quite  through,  I  will  willingly  wait  upon  you. 
But  here  you  failed  at  first ;  for  when  he  bid  me  come  thus  far 
with  you,  then  you  should  have  begged  me  of  him  to  go  quite 
through  with  you,  and  he  would  have  granted  your  request. 
However,  at  present  I  must  withdraw ;  and  so,  good  Christiana, 
Mercy,  and  my  brave  children,  farewell. 

Then  the  porter,  Mr.  Watchful,  asked  Christiana  of  her  country 
and  of  her  kindred  ;  and  she  said,  I  come  from  the  City  of  De- 
struction ;  I  am  a  widow  woman,  and  my  husband  is  dead ;  his 
name  was  Christian  the  pilgrim. 

How  !  said  the  porter,  was  he  your  husband  ?  Yes,  said  she, 
and  these  are  his  children  ;  and  this  (pointing  to  Mercy)  is  one  of 
my  townswomen. 

Then  the  porter  rang  his  bell,  as  at  such  times  he  is  wont, 
and  there  came  to  the  door  one  of  the  damsels,  whose  name  was 
Humble-mind  ;  and  to  her  the  porter  said,  Go  tell  it  within,  that 
Christiana,  the  wife  of  Christian,  and  her  children,  are  come  hither 
on  pilgrimage.  She  went  in,  therefore,  and  told  it.  But,  oh ! 
what  noise  for  gladness  was  there  within,  when  the  damsel  did 
drop  that  out  of  her  mouth  ! 

So  they  came  with  haste  to  the  porter,  for  Christiana  stood 
still  at  the  door.  Then  some  of  the  most  grave  said  unto  her, 
Come  in,  Christiana,  come  in,  thou  wife  of  that  good  man ;  come 
in,  thou  blessed  woman,  come  in,  with  all  that  are  with  thee.  So 
she  went  in,  and  they  followed  her  that  were  her  children  and 
companions.  Now,  when  they  were  gone  in,  they  were  had  into 
a  very  large  room,  where  they  were  bidden  to  sit  down  ;  so  they 
sat  down,  and  the  chief  of  the  house  were  called  to  see  and  wel- 
come the  guests.  Then  they  came  in,  and,  understanding  who 
they  were,  did  salute  each  one  with  a  kiss,  and  said,  Welcome,  ye 
vessels  of  the  grace  of  God  ;  welcome  to  us  your  friends. 


MR.   GREAT-HEART  121 

Now,  because  it  was  somewhat  late,  and  because  the  pilgrims 
were  weary  with  their  journey,  and  also  made  faint  with  the  sight 
of  the  fight  and  of  the  terrible  lions,  therefore  they  desired,  as  soon 
as  might  be,  to  prepare  to  go  to  rest.  Nay,  said  those  of  the 
family,  refresh  yourselves  first  with  a  morsel  of  meat ;  for  they  had 
prepared  for  them  a  lamb,  with  the  accustomed  sauce  belonging 
thereto.  For  the  porter  had  heard  before  of  their  coming,  and 
had  told  it  to  them  within.  So  when  they  had  supped,  and  ended 
their  prayer  with  a  psalm,  they  desired  they  might  go  to  rest. 

But  let  us,  said  Christiana,  if  we  may  be  so  bold  as  to  choose, 
be  in  that  chamber  that  was  my  husband's  when  he  was  here. 
So  they  had  them  up  thither,  and  they  lay  all  in  a  room. 
When  they  were  at  rest,  Christiana  and  Mercy  entered  into  dis- 
course about  things  that  were  convenient. 

Chr.  Little  did  I  think  once,  when  my  husband  went  on 
pilgrimage,  that  I  should  ever  have  followed. 

Mer.  And  you  as  little  thought  of  lying  in  his  bed,  and  in  his 
chamber,  to  rest,  as  you  do  now. 

Chr.  And  much  less  did  I  ever  think  of  seeing  his  face  with 
comfort,  and  of  worshipping  the  Lord  the  King  with  him ;  and 
yet  now  I  believe  I  shall. 

Mer.    Hark  !    don't  you  hear  a  noise  ? 

Chr.  Yes ;  'tis,  I  believe,  a  noise  of  music  for  joy  that,  we 
are  here. 

Mer.  Wonderful  !  Music  in  the  house,  music  in  the  heart,  and 
music  also  in  heaven,  for  joy  that  we  are  here  ! 

Thus  they  talked  awhile,  and  then  betook  themselves  to  sleep. 
So  in  the  morning,  when  they  were  awake,  Christiana  said  to 
Mercy,  W7hat  was  the  matter,  that  you  did  laugh  in  your  sleep 
to-night  ?  I  suppose  you  was  in  a  dream. 

Mer.  So  I  was,  and  a  sweet  dream  it  was  ;  but  are  you  sure 
I  laughed  ? 

Chr.  Yes  ;  you  laughed  heartily  :  but  pr'ythee,  Mercy,  tell 
me  thy  dream. 

Mer.  I  was  dreaming  that  I  sat  all  alone  in  a  solitary  place, 
and  was  bemoaning  of  the  hardness  of  my  heart. 

W7ith  that,  methought  I  looked  up,  and  saw  one  coming  with 
wings  towards  me.  So  he  came  directly  to  me,  and  said,  Mercy, 
what  aileth  thee  ?  Now,  when  he  had  heard  me  make  my  com- 
plaint, he  said,  Peace  be  to  thee.  He  also  wiped  mine  eyes  with 
his  handkerchief,  and  clad  me  in  silver  and  gold.  Then  he  took 
me  by  the  hand,  and  said,  Mercy,  come  after  me.  So  he  went 
up,  and  I  followed,  till  we  came  at  a  golden  gate.  Then  he 
knocked  ;  and  when  they  within  had  opened,  the  man  went  in, 


122 


THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 


and  I  followed  him  up  to  a  throne,  upon  which  one  sat,  and  he 
said  to  me,  Welcome,  daughter.  The  place  looked  bright  and 
twinkling,  like  the  stars,  or  rather  like  the  sun,  and  I  thought  that 


•'V?Q    rVKJ^AM  "#<£ 
•'  *    '••'  /•''  -\!*~        I  .   '  - 

'        **        -*,          V         '  .,  j\          >-(  - 


''J&dTcUJ,  J  (aaj 

V        * 


I    saw    your   husband   there.      So   I    awoke   from   my    dream.      But 
did  I  laugh  ? 

Chr.    Laugh  !    ay,  and  well  you  might,  to  see  yourself  so  well. 


MR.   GREAT-HEART  123 

For  you  must  give  me  leave  to  tell  you,  that  I  believe  it  was  a 
good  dream  ;  and  that,  as  you  have  begun  to  find  the  first  part 
true,  so  you  shall  find  the  second  at  last.  We  need  not,  when 
a-bed,  to  lie  awake  to  talk  with  God ;  he  can  visit  us  while  we 
sleep,  and  cause  us  then  to  hear  his  voice.  Our  heart  oftentimes 
wakes  while  we  sleep ;  and  God  can  speak  to  that  as  well  as  if 
one  was  awake. 

Mer.  Well,  I  am  glad  of  my  dream,  for  I  hope  ere  long  to 
see  it  fulfilled,  to  the  making  me  laugh  again. 

Chr.  I  think  it  is  now  time  to  rise,  and  to  know  what  we 
must  do. 

Mer.  Pray,  if  they  invite  us  to  stay  awhile,  let  us  willingly 
accept  of  the  offer.  I  am  the  more  willing  to  stay  awhile  here,  to 
grow  better  acquainted  with  these  maids  :  methinks  Prudence, 
Piety,  and  Charity  have  very  comely  and  sober  countenances. 

Chr.    We  shall  see  what  they  will  do. 

So  when  they  were  up  and  ready,  they  came  down,  and  they 
asked  one  another  of  their  rest,  and  if  it  was  comfortable  or  not. 

Very  good,  said  Mercy  ;  it  was  one  of  the  best  night's  lodgings 
that  ever  I  had  in  my  life. 

Then  said  Prudence  and  Piety,  If  you  will  be  persuaded  to 
stay  here  awhile,  you  shall  have  what  the  house  will  afford. 

Ay,  and  that  with  a  very  good  will,  said  Charity. 

So  they  consented,  and  stayed  there  about  a  month  or  above, 
and  became  very  profitable  one  to  another. 


CHAPTER   IV 

PIETY,    PRUDENCE,    AND    CHARITY 

NOW  because  Prudence  would  see  how  Christiana  had  brought 
up  her  children,  she  asked  leave  of  her  to  catechise  them. 
So  she  gave  her  free  consent.  Then  she  began  with  the 
youngest,  whose  name  was  James. 

Prud.  And  she  said,  Come,  James,  canst  thou  tell  me  who 
made  thee  ? 

James.  God  the  Father,  God  the  Son,  and  God  the  Holy  Ghost. 

Prud.    Good  boy.      And  canst  thou  tell  who  saves  thee  ? 

James.  God  the  Father,  God  the  Son,  and  God  the  Holy 
Ghost. 

Prud.  Good  boy  still.  But  how  doth  God  the  Father  save 
thee  ? 

James.    By  his  grace. 

Then  said  Prudence  to  Christiana,  You  are  to  be  commended 
for  thus  bringing  up  your  children.  I  suppose  I  need  not  ask  the 
rest  these  questions,  since  the  youngest  of  them  can  answer  them 
so  well.  I  will  therefore  now  apply  myself  to  the  next  youngest. 

Prud.  Then  she  said,  Come,  Joseph  (for  his  name  was  Joseph), 
will  you  let  me  catechise  you  ? 

Jos.    With  all  my  heart. 

Prud.    What  is  man  ? 

Jos.  A  reasonable  creature,  so  made  by  God,  as  my  brother 
said. 

Prud.    What  is  God's  design  in  saving  poor  men  ? 

Jos.    The  everlasting  happiness  of  his  creature. 

Prud.    Who  are  they  that  must  be  saved  ? 

Jos.    They  that  accept  of  his  salvation. 

Prud.  Good  boy,  Joseph ;  thy  mother  hath  taught  thee  well, 
and  thou  hast  hearkened  unto  what  she  has  said  unto  thee. 

Prud.  Then  said  Prudence  to  Samuel  (who  was  the  eldest  son 
but  one),  Come,  Samuel,  are  you  willing  that  I  should  catechise 
you  ? 

Sam.    Yes,  forsooth,  if  you  please. 

124 


PIETY,   PRUDENCE,   AND   CHARITY  125 

Prud.    What  is  heaven  ? 

Sam.  A  place  and  state  most  blessed,  because  God  dwelleth 
there. 

Prud.    What  is  hell  ? 

Sam.  A  place  and  state  most  woful,  because  it  is  the  dwelling- 
place  of  sin,  the  devil,  and  death. 

Prud.    Why  wouldst  thou  go  to  heaven  ? 

Sam.  That  I  may  see  God,  and  serve  him  without  weariness  ; 
that  I  may  see  Christ,  and  love  him  everlastingly  ;  that  I  may 
have  that  fullness  of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  me  which  I  can  by  no 
means  here  enjoy. 

Prud.    A  very  good    boy    also,  and    one   that    has    learned    well. 

Then  she  addressed  herself  to  the  eldest,  whose  name  was 
Matthew ;  and  she  said  to  him,  Come,  Matthew,  shall  I  also 
catechise  you  ? 

Matt.    With  a  very  good  will. 

Prud.    What   do   you   think   of  the   Bible  ? 

Matt.    It  is  the  holy  word  of  God. 

Prud.  Is  there  nothing  written  therein  but  what  you  under- 
stand ? 

Matt.    Yes,  a  great  deal. 

Prud.  What  do  you  do  when  you  meet  with  such  places 
therein  that  you  do  not  understand  ? 

Matt.  I  think  God  is  wiser  than  I.  I  pray  also  that  he  will 
please  to  let  me  know  all  therein  that  he  knows  will  be  for  my 
good. 

Then  said  Prudence  to  the  boys,  You  must  still  hearken  to 
your  mother,  for  she  can  teach  you  more.  You  must  also  dili- 
gently give  ear  to  what  good  talk  you  shall  hear  from  others ; 
for  for  your  sakes  do  they  speak  good  things.  Observe  also, 
and  that  with  carefulness,  what  the  heavens  and  the  earth  do 
teach  you  ;  but  especially  be  much  in  the  meditation  of  that  book 
which  was  the  cause  of  your  father's  becoming  a  pilgrim. 

Now,  by  that  these  pilgrims  had  been  at  this  place  a  week, 
Mercy  had  a  visitor  that  pretended  some  good  will  unto  her, 
and  his  name  was  Mr.  Brisk ;  a  man  of  some  breeding,  and  that 
pretended  to  religion,  but  a  man  that  stuck  very  close  to  the 
world.  So  he  came  once,  or  twice,  or  more,  to  Mercy,  and  offered 
love  unto  her. 

Now  Mercy  was  of  a  fair  countenance,  and  therefore  the 
^ore  alluring.  Her  mind  also  was  to  be  always  busying  of  her- 
self in  doing ;  for  when  she  had  nothing  to  do  for  herself,  she 
would  be  making  hose  and  garments  for  others,  and  would  bestow 
them  upon  those  that  had  need.  And  Mr.  Brisk,  not  knowing 


126  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

where  or  how  she  disposed  of  what  she  made,  seemed  to  be 
greatly  taken,  for  that  he  found  her  never  idle.  I  warrant  her 
a  good  housewife,  quoth  he  to  himself. 

Mercy  then  revealed  the  business  to  the  maidens  that  were  of 
the  house,  and  inquired  of  them  concerning  him,  for  they  did 
know  him  better  than  she.  So  they  told  her  that  he  was  a  very 
busy  young  man,  and  one  that  pretended  to  religion ;  but  was, 
as  they  feared,  a  stranger  to  the  power  of  that  which  is  good. 

Nay  then,  said  Mercy,  I  will  look  no  more  on  him ;  for  I 
purpose  never  to  have  a  clog  to  my  soul. 

Prudence  then  replied,  that  there  needed  no  great  matter 
of  discouragement  to  be  given  to  him ;  for  continuing  so  as 
she  had  begun  to  do  for  the  poor,  would  quickly  cool  his  courage. 

So  the  next  time  he  comes,  he  finds  her  at  her  old  work, 
making  things  for  the  poor.  Then  said  he,  What  !  always  at  it  ? 
Yes,  said  she,  either  for  myself  or  for  others.  And  what  canst 
thou  earn  a  day  ?  said  he.  "  I  do  these  things,"  replied  she, 
;'  that  I  may  be  rich  in  good  works,  laying  a  foundation  against 
the  time  to  come,  that  I  may  lay  hold  on  eternal  life."  Why, 
pr'ythee,  what  dost  thou  do  with  them  ?  said  he.  Clothe  the 
naked,  said  she.  With  that  his  countenance  fell.  So  he  forbore 
to  come  at  her  again.  And  when  he  was  asked  the  reason  why, 
he  said  that  Mercy  was  a  pretty  lass,  but  troubled  with  ill  con- 
ditions. 

When  he  had  left  her,  Prudence  said,  Did  I  not  tell  thee 
that  Mr.  Brisk  would  soon  forsake  thee  ?  yea,  he  will  raise  up 
an  ill  report  of  thee  ;  for,  notwithstanding  his  pretence  to  religion, 
and  his  seeming  love  to  Mercy,  yet  Mercy  and  he  are  of  tempers 
so  different,  that  I  believe  they  will  never  come  together. 

Mer,  I  might  have  had  husbands  before  now,  though  I 
spoke  not  of  it  to  any ;  but  they  were  such  as  did  not  like 
my  conditions,  though  never  did  any  of  them  find  fault  with  my 
person.  So  they  and  I  could  not  agree.  If  nobody  will  have  me, 
I  will  die  a  maid,  for  I  cannot  change  my  nature ;  and  to  have 
one  that  lies  cross  to  me  in  this,  that  I  purpose  never  to  admit 
of  as  long  as  I  live.  I  had  a  sister,  named  Bountiful,  that  was 
married  to  one  of  these  churls ;  but  he  and  she  could  never 
agree  :  but  because  my  sister  was  resolved  to  do  as  she  had  begun 
—that  is,  to  show  kindness  to  the  poor — therefore  her  husband 
first  cried  her  down  at  the  cross,  and  then  turned  her  out  of  his 
doors. 

Prud.    And   yet   he   was   a   professor,    I   warrant  you  ! 

Mer.  Yes,  such  a  one  as  he  Avas,  and  of  such  as  he  the 
world  is  now  full ;  but  I  am  for  none  of  them  all. 


PIETY,   PRUDENCE,   AND   CHARTIY  127 

Now,  Matthew,  the  eldest  son  of  Christiana,  fell  sick  ;  and  his 
sickness  was  sore  upon  him,  for  he  was  much  pained  inwardly ; 
so  that  he  was  with  it,  at  times,  pulled  as  it  were  both  ends 
together.  There  dwelt  also  not  far  from  thence  one  Mr.  Skill, 
an  ancient  and  well-approved  physician.  So  Christiana  desired  it, 
and  they  sent  for  him,  and  he  came.  When  he  was  entered 
the  room,  and  had  a  little  observed  the  boy,  he  concluded  that 
he  was  sick  of  the  gripes.  Then  he  said  to  his  mother,  What 
diet  has  Matthew  of  late  fed  upon  ?  Diet  ?  said  Christiana, 
nothing  but  what  is  wholesome.  The  physician  answered,  This 
boy  has  been  tampering  with  something  that  lies  in  his  maw 
undigested,  and  that  will  not  away  without  means.  And  I  tell 
you,  he  must  be  purged,  or  else  he  will  die. 

Then  said  Samuel,  Mother,  what  was  that  which  my  brother 
did  gather  up  and  eat,  so  soon  as  we  were  come  from  the  gate 
that  is  at  the  head  of  this  way  ?  You  know  that  there  was 
an  orchard  on  the  left  hand,  on  the  other  side  of  the  wall,  and 
some  of  the  trees  hung  over  the  wall,  and  my  brother  did  pluck 
and  eat. 

True,  my  child,  said  Christiana,  he  did  take  thereof,  and  did 
eat  :  naughty  boy  as  he  was,  I  chid  him,  and  yet  he  would  eat 
thereof. 

Skill.  I  knew  he  had  eaten  something  that  was  not  whole- 
some food ;  and  that  food — to  wit,  that  fruit — is  even  the  most 
hurtful  of  all.  It  is  the  fruit  of  Beelzebub's  orchard.  I  do  marvel 
that  none  did  warn  you  of  it ;  many  have  died  thereof. 

Then  Christiana  began  to  cry ;  and  she  said,  O  naughty 
boy  !  and  O  careless  mother !  what  shall  I  do  for  my  son  ? 

Skill.  Come,  do  not  be  too  much  dejected ;  the  boy  may 
do  well  again,  but  he  must  purge  and  vomit. 

Chr.  Pray,  sir,  try  the  utmost  of  your  skill  with  him,  what- 
ever it  costs. 

Skill.  Nay,  I  hope  I  shall  be  reasonable.  So  he  made  him 
a  purge,  but  it  was  too  weak  ;  'twas  said  it  was  made  of  hyssop, 
etc.  When  Mr.  Skill  had  seen  that  the  purge  was  too  weak,  he 
made  him  one  to  the  purpose :  it  was  made  ex  came  et  sanguine 
Christi  (you  know  physicians  give  strange  medicines  to  their 
patients)  :  and  it  was  made  into  pills,  with  a  promise  or  two, 
and  a  proportionable  quantity  of  salt.  Now  he  was  to  take 
them  three  at  a  time,  fasting,  in  half  a  quarter  of  a  pint  of  the 
tears  of  repentance. 

When  this  potion  was  prepared  and  brought  to  the  boy, 
he  was  loath  to  take  it,  though  torn  with  the  gripes  as  if  he 
should  be  pulled  in  pieces.  Come,  come,  said  the  physician,  you 


128  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

must  take  it.  It  goes  against  my  stomach,  said  the  boy.  I 
must  have  you  take  it,  said  his  mother.  I  shall  vomit  it  up  again, 
said  the  boy.  Pray,  sir,  said  Christiana  to  Mr.  Skill,  how  does 
it  taste  ?  It  has  no  ill  taste,  said  the  doctor ;  and  with  that  she 
touched  one  of  the  pills  with  the  tip  of  her  tongue.  O  Matthew, 
said  she,  this  potion  is  sweeter  than  honey.  If  thou  lovest  thy 
mother,  if  thou  lovest  thy  brothers,  if  thou  lovest  Mercy,  if  thou 
lovest  thy  life,  take  it.  So  with  much  ado,  after  a  short  prayer 
for  the  blessing  of  God  upon  it,  he  took  it,  and  it  wrought  kindly 
with  him.  It  worked  effectually  :  it  caused  him  to  sleep  and 
rest  quietly ;  it  put  him  into  a  fine  heat  and  breathing  sweat, 
and  it  quite  rid  him  of  his  gripes. 

So  in  a  little  time  he  got  up,  and  walked  about  with  a 
staff,  and  would  go  from  room  to  room,  and  talk  with  Pru- 
dence, Piety,  and  Charity,  of  his  distemper,  and  how  he  was 
healed. 

So  when  the  boy  was  healed,  Christiana  asked  Mr.  Skill, 
saying,  Sir,  what  will  content  you  for  your  pains  and  care  to 
me  and  my  child  ?  And  he  said,  You  must  pay  the  Master  of 
the  College  of  Physicians,  according  to  rules  made  in  that  case 
and  provided. 

But,   sir,   said  she,   what  is  this  pill  good  for  else  ? 

Skill.  It  is  a  universal  pill  :  it  is  good  against  all  diseases 
that  pilgrims  are  incident  to ;  and  when  it  is  well  prepared, 
it  will  keep  good,  time  out  of  mind. 

Chr.  Pray,  sir,  make  me  up  twelve  boxes  of  them ;  for  if 
I  can  get  these,  I  will  never  take  other  physic. 

Skill.  These  pills  are  good  to  prevent  diseases,  as  well  as 
to  cure  when  one  is  sick.  Yea,  I  dare  say  it,  and  stand  to  it, 
that  if  a  man  will  but  use  this  physic  as  he  should,  it  will  make 
him  live  for  ever.  But,  good  Christiana,  thou  must  give  these 
pills  no  other  way  than  as  I  have  prescribed ;  for  if  you  do, 
they  will  do  no  good.  So  he  gave  unto  Christiana  physic  for 
herself,  and  her  boys,  and  for  Mercy ;  and  bid  Matthew  take  heed 
how  he  ate  any  more  green  plums ;  and  kissed  them,  and  went 
his  way. 

Now,  about  this  time  their  month  was  out ;  wherefore  they 
signified  to  those  of  the  house  that  it  was  convenient  for  them 
to  be  up  and  going.  Then  said  Joseph  to  his  mother,  It  is  proper 
that  you  forget  not  to  send  to  the  house  of  Mr.  Interpreter, 
to  pray  him  to  grant  that  Mr.  Great-heart  should  be  sent  unto 
us,  that  he  may  be  our  conductor  the  rest  of  the  way.  Good 
boy,  said  she,  I  had  almost  forgot.  So  she  drew  up  a  petition, 
and  prayed  Mr.  Watchful  the  porter  to  send  it  by  some  fit  man 


PIETY,   PRUDENCE,   AND   CHARITY 


129 


to  her  good  friend  Mr.  Interpreter ;  who,  when  it  was  come, 
and  he  had  seen  the  contents  of  the  petition,  said  to  the  messenger, 
Go  tell  them  that  I  will  send  him. 

When  the  family  where  Christiana  was  saw  that  they  had 
a  purpose  to  go  forward,  they  called  the  whole  house  together, 
to  give  thanks  to  their  King  for  sending  of  them  such  profitable 
guests  as  these.  Which  done,  they  said  unto  Christiana,  And 


shall  we  not  show  thee  something,  as  our  custom  is  to  do  to 
pilgrims,  on  which  thou  mayest  meditate  when  thou  art  upon 
the  way  ?  So  they  took  Christiana,  her  children,  and  Mercy, 
into  the  closet,  and  showed  them  one  of  the  apples  that  Eve 
ate  of,  and  that  which  she  also  did  give  to  her  husband, 
and  that  for  the  eating  of  which  they  were  both  turned  out  of 
Paradise ;  and  asked  her  what  she  thought  that  was.  Then 
9 


130  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Christiana  said>  It  is  food  or  poison,  I  know  not  which.  So  they 
opened  the  matter  to  her,  and  she  held  up  her  hands  and  wondered. 

Then  they  had  her  to  a  place,  and  showed  her  Jacob's 
ladder  Nc*w  a^  that  time  there  were  some  angels  ascending  upon 
it  So  Christiana  looked  and  looked  to  see  the  angels  go  up ; 
so'  did  the  rest  °f  the  company.  Then  they  were  going  into 
another  place'  to  show  them  something  else ;  but  James  said  to 
his  mother'  PraY  bid  them  stay  here  a  little  longer,  for  this  is  a 
curious  sight.  So  they  turned  again,  and  stood  feeding  their  eyes 
with  this  s'°  plcasmg  a  prospect.  After  this  they  had  them  into  a 
place  where  ^id  hang  up  a  golden  anchor.  So  they  bid  Christiana 
take  it  down  ;  ^or'  sa^  they,  you  shall  have  it  with  you,  in  case 
you  should  meet  with  turbulent  weather.  So  they  were  glad  thereof. 

Now  ^bout  this  time  one  knocked  at  the  door ;  so  the  porter 
opened  ai1(^'  behold,  Mr.  Great-heart  was  there.  But  when  he 
was  come  m>  wnat  joy  was  there  !  for  it  came  now  afresh  again 
into  their  mmds  how  but  a  while  ago  he  had  slain  old  Grim 
Bloody-mar1'  the  giant,  and  had  delivered  them  from  the  lions. 

Then  sa^  Mr.  Great-heart  to  Christiana  and  to  Mercy,  My 
Lord  has  sent  each  of  you  a  bottle  of  wine,  and  also  some  parched 
corn  toeefher  with  a  couple  of  pomegranates ;  he  has  also  sent 
the  'boys  <>ome  ngs  and  raisins,  to  refresh  you  in  your  way. 

Then  they  addressed  themselves  to  their  journey ;  and  Pru- 
dence and  Piety  went  along  with  them.  When  they  came  to 
the  gate  Christiana  asked  the  porter  if  any  of  late  went  by  ? 
He  said'  ^° >  onty  one'  some  time  since,  who  also  told  me 
that  of  'l-^-te  there  had  been  a  great  robbery  committed  on  the 
King's  hignway>  as  y°u  S°  '•  but,  said  he,  the  thieves  are  taken, 
and  will  sllort^y  be  tried  for  their  lives.  Then  Christiana  and  Mercy 
were  afraid »  but  Matthew  said,  Mother,  fear  nothing,  as  long  as 
Mr  Great  -'heart  is  to  go  with  us,  and  to  be  our  conductor. 

Then  said  Christiana  to  the  porter,  Sir,  I  am  much  obliged 
to  you  fdr  a^  the  kindnesses  that  you  have  showed  me  since 
I  came  hi^ier >  an(^  a'so  f°r  that  you  have  been  so  loving  and 
kind  to  niY  children.  I  know  not  how  to  gratify  your  kindness  : 
wherefore  Pray'  as  a  token  of  my  respect  to  you,  accept  of  this 
small  mite'  ^°  §he  Put  a  gold  angel  in  his  hand ;  and  he  made 
her  a  low  obeisance,  and  said,  Let  thy  garments  be  always  white, 
and  let  t^Y  head  want  no  ointment.  Let  Mercy  live  and  not 
die  and  }et  n°t  her  works  be  few.  And  to  the  boys  he  said, 
Do'  you  fly  youthful  lusts,  and  follow  after  godliness  with  them 
that  are  grave  and  wise ;  so  shall  you  put  gladness  into  your 
mother's  peart»  and  obtain  praise  of  all  that  are  sober-minded. 
So  they  than^ed  the  porter,  and  departed. 


CHAPTER   V 

THE    TWO    VALLEYS 

NOW    I  saw  in  my  dream  that  they  went  forward  until  they 
were  come  to  the  brow  of  the  hill,  where  Piety,  bethinking 
herself,    cried   out,    Alas  !      I    have   forgot  what   I   intended 
to    bestow    upon    Christiana    and    her    companions  ;    I  will    go    back 
and  fetch  it.      So  she    ran    and  fetched    it.      While    she    was    gone, 
Christiana  thought  she    heard  in    a    grove,   a  little  way  off  on    the 
right  hand,   a  most   curious,   melodious  note,   with  words   much  like 
these,— 

Through  all  my  life  thy  favour  is 

So  frankly  shown  to  me, 
That  in  thy  house  for  evermore 

My  dwelling-place  shall  be. 

And  listening  still,  she  thought  she  heard  another  answer  it,  saying,— 

For  why  ?    the  Lord  our  God  is  good, 

His  mercy  is  for  ever  sure ; 
His  truth  at  all  times  firmly  stood, 

And  shall  from  age  to  age  endure. 

So  Christiana  asked  Prudence  who  it  was  that  made  those  curious 
notes.  They  are,  she  answered,  our  country  birds  :  they  sing 
these  notes  but  seldom,  except  it  be  at  the  spring,  when  the  flowers 
appear  and  the  sun  shines  warm ;  and  then  you  may  hear  them 
all  day  long.  I  often,  said  she,  go  out  to  hear  them  ;  we  also 
ofttimes  keep  them  tame  in  our  house.  They  are  very  fine 
company  for  us  when  we  are  melancholy ;  also  they  make  the 
woods,  and  groves,  and  solitary  places  desirous  to  be  in. 

By  this  time  Piety  was  come  again  ;  so  she  said  to  Christiana, 
Look  here,  I  have  brought  thee  a  scheme  of  all  those  things  that 
thou  hast  seen  at  our  house,  upon  which  thou  mayest  look  when 
thou  findest  thyself  forgetful,  and  call  those  things  again  to  re- 
membrance for  thy  edification  and  comfort. 

Now    they    began    to    go    down    the    hill    into    the    Valley    of 

131 


132  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Humiliation.  It  was  a  steep  hill,  and  the  way  was  slippery ;  but 
they  were  very  careful,  so  they  got  down  pretty  well.  When  they 
were  down  in  the  valley,  Piety  said  to  Christiana,  This  is  the  place 
where  your  husband  met  with  the  foul  fiend  Apollyon,  and  where 
they  had  that  dreadful  fight  that  they  had :  I  know  you  cannot 
but  have  heard  thereof.  But  be  of  good  courage  ;  as  long  as  you 
have  here  Mr.  Great-heart  to  be  your  guide  and  conductor,  we 
hope  you  will  fare  the  better.  So  when  these  two  had  committed 
the  pilgrims  unto  the  conduct  of  their  guide,  he  went  forward,  and 
they  went  after. 

Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  We  need  not  be  so  afraid  of  this 
valley ;  for  here  is  nothing  to  hurt  us,  unless  we  procure  it  to 
ourselves.  It  is  true  that  Christian  here  did  meet  with  Apollyon, 
with  whom  he  had  also  a  sore  combat ;  but  that  fray  was  the 
fruit  of  those  slips  which  he  got  in  his  going  down  the  hill :  for 
they  that  get  slips  there  must  look  for  combats  here.  And  hence 
it  is  that  this  valley  has  got  so  hard  a  name.  For  the  common 
people,  when  they  hear  that  some  frightful  thing  has  befallen  such 
a  one  in  such  a  place,  are  of  opinion  that  that  place  is  haunted 
with  some  foul  fiend  or  evil  spirit ;  when,  alas  !  it  is  for  the  fruit 
of  their  own  doing  that  such  things  do  befall  them  there. 

This  Valley  of  Humiliation  is  of  itself  as  fruitful  a  place  as 
any  the  crow  flies  over ;  and  I  am  persuaded,  if  we  could  hit 
upon  it,  we  might  find  somewhere  hereabouts  something  that  might 
give  us  an  account  why  Christian  was  so  hardly  beset  in  this  place. 

Then  James  said  to  his  mother,  Lo,  yonder  stands  a  pillar, 
and  it  looks  as  if  something  was  written  thereon  ;  let  us  go  and 
see  what  it  is.  So  they  went,  and  found  there  written,  "  Let 
Christian's  slips,  before  he  came  hither,  and  the  battles  that  he 
met  with  in  this  place,  be  a  warning  to  those  that  come  after." 

Lo,  said  the  guide,  did  not  I  tell  you  that  there  was  something 
hereabouts  that  would  give  intimation  of  the  reason  why  Christian 
was  so  hard  beset  in  this  place  ?  Then,  turning  himself  to 
Christiana,  he  said,  No  disparagement  to  Christian,  more  than  to 
many  others  whose  hap  and  lot  it  was.  For  it  is  easier  going  up 
than  down  this  hill ;  and  that  can  be  said  but  of  few  hills  in  all 
these  parts  of  the  world.  But  we  will  leave  the  good  man,  he 
is  at  rest ;  he  also  had  a  brave  victory  over  his  enemy  :  let  Him 
grant  that  dwelleth  above,  that  we  fare  no  worse,  when  we  come 
to  be  tried,  than  he. 

But  we  will  come  again  to  this  Valley  of  Humiliation.  It 
is  the  best  and  most  fruitful  piece  of  ground  in  all  these  parts. 
It  is  fat  ground,  and,  as  you  see,  consisteth  much  in  meadows  ; 
and  if  a  man  was  to  come  here  in  summer-time,  as  we  do  now,  if 


OF  CHRJST17\N' S  FIGHT  "WITH 


131  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

he  knew  not  anything  before  thereof,  and  if  he  also  delighted  him- 
self in  the  sight  of  his  eyes,  he  might  see  that  which  would  be 
delightful  to  him.  Behold  how  green  this  valley  is ;  also  how 
beautified  with  lilies.  I  have  known  many  labouring  men  that 
have  got  good  estates  in  this  Valley  of  Humiliation,  for  indeed  it  is 
a  very  fruitful  soil,  and  doth  bring  forth  by  handfuls.  Some  also 
have  wished  that  the  next  way  to  their  Father's  house  were  here, 
that  they  might  be  troubled  no  more  with  either  hills  or  mountains 
to  go  over  :  but  the  way  is  the  way,  and  there  is  an  end. 

Now,  as  they  were  going  along  and  talking,  they  espied  a  boy 
feeding  his  father's  sheep.  The  boy  was  in  very  mean  clothes, 
but  of  a  fresh  and  well-favoured  countenance ;  and  as  he  sat  by 
himself,  he  sung.  Hark,  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  to  what  the  shep- 
herd's boy  saith  ;  so  they  hearkened,  and  he  said,— 

He  that  is  down  needs  fear  no  fall ; 

He  that  is  low,  no  pride  ; 
He  that  is  humble  ever  shall 

Have  God  to  be  his  guide. 

Then  said  their  guide,  Do  you  hear  him  ?  I  will  dare  to  say 
this  boy  lives  a  merrier  life,  and  wears  more  of  that  herb  called 
heart's-ease  in  his  bosom,  than  he  that  is  clad  in  silk  and  velvet. 
But  we  will  proceed  in  our  discourse. 

In  this  valley  our  Lord  formerly  had  his  country-house ;  he 
loved  much  to  be  here.  He  loved  also  to  walk  these  meadows, 
for  he  found  the  air  was  pleasant.  Besides,  here  a  man  shall  be 
free  from  the  noise,  and  from  the  hurryings  of  this  life.  All  states 
are  full  of  noise  and  confusion,  only  the  Valley  of  Humiliation  is 
that  empty  and  solitary  place. 

And  though  Christian  had  the  hard  hap  to  meet  here  with 
Apollyon,  and  to  enter  with  him  into  a  brisk  encounter,  yet  I  must 
tell  you,  that  in  former  times  men  have  met  with  angels  here,  have 
found  pearls  here,  and  have  in  this  place  found  the  words  of  life. 

Now,  as  they  went  on,  Samuel  said  to  Mr.  Great-heart,  Sir, 
I  perceive  that  in  this  valley  my  father  and  Apollyon  had  their 
battle  ;  but  whereabout  was  the  fight  ?  for  this  valley  is  large. 

Great.  Your  father  had  that  battle  with  Apollyon  at  a  place 
yonder  before  us,  in  a  narrow  passage  just  beyond  Forgetful  Green. 
And,  indeed,  that  place  is  the  most  dangerous  place  in  all  these 
parts  ;  for  if  at  any  time  pilgrims  meet  with  any  brunt,  it  is  when 
they  forget  what  favours  they  have  received,  and  how  unworthy  they 
are  of  them.  This  is  the  place,  also,  where  others  have  been  hard 
put  to  it. — But  more  of  the  place  when  we  are  come  to  it ;  for  I 
persuade  myself,  that  to  this  day  there  remains  either  some  sign 


THE   TWO   VALLEYS 


135 


of  the  battle,  or  some  monument  to  testify  that  such  a  battle  was 
fought   there. 

Then  said  Mercy,  I  think  I  am  as  well  in  this  valley  as  I  have 
been  anywhere  else  in  all  our  journey  :  the  place,  methinks,  suits 
with  my  spirit.  I  love  to  be  in  such  places  where  there  is  no 
rattling  with  coaches  nor  rumbling  with  wheels.  Methinks  here 
one  may,  without  much  molestation,  be  thinking  what  he  is,  whence 


he  came,  what  he  has  done,  and  to  what  the  King  has  called  him. 
And  they  that  go  through  it  shall  sing,  as  Christian  did,  for  all  he 
met  with  Apollyon. 

'Tis  true,  said  their  guide.  I  have  gone  through  this  valley 
many  a  time,  and  never  was  better  than  when  here.  I  have  also 
been  a  conductor  to  several  pilgrims,  and  they  have  confessed  the 


same. 


Now   they    were    come   to    the   place   where   the    aforementioned 


136  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

battle  was  fought.  Then  said  the  guide  to  Christiana,  her  children, 
and  Mercy,  This  is  the  place  :  on  this  ground  Christian  stood,  and 
up  there  came  Apollyon  against  him.  And  look,  did  I  not  tell 
you,  here  is  some  of  your  husband's  blood  upon  these  stones  to 
this  day !  Behold,  also,  how  here  and  there  are  yet  to  be  seen 
upon  the  place  some  of  the  shivers  of  Apollyon's  broken  darts. 
See  also  how  they  did  beat  the  ground  with  their  feet  as  they 
fought,  to  make  good  their  places  against  each  other ;  how  also, 
with  their  by-blows,  they  did  split  the  very  stones  in  pieces. 
Verily,  Christian  did  here  play  the  man,  and  showed  himself  as 
stout  as  Hercules  could,  had  he  been  here,  even  he  himself.  When 
Apollyon  was  beat,  he  made  his  retreat  to  the  next  valley,  that  is 
called  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death,  unto  which  we  shall 
come  anon. 

Lo,  yonder  also  stands  a  monument  on  which  is  engraven  this 
battle  and  Christian's  victory,  to  his  fame  throughout  all  ages. 

When  they  had  passed  by  this  place,  they  came  upon  the 
borders  of  the  Shadow  of  Death.  And  this  valley  was  longer  than 
the  other ;  a  place,  also,  most  strangely  haunted  with  evil  things, 
as  many  are  able  to  testify.  But  these  women  and  children  went 
the  better  through  it,  because  they  had  daylight,  and  because  Mr. 
Great-heart  was  their  conductor. 

When  they  were  entered  upon  this  valley,  they  thought  that 
they  heard  a  groaning  as  of  dying  men — a  very  great  groaning. 
They  thought  also  that  they  did  hear  words  of  lamentation,  spoken 
as  of  some  in  extreme  torment.  These  things  made  the  boys  to 
quake,  the  women  also  looked  pale  and  wan  ;  but  their  guide  bid 
them  be  of  good  comfort. 

So  they  went  on  a  little  further,  and  they  thought  that  they 
felt  the  ground  begin  to  shake  under  them,  as  if  some  hollow  place 
was  there ;  they  heard  also  a  kind  of  hissing,  as  of  serpents,  but 
nothing  as  yet  appeared.  Then  said  the  boys,  Are  we  not  yet  at 
the  end  of  this  doleful  place  ?  But  the  guide  also  bid  them  be  of 
good  courage,  and  look  well  to  their  feet,  lest  haply,  said  he,  you 
be  taken  in  some  snare. 

Now  James  began  to  be  sick,  but  I  think  the  cause  thereof 
was  fear ;  so  his  mother  gave  him  some  of  that  glass  of  spirits 
that  had  been  given  her  at  the  Interpreter's  house,  and  three  of 
the  pills  that  Mr.  Skill  had  prepared,  and  the  boy  began  to  revive. 
Thus  they  went  on,  till  they  came  to  about  the  middle  of  the 
valley  ;  and  then  Christiana  said,  Methinks  I  see  something  yonder 
upon  the  road  before  us — a  thing  of  such  a  shape  as  I  have  not 
seen.  Then  said  Joseph,  Mother,  what  is  it  ?  An  ugly  thing, 
child,  an  ugly  thing,  said  she.  But,  mother,  what  is  it  like  ?  said 


THE   TWO   VALLEYS  137 

he.      'Tis  like  I  cannot  tell  what,   said  she.      And  now  it  is  but  a 
little  way  off.      Then  said  she,  It  is  nigh. 

Well,  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  let  them  that  are  most  afraid,  keep 
close  to  me.  So  the  fiend  came  on,  and  the  conductor  met  it ; 
but  when  it  was  just  come  to  him,  it  vanished  to  all  their  sights. 
Then  remembered  they  what  had  been  said  some  time  ago,  "  Resist 
the  devil,  and  he  will  flee  from  you." 


They  went  therefore  on,  as  being  a  little  refreshed.  But  they 
had  not  gone  far,  before  Mercy,  looking  behind  her,  saw,  as  she 
thought,  something  most  like  a  lion,  and  it  came  a  great  padding 
pace  after ;  and  it  had  a  hollow  voice  of  roaring ;  and  at  every 
roar  that  it  gave,  it  made  all  the  valley  echo,  and  all  their 
hearts  to  ache,  save  the  heart  of  him  that  was  their  guide.  So  it 
came  up ;  and  Mr.  Great-heart  went  behind,  and  put  the  pilgrims 
all  before  him.  The  lion  also  came  on  apace,  and  Mr.  Great -heart 


138  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

addressed  himself  to  give  him  battle.  But  when  he  saw  that  it 
was  determined  that  resistance  should  be  made,  he  also  drew  back, 
and  came  no  further. 

Then  they  went  on  again,  and  their  conductor  went  before 
them,  till  they  came  to  a  place  where  was  cast  up  a  pit  the  whole 
breadth  of  the  way ;  and  before  they  could  be  prepared  to  go  over 
that,  a  great  mist  and  a  darkness  fell  upon  them,  so  that  they 
could  not  see.  Then  said  the  pilgrims,  Alas  !  what  now  shall  we 
do  ?  But  their  guide  made  answer,  Fear  not ;  stand  still,  and  see 
what  an  end  will  be  put  to  this  also.  So  they  stayed  there,  because 
their  path  was  marred.  They  then  also  thought  that  they  did  hear 
more  apparently  the  noise  and  rushing  of  the  enemies ;  the  fire, 
also,  and  smoke  of  the  pit  were  much  easier  to  be  discerned.  Then 
said  Christiana  to  Mercy,  Now  I  see  what  my  poor  husband  went 
through.  I  have  heard  much  of  this  place,  but  I  never  was  here 
before  now.  Poor  man  !  he  went  here  all  alone  in  the  night ;  he 
had  night  almost  quite  through  the  way ;  also  these  fiends  were 
busy  about  him,  as  if  they  would  have  torn  him  in  pieces.  Many 
have  spoken  of  it,  but  none  can  tell  what  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow 
of  Death  should  mean  until  they  come  in  it  themselves.  "  The 
heart  knoweth  its  own  bitterness  ;  and  a  stranger  doth  not  inter- 
meddle with  its  joy."  To  be  here  is  a  fearful  thing. 

Great.  This  is  like  doing  business  in  great  waters,  or  like 
going  down  into  the  deep ;  this  is  like  being  in  the  heart  of 
the  sea,  and  like  going  down  to  the  bottoms  of  the  mountains; 
now  it  seems  as  if  the  earth,  with  its  bars,  were  about  us  for 
ever.  '  But  let  them  that  walk  in  darkness,  and  have  no  light, 
trust  in  the  name  of  the  Lord,  and  stay  upon  their  God."  For 
my  part,  as  I  have  told  you  already,  I  have  gone  often  through 
this  valley,  and  have  been  much  harder  put  to  it  than  now  I  am, 
and  yet  you  see  I  am  alive.  I  would  not  boast,  for  that  I  am 
not  my  own  saviour.  But  I  trust  we  shall  have  a  good  deliverance. 
Come,  let  us  pray  for  light  to  Him  that  can  lighten  our  darkness, 
and  that  can  rebuke,  not  only  these,  but  all  the  Satans  in  hell. 

So  they  cried  and  prayed,  and  God  sent  light  and  deliver- 
ance ;  for  there  was  now  no  let  in  their  way,  no,  not  there 
where  but  now  they  were  stopped  with  a  pit.  Yet  they  were 
not  got  through  the  valley;  so  they  went  on  still,  and  behold 
great  stinks  and  loathsome  smells,  to  the  great  annoyance  of 
them.  Then  said  Mercy  to  Christiana,  It  is  not  so  pleasant  being 
here  as  at  the  gate,  or  at  the  Interpreter's,  or  at  the  house 
where  we  lay  last.  Oh,  but,  said  one  of  the  boys,  it  is  not  so 
bad  to  go  through  here  as  it  is  to  abide  here  always ;  and,  for 
aught  I  know,  one  reason  why  we  must  go  this  way  to  the  house 


THE   TWO   VALLEYS 


139 


prepared    for    us,    is,    that    our    home   might    be    made    the    sweeter 
to    us. 

Well    said,    Samuel,    quoth    the    guide ;    thou    hast    now    spoken 


riCHTS  V3&&  Wmg  GRESTHEftRgT 


like  a  man.  Why,  if  ever  I  get  out  here  again,  said  the  boy, 
I  think  I  shall  prize  light  and  good  way  better  than  ever  I  did 
in  all  my  life.  Then  said  the  guide,  We  shall  be  out  by-and-by. 


140  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

So  on  they  went,  and  Joseph  said,  Cannot  we  see  to  the 
end  of  this  valley  as  yet  ?  Then  said  the  guide,  Look  to  your 
feet,  for  we  shall  presently  be  among  the  snares.  So  they  looked 
to  their  feet,  and  went  on ;  but  they  were  troubled  much  with  the 
snares.  Now  when  they  were  come  among  the  snares,  they  spied 
a  man  cast  into  the  ditch  on  the  left  hand,  with  his  flesh  all 
rent  and  torn.  Then  said  the  guide,  That  is  one  Heedless,  that 
was  going  this  way ;  he  has  lain  there  a  great  while.  There  was 
one  Take-heed  with  him  when  he  was  taken  and  slain,  but  he 
escaped  their  hands.  You  cannot  imagine  how  many  are  killed 
hereabouts ;  and  yet  men  are  so  foolishly  venturous  as  to  set 
out  lightly  on  pilgrimage,  and  to  come  without  a  guide.  Poor 
Christian  !  it  was  a  wonder  that  he  here  escaped.  But  he  had 
a  good  heart  of  his  own,  or  else  he  could  never  have  done  it. 

Now  they  drew  towards  the  end  of  this  way ;  and  just 
where  Christian  had  seen  the  cave  when  he  went  by,  out  thence 
came  forth  Maul,  a  giant.  This  Maul  did  use  to  spoil  young 
pilgrims  with  sophistry ;  and  he  called  Great-heart  by  his  name, 
and  said  unto  him,  How  many  times  have  you  been  forbidden 
to  do  these  things  ?  Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  What  things  ? 
What  things !  quoth  the  giant ;  you  know  what  things  :  but 
I  will  put  an  end  to  your  trade.  But  pray,  said  Mr.  Great-heart, 
before  we  fall  to  it,  let  us  understand  wherefore  we  must  fight. 
(Now  the  women  and  children  stood  trembling,  and  knew  not 
what  to  do.) 

Quoth  the  giant,  You  rob  the  country,  and  rob  it  with  the 
worst  of  thefts. — These  are  but  generals,  said  Mr.  Great-heart ; 
come  to  particulars,  man. 

Then  said  the  giant,  Thou  practisest  the  craft  of  a  kidnapper ; 
thou  gatherest  up  women  and  children,  and  earnest  them  into 
a  strange  country,  to  the  weakening  of  my  master's  kingdom. 
But  now  Great-heart  replied,  I  am  a  servant  of  the  God  of  heaven; 
my  business  is  to  persuade  sinners  to  repentance.  I  am  com- 
manded to  do  my  endeavour  to  turn  men,  women,  and  children 
"  from  darkness  to  light,  and  from  the  power  of  Satan  unto 
God ;  "  and  if  this  be  indeed  the  ground  of  thy  quarrel,  let  us 
fall  to  it  as  soon  as  thou  wilt. 

Then  the  giant  came  up,  and  Mr.  Great-heart  went  to  meet 
him  ;  and,  as  he  went,  he  drew  his  sword  :  but  the  giant  had 
a  club.  So,  without  more  ado,  they  fell  to  it,  and  at  the  first 
blow  the  giant  struck  Mr.  Great-heart  down  upon  one  of  his 
knees.  With  that  the  women  and  children  cried  out.  So  Mr. 
Great-heart,  recovering  himself,  laid  about  him  in  full  lusty  manner, 
and  gave  the  giant  a  wound  in  his  arm.  Thus  he  fought  for  the 


THE   TWO   VALLEYS  141 

space  of  an  hour  to  that  height  of  heat,  that  the  breath  came  out 
of  the  giant's  nostrils  as  the  heat  doth  out  of  a  boiling  caldron. 

Then  they  sat  down  to  rest  them,  but  Mr.  Great-heart  be- 
took himself  to  prayer ;  also  the  women  and  children  did  nothing 
but  sigh  and  cry  all  the  time  that  the  battle  did  last. 

When  they  had  rested  them  and  taken  breath,  they  both 
fell  to  it  again ;  and  Mr.  Great-heart,  with  a  blow,  fetched  the 
giant  down  to  the  ground.  Nay,  hold,  let  me  recover,  quoth  he. 
So  Mr.  Great-heart  fairly  let  him  get  up.  So  to  it  they  went 
again,  and  the  giant  missed  but  little  of  all-to-breaking  Mr. 
Great-heart's  skull  with  his  club. 

Mr.  Great-heart  seeing  that,  runs  to  him  in  the  full  heat 
of  his  spirit,  and  pierceth  him  under  the  fifth  rib.  With  that 
the  giant  began  to  faint,  and  could  hold  up  his  club  no  longer. 
Then  Mr.  Great-heart  seconded  his  blow,  and  smote  the  head  of 
the  giant  from  his  shoulders.  Then  the  women  and  children 
rejoiced,  and  Mr.  Great-heart  also  praised  God  for  the  deliverance 
he  had  wrought. 


CHAPTER  VI 

GAIUS   MINE    HOST 

NOW  I  saw  that  they  went  on  to  the  ascent  that  was  a 
little  way  off  cast  up  to  be  a  prospect  for  pilgrims  (that 
was  the  place  from  whence  Christian  had  the  first  sight 
of  Faithful  his  brother).  Wherefore  here  they  sat  down  and  rested ; 
they  also  here  did  eat  and  drink  and  make  merry,  for  that  they 
had  gotten  deliverance  from  this  so  dangerous  an  enemy.  As 
they  sat  thus  and  did  eat,  Christiana  asked  the  guide  if  he  had 
caught  no  hurt  in  the  battle.  Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  No, 
save  a  little  on  my  flesh ;  yet  that  also  shall  be  so  far  from 
being  to  my  detriment,  that  it  is  at  present  a  proof  of  my  love 
to  my  Master  and  you ;  and  shall  be  a  means,  by  grace,  to  in- 
crease my  reward  at  last. 

Chr.  But  were  you  not  afraid,  good  sir,  when  you  saw  him 
come  with  his  club  ? 

It  is  my  duty,  said  he,  to  mistrust  my  own  ability,  that  I 
may  have  reliance  on  Him  who  is  stronger  than  all. 

Chr.  But  what  did  you  think  when  he  fetched  you  down  to 
the  ground  at  the  first  blow  ? 

Why,  I  thought,  replied  he,  that  so  my  Master  himself  was 
served,  and  yet  he  it  was  that  conquered  at  last. 

Matt.  When  you  all  have  thought  what  you  please,  I  think 
God  has  been  wonderfully  good  unto  us,  both  in  bringing  us  out 
of  this  valley,  and  in  delivering  us  out  of  the  hand  of  this  enemy  ; 
for  my  part,  I  see  no  reason  why  we  should  distrust  our  God 
any  more,  since  he  has  now,  and  in  such  a  place  as  this,  given 
us  such  testimony  of  his  love. 

Then  they  got  up  and  went  forward.  Now  a  little  before 
them  stood  an  oak ;  and  under  it,  when  they  came  to  it,  they 
found  an  old  pilgrim  fast  asleep.  They  knew  that  he  was  a  pil- 
grim by  his  clothes,  and  his  staff,  and  his  girdle. 

So  the  guide,  Mr.  Great-heart,  awaked  him ;  and  the  old 
gentleman,  as  he  lifted  up  his  eyes,  cried  out,  What's  the  matter  ? 
Who  are  you  ?  and  what  is  your  business  here  ? 

142 


GAIUS   MINE   HOST  143 

Great.  Come,  man,  be  not  so  hot ;  here  are  none  but  friends. 
Yet  the  old  man  gets  up,  and  stands  upon  his  guard,  and  will 
know  of  them  what  they  are.  Then  said  the  guide,  My  name  is 
Great-heart :  I  am  the  guide  of  these  pilgrims,  which  are  going 
to  the  Celestial  Country. 

Then  said  Mr.  Honest,  I  cry  you  mercy.  I  feared  that  you 
had  been  of  the  company  of  those  that  some  time  ago  did  rob 
Little-faith  of  his  money ;  but  now  I  look  better  about  me,  I 
perceive  you  are  honester  people. 

Great.  Why,  what  would  or  could  you  have  done  to  have 
helped  yourself,  if  indeed  we  had  been  of  that  company  ? 

Hon.  Done !  why,  I  would  have  fought  as  long  as  breath 
had  been  in  me ;  and  had  I  so  done,  I  am  sure  you  could 
never  have  given  me  the  worst  on't ;  for  a  Christian  can  never 
be  overcome,  unless  he  shall  yield  of  himself. 

Great.  Well  said,  Father  Honest !  quoth  the  guide ;  for  by 
this  I  know  thou  art  a  cock  of  the  right  kind,  for  thou  hast 
said  the  truth. 

Hon.  And  by  this  also  I  know  that  thou  knowest  what  true 
pilgrimage  is ;  for  all  others  do  think  that  we  are  the  soonest 
overcome  of  any. 

Great.  Well,  now  we  are  so  happily  met,  pray  let  me  crave 
your  name,  and  the  name  of  the  place  you  came  from. 

Hon.  My  name  I  cannot.  But  I  came  from  the  town  of 
Stupidity  ;  it  lieth  about  four  degrees  beyond  the  City  of  Destruc- 
tion. 

Great.  Oh !  are  you  that  countryman  ?  Then  I  deem  I  have 
half  a  guess  of  you  :  your  name  is  Old  Honesty,  is  it  not  ? 

Hon.  So  the  old  gentleman  blushed,  and  said,  Not  Honesty 
in  the  abstract ;  but  Honest  is  my  name,  and  I  wish  that  my 
nature  may  agree  to  what  I  am  called.  But,  sir,  said  the  old 
gentleman,  how  could  you  guess  that  I  am  such  a  man,  since 
I  came  from  such  a  place  ? 

Great.  I  had  heard  of  you  before,  by  my  Master;  for  he 
knows  all  things  that  are  done  on  the  earth  :  but  I  have  often 
wondered  that  any  should  come  from  your  place,  for  your  town 
is  worse  than  is  the  City  of  Destruction  itself. 

Hon.  Yes ;  we  lie  more  off  from  the  sun,  and  so  are  more 
cold  and  senseless :  but  were  a  man  in  a  mountain  of  ice,  yet 
if  the  Sun  of  Righteousness  should  arise  upon  him,  his  frozen 
heart  shall  feel  a  thaw.  And  thus  it  has  been  with  me. 

Great.  I  believe  it,  Father  Honest,  I  believe  it ;  for  I  know 
the  thing  is  true. 

Then   the   old   gentleman   saluted   all   the   pilgrims   with   a   holy 


144  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

kiss    of   charity,   and   asked  them    their    names,   and   how  they   had 
fared   since   they   set   out   on   their   pilgrimage. 

Then  said  Christiana,  My  name,  I  suppose,  you  have  heard 
of:  good  Christian  was  my  husband,  and  these  four  are  his  children. 
But  can  you  think  how  the  old  gentleman  was  taken  when  she 
told  him  who  she  was  !  He  skipped,  he  smiled,  he  blessed  them 
with  a  thousand  good  wishes,  saying,  I  have  heard  much  of  your 
husband,  and  of  his  travels  and  wars  which  he  underwent  in 
his  days.  Be  it  spoken  to  your  comfort,  the  name  of  your  hus- 
band rings  all  over  these  parts  of  the  world  ;  his  faith,  his  courage, 
his  enduring,  and  his  sincerity  under  all,  have  made  his  name  famous. 

Then  he  turned  him  to  the  boys,  and  asked  of  them  their 
names ;  which  they  told  him.  And  then  said  he  unto  them, 
Matthew,  be  thou  like  Matthew  the  publican — not  in  vice,  but 
in  virtue.  Samuel,  said  he,  be  thou  like  Samuel  the  prophet— 
a  man  of  faith  and  prayer.  Joseph,  said  he,  be  thou  like  Joseph 
in  Potiphar's  house — chaste,  and  one  that  flies  from  temptation. 
And  James,  be  thou  like  James  the  Just,  and  like  James  the 
brother  of  our  Lord.  Then  they  told  him  of  Mercy,  and  how 
she  had  left  her  own  town  and  her  kindred  to  come  along  with 
Christiana  and  with  her  sons.  At  that  the  old  honest  man  said, 
Mercy,  is  thy  name  ?  by  mercy  thou  shalt  be  sustained,  and 
carried  through  all  those  difficulties  that  shall  assault  thee  in  thy 
way,  till  thou  shalt  come  thither  where  thou  shalt  look  the  Foun- 
tain of  Mercy  in  the  face  with  comfort.  All  this  while  the  guide, 
Mr.  Great-heart,  was  very  well  pleased,  and  smiled  upon  his  com- 
panion. 

Now,  as  they  walked  along  together,  the  guide  asked  the  old 
gentleman  if  he  did  not  know  one  Mr.  Fearing,  that  came  on 
pilgrimage  out  of  his  parts. 

Hon.  Yes,  very  well,  said  he.  He  was  a  man  that  had  the 
root  of  the  matter  in  him  ;  but  he  was  one  of  the  most  trouble- 
some pilgrims  that  ever  I  met  with  in  all  my  days. 

Great.  I  perceive  you  knew  him,  for  you  have  given  a  very 
right  character  of  him. 

Hon.  Knew  him !  I  was  a  great  companion  of  his :  I  was 
with  him  most  an  end ;  when  he  first  began  to  think  upon  what 
would  come  upon  us  hereafter,  I  was  with  him. 

Great.  I  was  his  guide  from  my  Master's  house  to  the  gates 
of  the  Celestial  City. 

Hon.    Then   you   knew   him    to   be   a   troublesome    one. 

Great.  I  did  so ;  but  I  could  very  well  bear  it,  for  men  of 
my  calling  are  oftentimes  entrusted  with  the  conduct  of  such 
as  he  was. 


GAIUS   MINE   HOST  145 

Hon.  Why,  then,  pray  let  us  hear  a  little  of  him,  and  how 
he  managed  himself  under  your  conduct. 

Great.  Why,  he  was  always  afraid  that  he  should  come  short 
of  whither  he  had  a  desire  to  go.  Everything  frightened  him  that 
he  heard  anybody  speak  of,  if  it  had  but  the  least  appearance 
of  opposition  in  it.  I  have  heard  that  he  lay  roaring  at  the 
Slough  of  Despond  for  above  a  month  together ;  nor  durst  he, 
for  all  he  saw  several  go  over  before  him,  venture,  though  they, 
many  of  them,  offered  to  lend  him  their  hands.  Well,  after  he 
had  lain  at  the  Slough  of  Despond  a  great  while,  as  I  have  told 
you,  one  sunshiny  morning,  I  don't  know  how,  he  ventured,  and 
so  got  over ;  but  when  he  was  over,  he  would  scarcely  believe 
it.  He  had,  I  think,  a  Slough  of  Despond  in  his  mind — a  slough 
that  he  carried  everywhere  with  him — or  else  he  could  never 
have  been  as  he  was.  So  he  came  up  to  the  gate  that  stands 
at  the  head  of  this  way,  and  there  also  he  stood  a  good  while 
before  he  would  venture  to  knock.  When  the  gate  was  opened, 
he  would  give  back,  and  give  place  to  others,  and  say  that  he 
was  not  worthy.  So  he  went  on  till  he  came  to  our  house ; 
but  as  he  behaved  himself  at  the  gate,  so  he  did  at  my  Master 
the  Interpreter's  door.  He  lay  thereabout  in  the  cold  a  good  while 
before  he  would  adventure  to  call ;  yet  he  would  not  go  back 
—and  the  nights  were  long  and  cold  then. 

At  last,  I  think,  I  looked  out  of  the  window,  and  perceiving  a 
man  to  be  up  and  down  about  the  door,  I  went  out  to  him,  and 
asked  what  he  was.  But,  poor  man,  the  water  stood  in  his 
eyes  ;  so  I  perceived  what  he  wanted.  I  went  therefore  in,  and 
told  it  in  the  house,  and  we  showed  the  thing  to  our  Lord  :  so  he 
sent  me  out  again,  to  entreat  him  to  come  in ;  but  I  dare  say 
I  had  hard  work  to  do  it.  At  last  he  came  in  ;  and  I  will  say 
that  for  my  Lord,  he  carried  it  wonderful  lovingly  to  him.  There 
were  but  a  few  good  bits  at  the  table,  but  some  of  it  was  laid  upon 
his  trencher.  So  when  he  had  been  there  a  good  while,  he  seemed 
to  get  some  heart,  and  to  be  a  little  more  comfortable. 

Then  we  set  forward,  and  I  went  before  him  ;  but  the  man 
was  but  of  few  words,  only  he  would  sigh  aloud. 

I  got  him  into  the  house  Beautiful,  I  think,  before  he  was 
willing.  Also,  when  he  was  in,  I  brought  him  acquainted  with  the 
damsels  of  the  place  ;  but  he  was  ashamed  to  make  himself  much 
in  company.  He  desired  much  to  be  alone. 

When  we  went  also  from  the  house  Beautiful,  down  the  hill, 
into  the  Valley  of  Humiliation,  he  went  down  as  well  as  ever  I  saw 
a  man  in  my  life ;  for  he  cared  not  how  mean  he  was,  so  he 
might  be  happy  a  at  last.  Yea,  I  think  there  was  a  kind  of 

10 


146  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

sympathy  betwixt  that  valley  and  him  ;  for  I  never  saw  him  better 
in  all  his  pilgrimage  than  he  was  in  that  valley. 

Here  he  would  lie  down,  embrace  the  ground,  and  kiss  the 
very  flowers  that  grew  in  this  valley.  He  would  now  be  up  every 
morning  by  break  of  day,  tracing  and  walking  to  and  fro  in  the 
valley. 

But  when  he  was  come  to  the  entrance  of  the  Valley  of  the 
Shadow  of  Death,  I  thought  I  should  have  lost  my  man  ;  not  for 
that  he  had  any  inclination  to  go  back — that  he  always  abhorred— 
but  he  Avas  ready  to  die  for  fear.  Oh,  the  hobgoblins  will  have 
me !  the  hobgoblins  will  have  me !  cried  he ;  and  I  could  not 
beat  him  out  of  it.  He  made  such  a  noise  and  such  an  outcry 
here,  that  had  they  but  heard  him,  it  was  enough  to  encourage 
them  to  come  and  fall  upon  us. 

But  this  I  took  very  great  notice  of,  that  this  valley  was  as 
quiet  when  we  went  through  it  as  ever  I  knew  it  before  or  since. 
I  suppose  those  enemies  here  had  now  a  special  check  from  our 
Lord,  and  a  command  not  to  meddle  until  Mr.  Fearing  had  passed 
over  it. 

It  would  be  too  tedious  to  tell  you  of  all :  we  will  therefore 
only  mention  a  passage  or  two  more.  When  he  was  come  to 
Vanity  Fair,  I  thought  he  would  have  fought  with  all  the  men  in 
the  fair.  I  feared  there  we  should  have  been  both  knocked  on  the 
head,  so  hot  was  he  against  their  fooleries.  Upon  the  Enchanted 
Ground  he  was  very  wakeful.  But  when  he  was  come  at  the  river 
where  was  no  bridge,  there  again  he  was  in  a  heavy  case.  Now, 
now,  he  said,  he  should  be  drowned  for  ever,  and  so  never  see 
that  face  with  comfort  that  he  had  come  so  many  miles  to  behold. 
And  here  also  I  took  notice  of  what  was  very  remarkable— 
the  water  of  that  river  was  lower  at  this  time  than  ever  I  saw  it 
in  all  my  life ;  so  he  went  over  at  last,  not  much  above  wet-shod. 
So  I  saw  that  they  still  went  on  in  their  talk.  For  after  Mr. 
Great-heart  had  made  an  end  with  Mr.  Fearing,  Mr.  Honest  began 
to  tell  them  of  another,  but  his  name  was  Mr.  Self-will.  He 
pretended  himself  to  be  a  pilgrim,  said  Mr.  Honest ;  but  I  persuade 
myself  he  never  came  in  at  the  gate  that  stands  at  the  head  of 
the  way. 

Now,  as  they  were  thus  on  their  way,  there  came  one  running 
to  meet  them,  and  said,  Gentlemen,  and  you  of  the  weaker  sort, 
if  you  love  life,  shift  for  yourselves,  for  the  robbers  are  before  you. 
Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  They  be  the  three  that  set  upon 
Little-faith  heretofore.  Well,  said  he,  we  are  ready  for  them  :  so 
they  went  on  their  way.  Now  they  looked  at  every  turning  when 
they  should  have  met  with  the  villains ;  but  whether  they  heard 


GAIUS   MINE   HOST  147 

of  Mr.    Great-heart,    or   whether   they   had    some   other   game,    they 
came  not  up  to  the  pilgrims. 

Christiana  then  wished  for  an  inn  to  refresh  herself  and  her 
children,  because  they  were  weary.  Then  said  Mr.  Honest,  There 
is  one  a  little  before  us,  where  a  very  honourable  disciple,  one 
Gaius,  dwells.  So  they  all  concluded  to  turn  in  thither ;  and  the 
rather,  because  the  old  gentleman  gave  him  so  good  a  report. 
When  they  came  to  the  door,  they  went  in,  not  knocking,  for 
folks  used  not  to  knock  at  the  door  of  an  inn.  Then  they  called 
for  the  master  of  the  house,  and  he  came  to  them.  So  they  asked 
if  they  might  lie  there  that  night. 

Gaius.  Yes,  gentlemen,  if  you  be  true  men,  for  my  house  is 
for  none  but  pilgrims.  Then  were  Christiana,  Mercy,  and  the  boys 
the  more  glad,  for  that  the  innkeeper  was  a  lover  of  pilgrims. 
So  they  called  for  rooms,  and  he  showed  them  one  for  Christiana 
and  her  children  and  Mercy,  and  another  for  Mr.  Great-heart  and 
the  old  gentleman. 

Great.  Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  Good  Gaius,  what  hast  thou 
for  supper  ?  for  these  pilgrims  have  come  far  to-day,  and  are 
weary. 

Gains.  It  is  late,  said  Gaius,  so  we  cannot  conveniently  go  out 
to  seek  food ;  but  such  as  we  have  you  shall  be  welcome  to,  if 
that  will  content. 

Great.  We  will  be  content  with  what  thou  hast  in  the  house  ; 
forasmuch  as  I  have  proved  thee,  thou  art  never  destitute  of  that 
which  is  convenient. 

Then  he  went  down  and  spake  to  the  cook,  whose  name  was 
Taste-that-which-is-good,  to  get  ready  supper  for  so  many  pilgrims. 
This  done,  he  came  up  again,  saying,  Come,  my  good  friends,  you 
are  welcome  to  me,  and  I  am  glad  that  I  have  a  house  to  entertain 
you  in ;  and  while  supper  is  making  ready,  if  you  please,  let  us 
entertain  one  another  with  some  good  discourse.  So  they  all  said, 
Content. 

Gains.  Then  said  Gaius,  Whose  wife  is  this  aged  matron  ?  and 
whose  daughter  is  this  young  damsel  ? 

Great.  This  woman  is  the  wife  of  one  Christian,  a  pilgrim  of 
former  times ;  and  these  are  his  four  children.  The  maid  is  one 
of  her  acquaintance,  one  that  she  hath  persuaded  to  come  with  her 
on  pilgrimage.  The  boys  take  all  after  their  father,  and  covet  to 
tread  in  his  steps ;  yea,  if  they  do  but  see  any  place  where  the 
old  pilgrim  hath  lain,  or  any  print  of  his  foot,  it  ministereth  joy  to 
their  hearts,  and  they  covet  to  lie  or  tread  in  the  same. 

Gains.  Then  said  Gaius,  Is  this  Christian's  wife,  and  are  these 
Christian's  children  ?  I  knew  your  husband's  father,  yea,  also  his 


148  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

father's  father.  Nor  can  I  but  be  glad  to  see  that  thy  husband 
has  left  behind  him  four  such  boys  as  these.  I  hope  they  will 
bear  up  their  father's  name,  and  tread  in  their  father's  steps,  and 
come  to  their  father's  end. 

Great.  Indeed,  sir,  they  are  likely  lads ;  they  seem  to  choose 
heartily  their  father's  ways. 

Now  the  cook  sent  up  to  signify  that  supper  was  almost  ready, 
and  sent  one  to  lay  the  cloth,  and  the  trenchers,  and  to  set  the 
salt  and  bread  in  order. 

Then  said  Matthew,  The  sight  of  this  cloth,  and  of  this  fore- 
runner of  the  supper,  begetteth  in  me  a  greater  appetite  to  my 
food  than  I  had  before. 

So  supper  came  up.  And  first  a  heave-shoulder  and  a  wave- 
breast  were  set  on  the  table  before  them  ;  to  show  that  they  must 
begin  their  meal  with  prayer  and  praise  to  God.  These  two  dishes 
were  very  fresh  and  good,  and  they  all  ate  heartily  thereof. 

The  next  they  brought  up  was  a  bottle  of  wine,  as  red  as 
blood.  So  Gaius  said  to  them,  Drink  freely  ;  this  is  the  true  juice 
of  the  vine,  that  makes  glad  the  heart  of  God  and  man.  So  they 
drank  and  were  merry. 

The  next  was  a  dish  of  milk  well  crumbed.  Gaius  said,  Let 
the  boys  have  that,  that  they  may  grow  thereby. 

Then  they  brought  up  in  course  a  dish  of  butter  and  honey. 
Then  said  Gaius,  Eat  freely  of  this,  for  this  is  good  to  cheer  up 
and  strengthen  your  judgments  and  understandings.  This  was  our 
Lord's  dish  when  he  was  a  child  :  "  Butter  and  honey  shall  he  eat, 
that  he  may  know  how  to  refuse  the  evil,  and  choose  the  good." 

Then  they  brought  them  up  a  dish  of  apples,  and  they  were 
very  good-tasted  fruit.  Then  said  Matthew,  May  we  eat  apples, 
since  it  was  they  by  and  with  which  the  serpent  beguiled  our  first 
mother  ?  I  made  the  scruple,  because  I  a  while  since  was  sick 
with  the  eating  of  fruit. 

Gaius.  Forbidden  fruit  will  make  you  sick,  but  not  what  our 
Lord  has  tolerated. 

While  they  were  thus  talking,  they  were  presented  with  another 
dish,  and  it  was  a  dish  of  nuts.  Then  said  some  at  the  table, 
Nuts  spoil  tender  teeth,  especially  the  teeth  of  children  :  which 
when  Gaius  heard,  he  said  :— 

Hard  texts  are  nuts  (I  will  not  call  them  cheaters), 
Whose  shells  do  keep  their  kernels  from  the  eaters  : 
Ope  then  the  shells,  and  you  shall  have  the  meat  ; 
They  here  are  brought  for  you  to  crack  and  eat. 

Then  were  they  very  merry,  and  sat  at  the  table  a  long  time, 


GAIUS   MINE   HOST  149 

talking  of  many  things.  Then  said  the  old  gentleman,  My  good 
landlord,  while  we  are  cracking  your  nuts,  if  you  please,  do  you 
open  this  riddle  :— 

A  man  there  was,  though  some  did  count  him  mad, 
The  more  he  cast  awav,  the  more  he  had. 

Then  they  all  gave  good  heed,  wondering  what  good  Gaius 
would  say ;  so  he  sat  still  a  while,  and  then  thus  replied  :— 

He  who  bestows  his  goods  upon  the  poor 
Shall  have  as  much  again,  and  ten  times  more. 

Then  said  Joseph,  I  dare  say,  sir,  I  did  not  think  you  could 
have  found  it  out. 

Oh  !  said  Gaius,  I  have  been  trained  up  in  this  way  a  great 
while ;  nothing  teaches  like  experience.  I  have  learned  of  my 
Lord  to  be  kind,  and  I  have  found  by  experience  that  I  have 
gained  thereby.  "  There  is  that  scattereth,  and  yet  increaseth ; 
and  there  is  that  withholdeth  more  than  is  meet,  but  it  tendeth  to 
poverty.  There  is  that  maketh  himself  rich,  yet  hath  nothing  :  there 
is  that  maketh  himself  poor,  yet  hath  great  riches." 

Then  Samuel  whispered  to  Christiana,  his  mother,  and  said, 
Mother,  this  is  a  very  good  man's  house ;  let  us  stay  here  a  good 
while,  and  let  my  brother  Matthew  be  married  here  to  Mercy, 
before  we  go  any  further.  The  which  Gaius,  the  host,  overhearing, 
said,  With  a  very  good  will,  my  child. 

So  they  stayed  here  more  than  a  month,  and  Mercy  was  given 
to  Matthew  to  wife.  While  they  stayed  here,  Mercy,  as  her 
custom  was,  made  coats  and  garments  to  give  to  the  poor,  by 
which  she  brought  a  very  good  report  upon  pilgrims. 

But  to  return  again  to  our  story.  After  supper  the  lads  desired 
a  bed,  for  they  were  weary  with  travelling.  Then  Gaius  called  to 
show  them  to  their  chamber  ;  but,  said  Mercy,  I  will  have  them  to  bed. 
So  she  had  them  to  bed,  and  they  slept  well :  but  the  rest  sat 
up  all  night ;  for  Gaius  and  they  were  such  suitable  company, 
that  they  could  not  tell  how  to  part.  Thus  they  sat  talking  till 
break  of  day. 


CHAPTER   VII 

THE    HOUSE    OF   MNASON 

NOW,  when  the  family  were  up,  Christiana  bid  her  son 
James  read  a  chapter ;  so  he  read  the  53rd  of  Isaiah. 
When  he  had  done,  Well,  said  Gains,  now  you  are  here, 
and  since,  as  I  know,  Mr.  Great-heart  is  good  at  his  weapons,  if 
you  please,  after  we  have  refreshed  ourselves,  we  will  walk  into 
the  fields,  to  see  if  we  can  do  any  good.  About  a  mile  from 
hence  there  is  one  Slay-good,  a  giant,  that  does  much  annoy  the 
King's  highway  in  these  parts  ;  and  I  know  whereabout  his  haunt 
is.  He  is  master  of  a  number  of  thieves  :  'twould  be  well  if  we 
could  clear  these  parts  of  him.  So  they  consented  and  went — Mr. 
Great-heart  with  his  sword,  helmet,  and  shield  ;  and  the  rest  with 
spears  and  staves. 

When  they  were  come  to  the  place  where  he  was,  they  found 
him  with  one  Feeble-mind  in  his  hand,  whom  his  servants  had 
brought  unto  him,  having  taken  him  in  the  way.  Now  the  giant 
was  rifling  him,  with  a  purpose  after  that  to  pick  his  bones  ;  for 
he  was  of  the  nature  of  flesh-eaters. 

Well,  so  soon  as  he  saw  Mr.  Great-heart  and  his  friends  at  the 
mouth  of  his  cave,  with  their  weapons,  he  demanded  what  they 
wanted. 

Great.  We  want  thee ;  for  we  are  come  to  revenge  the  quarrels 
of  the  many  pilgrims  that  thou  hast  slain,  when  thou  hast  dragged 
them  out  of  the  King's  highway  :  wherefore  come  out  of  thy  cave. 
So  he  armed  himself  and  came  out,  and  to  battle  they  went,  and 
fought  for  above  an  hour,  and  then  stood  still  to  take  wind. 

Then  said  the  giant,  Why  are  you  here  on  my  ground  ? 

Great.  To  revenge  the  blood  of  pilgrims,  as  I  told  thee 
before.  So  they  went  to  it  again,  and  the  giant  made  Mr.  Great- 
heart  give  back ;  but  he  came  up  again,  and  in  the  greatness  of  his 
mind  he  let  fly  with  such  stoutness  at  the  giant's  head  and  sides, 
that  he  made  him  let  his  weapon  fall  out  of  his  hand.  So  he 
smote  him,  and  slew  him,  and  cut  off  his  head,  and  brought  it 
away  to  the  inn.  He  also  took  Feeble-mind  the  pilgrim,  and 

150 


THE  HOUSE  OF  MNASON 


151 


brought  him  with  him  to  his  lodgings.  When  they  were  come 
home,  they  showed  his  head  to  the  family,  and  set  it  up,  as  they 
had  done  others  before,  for  a  terror  to  those  that  should  attempt 
to  do  as  he  hereafter. 

Then  they  asked  Mr.  Feeble-mind  how  he  fell  into  his  hands. 

Feeble.  Then  said  the  poor  man,  I  am  a  sickly  man,  as  you 
see ;  and  because  Death  did  usually  once  a  day  knock  at  my 
door,  I  thought  I  should  never  be  well  at  home  ;  so  I  betook 


myself  to  a  pilgrim's  life,  and  have  travelled  hither  from  the 
town  of  Uncertain,  where  I  and  my  father  were  born.  I  am  a 
man  of  no  strength  at  all  of  body,  nor  yet  of  mind,  but  would, 
if  I  could,  though  I  can  but  crawl,  spend  my  life  in  the  pilgrim's 
way.  When  I  came  at  the  gate  that  is  at  the  head  of  the  way, 
the  Lord  of  that  place  did  entertain  me  freely ;  neither  objected 
he  against  my  weakly  looks,  nor  against  my  feeble  mind ;  but 
gave  me  such  things  as  were  necessary  for  my  journey,  and  bid 
me  hope  to  the  end.  When  I  came  to  the  house  of  the  Interpreter, 


152  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

I  received  much  kindness  there  ;  and  because  the  Hill 
Difficulty  was  judged  too  hard  for  me,  I  was  carried  up  it  by 
one  of  his  servants.  Indeed,  I  have  found  much  relief  from  pil- 
grims, though  none  were  willing  to  go  so  softly  as  I  am  forced 
to  do ;  yet  still,  as  they  came  on,  they  bid  me  be  of  good  cheer, 
and  said  it  was  the  will  of  their  Lord  that  comfort  should  be 
given  to  the  feeble-minded,  and  so  went  on  their  own  pace. 
When  I  was  come  to  Assault  Lane,  then  this  giant  met  with  me, 
and  bid  me  prepare  for  an  encounter.  But,  alas  !  feeble  one  that 
I  was,  I  had  more  need  of  a  cordial ;  so  he  came  up  and  took 
me.  I  conceited  he  would  not  kill  me.  Also  when  he  got  me 
into  his  den,  since  I  went  not  with  him  willingly,  I  believed  I 
should  come  out  alive  again ;  for  I  have  heard  that  not  any 
pilgrim  that  is  taken  captive  by  violent  hands,  if  he  keeps  heart- 
whole  towards  his  Master,  is,  by  the  laws  of  providence,  to  die 
by  the  hand  of  the  enemy.  Robbed  I  looked  to  be,  and  robbed 
to  be  sure  I  am ;  but  I  am,  as  you  see,  escaped  with  life,  for 
the  which  I  thank  my  King  as  the  author,  and  you  as  the  means. 
Other  brunts  I  also  look  for ;  but  this  I  have  resolved  on,  to 
wit,  to  run  when  I  can,  to  go  when  I  cannot  run,  and  to  creep 
when  I  cannot  go.  As  to  the  main,  I  thank  Him  that  loves  me,  I 
am  fixed.  My  way  is  before  me,  my  mind  is  beyond  the  river  that 
has  no  bridge,  though  I  am,  as  you  see,  but  of  a  feeble  mind. 

Hon.  Then  said  old  Mr.  Honest,  Have  not  you,  some  time 
ago,  been  acquainted  with  one  Mr.  Fearing,  a  pilgrim  ? 

Feeble.  Acquainted  with  him  !  yes ;  he  came  from  the  town 
of  Stupidity,  which  lieth  four  degrees  northward  of  the  City  of 
Destruction,  and  as  many  off  of  where  I  was  born.  Yet  we  were 
well  acquainted,  for  indeed  he  was  my  uncle,  my  father's  brother. 
He  and  I  have  been  much  of  a  temper  :  he  was  a  little  shorter 
than  I,  but  yet  we  were  much  of  a  complexion. 

Hon.  I  perceive  you  know  him ;  and  I  am  apt  to  believe 
also  that  you  were  related  one  to  another,  for  you  have  his 
whitely  look,  a  cast  like  his  with  your  eye,  and  your  speech  is 
much  alike. 

Feeble.  Most  have  said  so  that  have  known  us  both ;  and, 
besides,  what  I  have  read  in  him  I  have  for  the  most  part  found 
in  myself. 

Gains.  Come,  sir,  said  good  Gaius,  be  of  good  cheer ;  you 
are  welcome  to  me,  and  to  my  house.  What  thou  hast  a  mind 
to,  call  for  freely  ;  and  what  thou  wouldst  have  my  servants  do  for 
thee,  they  will  do  it  with  a  ready  mind. 

Then  said  Mr.  Feeble-mind,  This  is  an  unexpected  favour, 
and  as  the  sun  shining  out  of  a  very  dark  cloud.  Did  Giant 


THE  HOUSE   OF  MNASON  153 

Slay-good  intend  me  this  favour  when  he  stopped  me,  and  re- 
solved to  let  me .  go  no  further  ?  Did  he  intend,  that  after  he 
had  rifled  my  pockets,  I  should  go  to  Gaius,  mine  host  ?  Yet  so 
it  is. 

Now,  about  this  time  Matthew  and  Mercy  were  married  ;  also 
Gaius  gave  his  daughter  Phebe  to  James,  Matthew's  brother,  to 
wife  ;  after  which  time  they  yet  stayed  about  ten  days  at  Gaius's 
house,  spending  their  time  and  the  seasons  like  as  pilgrims  used 
to  do. 

When  they  were  to  depart,  Gaius  made  them  a  feast,  and 
they  did  eat  and  drink,  and  were  merry.  Now  the  hour  was  come 
that  they  must  be  gone ;  wherefore  Mr.  Great-heart  called  for 
a  reckoning.  But  Gaius  told  him,  that  at  his  house  it  was  not 
the  custom  of  pilgrims  to  pay  for  their  entertainment. 

Great.  "  Beloved,  thou  doest  faithfully  whatsoever  thou  doest 
to  the  brethren,  and  to  strangers."  Then  Gaius  took  his  leave  of 
them  all,  and  his  children,  and  particularly  of  Mr.  Feeble-mind. 
He  also  gave  him  something  to  drink  by  the  way.  Now  Mr. 
Feeble-mind,  when  they  were  going  out  of  the  door,  made  as 
if  he  intended  to  linger.  The  which  when  Mr.  Great-heart  espied, 
he  said,  Come,  Mr.  Feeble-mind,  pray  do  you  go  along  with  us ; 
I  will  be  your  conductor,  and  you  shall  fare  as  the  rest. 

Feeble.  Alas  !  I  want  a  suitable  companion.  You  are  all  lusty 
and  strong,  but  I,  as  you  see,  am  weak ;  I  choose,  therefore, 
rather  to  come  behind,  lest,  by  reason  of  my  many  infirmities, 
I  should  be  both  a  burden  to  myself  and  to  you.  I  am,  as  I 
said,  a  man  of  a  weak  and  feeble  mind,  and  shall  be  offended 
and  made  weak  at  that  which  others  can  bear.  I  shall  like  no 
laughing ;  I  shall  like  no  gay  attire ;  I  shall  like  no  unprofitable 
questions.  Nay,  I  am  so  weak  a  man  as  to  be  offended  with 
that  which  others  have  a  liberty  to  do.  I  do  not  yet  know  all 
the  truth  :  I  am  a  very  ignorant  Christian  man. 

Great.  But,  brother,  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  I  have  it  in  com- 
mission to  comfort  the  feeble-minded,  and  to  support  the  weak. 
You  must  needs  go  along  with  us ;  we  will  wait  for  you ;  we 
will  lend  you  our  help ;  we  will  deny  ourselves  of  some  things 
for  your  sake  ;  we  will  not  enter  into  doubtful  disputations  before 
you ;  we  will  be  made  all  things  to  you,  rather  than  you  shall 
be  left  behind. 

Now  all  this  while  they  were  at  Gaius's  door ;  and,  behold, 
as  they  were  thus  in  the  heat  of  their  discourse,  Mr.  Ready- 
to-halt  came  by,  with  his  crutches  in  his  hand,  and  he  also  was 
going  on  pilgrimage. 

Feeble.    Then   said   Mr.   Feeble-mind   to   him,   How    earnest   thou 


154  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

hither  ?  I  was  but  now  complaining  that  I  had  not  a  suitable 
companion,  but  thou  art  according  to  my  wish.  Welcome,  welcome, 
good  Mr.  Ready-to-halt ;  I  hope  thou  and  I  may  be  some  help. 
Ready.  I  shall  be  glad  of  thy  company,  said  the  other ; 
and,  good  Mr.  Feeble-mind,  rather  than  we  will  part,  since  we 
are  thus  happily  met,  I  will  lend  thee  one  of  my  crutches. 

Feeble.  Nay,  answered  he,  though  I  thank  thee  for  thy  good 
will,  I  am  not  inclined  to  halt  before  I  am  lame.  Howbeit,  I 
think,  when  occasion  is,  it  may  help  me  against  a  dog. 

Ready.  If  either  myself  or  my  crutches  can  do  thee  a  plea- 
sure, we  are  both  at  thy  command,  good  Mr.  Feeble-mind. 

Thus  therefore  they  went  on.  Mr.  Great-heart  and  Mr. 
Honest  went  before,  Christiana  and  her  children  went  next,  and 
Mr.  Feeble-mind  came  behind,  and  Mr.  Ready-to-halt  with  his 
crutches. 

Thus  they  went  on  till  they  came  to  the  place  where  Evan- 
gelist met  with  Christian  and  Faithful.  Then  said  their  guide, 
Hereabouts  did  Christian  and  Faithful  meet  with  Evangelist,  who 
prophesied  to  them  of  what  troubles  they  should  meet  with  at 
Vanity  Fair. 

Hon.  Say  you  so  ?  I  dare  say  it  was  a  hard  chapter  then 
that  he  did  read  unto  them. 

Great.    It    was    so ;    but    he    gave     them    encouragement    withal. 
But    what    do    we    talk    of   them  ?    they   were    a    couple    of   lion-like 
men ;    they    had   set   their   faces   like   flint.     Do   not   you   remember 
how   undaunted    they    were    when    they    stood    before    the   judge  ? 
Hon.    Well :    Faithful   bravely   suffered. 

Great.  So  he  did,  and  as  brave  things  came  on't ;  for  Hope- 
ful, and  some  others,  as  the  story  relates  it,  were  converted  by 
his  death. 

Now  by  this  time  they  were  come  within  sight  of  the  town 
of  Vanity,  where  Vanity  Fair  is  kept.  So,  when  they  saw  that 
they  were  so  near  the  town,  they  consulted  with  one  another  how 
they  should  pass  through  the  town ;  and  some  said  one  thing, 
and  some  another.  At  last  Mr.  Great-heart  said,  I  have,  as  you 
may  understand,  often  been  a  conductor  of  pilgrims  through  this 
town.  Now,  I  am  acquainted  with  one  Mr.  Mnason,  a  Cyprusian 
by  nation,  an  old  disciple,  at  whose  house  we  may  lodge.  If 
you  think  good,  we  will  turn  in  there. 

Content,  said  old  Honest  ;  Content,  said  Christiana ;  Con- 
tent, said  Mr.  Feeble-mind ;  and  so  they  said  all.  Now  you  must 
think  that  it  was  eventide  by  that  they  got  to  the  outside  of 
the  town ;  but  Mr.  Great-heart  knew  the  way  to  the  old  man's 
house.  So  thither  they  came  ?  and  he  called  at  the  door,  and 


THE   HOUSE   OF   MNASON  155 

the  old  man  within  knew  his  tongue  as  soon  as  ever  he  heard 
it ;  so  he  opened,  and  they  all  came  in.  Then  said  Mnason 
their  host,  How  far  have  you  come  to-day  ?  So  they  said,  From 
the  house  of  Gaius,  your  friend.  I  promise  you,  said  he,  you  have 
come  a  good  stretch.  You  may  well  be  weary ;  sit  down.  So  they 
sat  down. 

Great.  Then  said  their  guide,  Come,  what  cheer,  good  sirs  ? 
I  dare  say  you  are  welcome  to  my  friend. 

Mnas.  I  also,  said  Mr.  Mnason,  do  bid  you  welcome ;  and 
whatever  you  want,  do  but  say,  and  we  will  do  what  we  can  to 
get  it  for  you. 

Hon.  Our  great  want  a  while  since  was  harbour  and  good 
company,  and  now  I  hope  we  have  both. 

Mnas.  For  harbour,  you  see  what  it  is ;  but  for  good  com- 
pany, that  will  appear  in  the  trial. 

Great.  Well,  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  will  you  have  the  pilgrims 
into  their  lodging  ? 

Mnas.  I  will,  said  Mr.  Mnason.  So  he  had  them  to  their 
respective  places,  and  also  showed  them  a  very  fair  dining-room, 
where  they  might  be,  and  sup  together,  until  time  should  come 
to  go  to  rest. 

Now  when  they  were  seated  in  their  places,  and  were  a  little 
refreshed  after  their  journey,  Mr.  Honest  asked  his  landlord  if 
there  were  any  store  of  good  people  in  the  town. 

Mnas.  We  have  a  few  ;  for  indeed  they  are  but  a  few,  when 
compared  with  them  on  the  other  side. 

Hon.  But  how  shall  we  do  to  see  some  of  them  ?  for  the 
sight  of  good  men  to  them  that  are  going  on  pilgrimage  is  like 
the  appearing  of  the  moon  and  stars  to  them  that  are  sailing 
upon  the  seas. 

Mnas.  Then  Mr.  Mnason  stamped  with  his  foot,  and  his  daugh- 
ter Grace  came  up.  So  he  said  unto  her,  Grace,  go  you,  tell 
my  friends,  Mr.  Contrite,  Mr.  Holy-man,  Mr.  Love-saints,  Mr. 
Dare-not-lie,  and  Mr.  Penitent,  that  I  have  a  friend  or  two  at 
my  house  who  have  a  mind  this  evening  to  see  them.  So  Grace 
went  to  call  them,  and  they  came ;  and  after  salutation  made, 
they  sat  down  together  at  the  table. 

Then  said  Mr.  Mnason  their  landlord,  My  neighbours,  I  have, 
as  you  see,  a  company  of  strangers  come  to  my  house  :  they  are 
pilgrims ;  they  come  from  afar,  and  are  going  to  Mount  Zion. 
But  who,  quoth  he,  do  you  think  this  is  ?  pointing  his  finger 
at  Christiana.  It  is  Christiana,  the  wife  of  Christian,  that  famous 
pilgrim  who,  with  Faithful  his  brother,  was  so  shamefully  handled 
in  our  town.  At  that  they  stood  amazed,  saying,  We  little 


156  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

thought  to  see  Christiana  when  Grace  came  to  call  us ;  where- 
fore this  is  a  very  comfortable  surprise.  They  then  asked  her  of 
her  welfare,  and  if  these  young  men  were  her  husband's  sons. 
And  when  she  had  told  them  they  were,  they  said,  The  King 
whom  you  love  and  serve  make  you  as  your  father,  and  bring 
you  where  he  is  in  peace. 

Hon.  Then  Mr.  Honest  (when  they  were  all  sat  down)  asked 
Mr.  Contrite  and  the  rest  in  what  posture  their  town  was  at 
present. 

Contr.  You  may  be  sure  we  are  full  of  hurry  in  fair-time. 
'Tis  hard  keeping  our  hearts  and  spirits  in  good  order  when  we 
are  in  a  cumbered  condition.  He  that  lives  in  such  a  place  as 
this,  and  has  to  do  with  such  as  we  have,  has  need  of  an  item 
to  caution  him  to  take  heed  every  moment  of  the  day. 

Hon.    But    how   are   your    neighbours    now    for    quietness  ? 

Contr.  They  are  much  more  moderate  now  than  formerly. 
You  know  how  Christian  and  Faithful  were  used  at  our  town ; 
but  of  late,  I  say,  they  have  been  far  more  moderate.  I  think 
the  blood  of  Faithful  lieth  as  a  load  upon  them  till  now ;  for 
since  they  burned  him,  they  have  been  ashamed  to  burn  any 
more.  In  those  days  we  were  afraid  to  walk  the  streets ;  but 
now  we  can  show  our  heads.  Then  said  Mr.  Contrite  to  them, 
Pray,  how  fared  it  with  you  in  your  pilgrimage  ?  how  stands 
the  country  affected  towards  you  ? 

Hon.  It  happens  to  us  as  it  happeneth  to  wayfaring  men ; 
—sometimes  our  way  is  clean,  sometimes  foul ;  sometimes  up-hill, 
sometimes  down-hill ;  we  are  seldom  at  a  certainty.  The  wind 
is  not  always  on  our  backs,  nor  is  every  one  a  friend  that  we 
meet  with  in  the  Avay.  We  have  met  with  some  notable  rubs 
already,  and  what  are  to  come  we  know  not ;  but  for  the  most 
part  we  find  it  true  that  has  been  talked  of  old,  A  good  man 
must  suffer  trouble.  Thus  they  sat  talking  and  spending  the  time 
until  supper  was  set  upon  the  table,  unto  which  they  went,  and 
refreshed  their  weary  bodies  ;  so  retired  to  rest. 

Now  they  stayed  in  the  fair  a  great  while  at  the  house  of 
Mr.  Mnason,  who  in  process  of  time  gave  his  daughter  Grace  unto 
Samuel,  Christiana's  son,  to  wife,  and  his  daughter  Martha  to 
Joseph. 

The  time,  as  I  said,  that  they  stayed  here  was  long,  for  it  was 
not  now  as  in  former  times.  Wherefore  the  pilgrims  grew  ac- 
quainted with  many  of  the  good  people  of  the  town,  and  did  them 
what  service  they  could.  Mercy,  as  she  was  wont,  laboured  much 
for  the  poor ;  wherefore  their  bellies  and  backs  blessed  her,  and  she 
was  there  an  ornament  to  her  profession.  And,  to  say  the  truth 


THE   HOUSE   OF  MNASON  157 

for  Grace,  Phebe,  and  Martha,  they  were  all  of  a  very  good  nature, 
and    did   much  good  in  their  places.     They    were    also    all    of   them 


very  fruitful ;  so  that  Christian's  name,  as  was  said  before,  was  like 
to  live  in  the  world. 

While  they  lay  here,   there  came  a  monster  out  of  the  woods, 
and   slew   many   of  the   people   of  the   town.      It   would   also   carry 


158  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

away  their  children,  and  teach  them  to  suck  its  whelps.  Now,  no 
man  in  the  town  durst  so  much  as  face  this  monster ;  but  all  fled 
Avhen  they  heard  the  noise  of  his  coming. 

The  monster  was  like  unto  no  one  beast  on  the  earth.  Its 
body  was  like  a  dragon,  and  it  had  seven  heads  and  ten  horns. 

Now  Mr.  Great-heart,  together  with  those  who  came  to  visit 
the  pilgrims  at  Mr.  Mnason's  house,  entered  into  a  covenant  to  go 
and  engage  this  beast,  if  perhaps  they  might  deliver  the  people 
of  this  town  from  the  paws  and  mouth  of  this  so  devouring  a 
serpent. 

Then  did  Mr.  Great-heart,  Mr.  Contrite,  Mr.  Holy-man,  Mr. 
Dare-not-lie,  and  Mr.  Penitent,  with  their  weapons,  go  forth  to 
meet  him.  Now  the  monster  at  first  was  very  rampant,  and  looked 
upon  these  enemies  with  great  disdain ;  but  they  so  belaboured 
him,  being  sturdy  men  at  arms,  that  they  made  him  make  a 
retreat :  so  they  came  home  to  Mr.  Mnason's  house  again. 

The  monster,  you  must  know,  had  his  certain  seasons  to  come 
out  in,  and  to  make  his  attempts  upon  the  children  of  the  people  of 
the  town.  At  these  seasons  did  these  valiant  worthies  watch  him 
in,  and  did  still  continually  assault  him  ;  insomuch  that  in  process 
of  time  he  became  not  only  wounded,  but  lame.  Also  he  has  not 
made  that  havoc  of  the  townsmen's  children  as  formerly  he  had 
done ;  and  it  is  verily  believed  by  some  that  this  beast  will  die 
of  his  wounds. 

This,  therefore,  made  Mr.  Great-heart  and  his  fellows  of  great 
fame  in  this  town  ;  so  that  many  of  the  people  that  wanted  their 
taste  of  things,  yet  had  a  reverent  esteem  and  respect  for  them. 
Upon  this  account,  therefore,  it  was  that  these  pilgrims  got  not 
much  hurt  here.  True,  there  were  some  of  the  baser  sort,  that 
could  see  no  more  than  a  mole,  nor  understand  any  more  than  a 
beast ;  these  had  no  reverence  for  these  men,  nor  took  they  notice 
of  their  valour  and  adventures. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

THE    DEATH    OF   GIANT   DESPAIR 

WELL,  the  time  grew  on  that  the  pilgrims  must  go  on  their 
way ;    wherefore  they   prepared  for  their    journey.      They 
sent   for   their  friends ;    they   conferred   with   them ;    they 
had  some  time  set  apart  therein  to  commit  each  other  to  the  pro- 
tection  of   their  Prince.      There  were,   again,   that   brought  of   such 
things  as  they  had,  that  were  fit  for  the  weak  and  the  strong,  for 
the   women   and  the   men,   and   so   laded  them   with   such   things   as 
were   necessary.      Then  they   set  forward    on    their  way ;    and   their 
friends    accompanying   them   so   far   as   was    convenient,    they   again 
committed  each  other  to  the  protection  of  their  King,  and  parted. 

They,  therefore,  that  were  of  the  pilgrims'  company  went  on, 
and  Mr.  Great-heart  went  before  them.  Now  the  women  and 
children  being  weakly,  they  were  forced  to  go  as  they  could  bear ; 
by  which  means  Mr.  Ready-to-halt  and  Mr.  Feeble-mind  had  more 
to  sympathize  with  their  condition. 

When  they  were  gone  from  the  townsmen,  and  when  their 
friends  had  bid  them  farewell,  they  quickly  came  to  the  place 
where  Faithful  was  put  to  death.  Therefore  they  made  a  stand, 
and  thanked  Him  that  had  enabled  him  to  bear  his  cross  so  well  ; 
and  the  rather  because  they  now  found  that  they  had  a  benefit  by 
such  manly  sufferings  as  his  were. 

They  went  on,  therefore,  after  this,  a  good  way  further, 
talking  of  Christian  and  Faithful,  and  how  Hopeful  joined  himself 
to  Christian  after  that  Faithful  was  dead. 

Now  they  were  come  up  with  the  Hill  Lucre,  where  the  silver 
mine  was  which  took  Demas  off  from  his  pilgrimage,  and  into 
which,  as  some  think,  By-ends  fell  and  perished ;  wherefore  they 
considered  that.  But  when  they  were  come  to  the  old  monument 
that  stood  over  against  the  Hill  Lucre — to  wit,  to  the  pillar  of  salt, 
that  stood  also  within  view  of  Sodom  and  its  stinking  lake — they 
marvelled,  as  did  Christian  before,  that  men  of  that  knowledge  and 
ripeness  of  wit  as  they  were  should  be  so  blind  as  to  turn  aside 
here.  Only  they  considered  again,  that  nature  is  not  affected  with 

159 


160  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

the  harms  that  others  have  met  with,  especially  if  that  thing  upon 
which  they  look  has  an  attracting  virtue  upon  the  foolish  eye. 

I  saw  now  that  they  went  on  till  they  came  to  the  river  that 
was  on  this  side  of  the  Delectable  Mountains — to  the  river  where 
the  fine  trees  grow  on  both  sides,  and  whose  leaves,  if  taken 
inwardly,  are  good  against  surfeits ;  where  the  meadows  are  green 
all  the  year  long ;  and  where  they  might  lie  down  safely. 

By   this   riverside,   in   the  meadows,   there  were  cotes   and   folds 
for  sheep,  and  a  house  built  for  the  nourishing  and  bringing  up  of 
those  lambs,  the  babes  of  those  women  that  go  on  pilgrimage.     Also 
there  was  here  one  that  was  entrusted  with  them,  who  could  have 
compassion,   and  that  could  gather  these  lambs  with  his  arm,   and 
carry    them    in    his    bosom,    and    gently    lead    those    that    are   with 
young.      Here    they    will    never    want    meat,    drink,    and    clothing ; 
here  they  will  be  kept  from  thieves  and  robbers  ;   for  this  Man  will 
die   before   one  of  those  committed  to  his  trust  shall  be  lost.      Be- 
sides, here  they  shall  be  sure  to  have  good  nurture  and  admonition, 
and  shall  be  taught  to   walk   in   right  paths  ;  and  that,  you  know, 
is  a  favour  of  no  small  account.     Also  here,  as  you  see,  are  delicate 
waters,  pleasant  meadows,  dainty  flowers,  variety  of  trees,  and  such 
as  bear  wholesome   fruit ; — fruit,   not   like   that   which   Matthew   ate 
of,   that   fell   over   the   wall   out   of   Beelzebub's    garden ;     but   fruit 
that  procureth  health  where  there  is  none,  and  that  continueth  and 
increaseth  it  where  it  is. 

Now   they   went   on.      And   when   they   were   come   to   By-path 
Meadow,    to    the    stile    over    which    Christian    went   with   his  fellow 
Hopeful,    when    they    were   taken    by    Giant   Despair,    and   put    into 
Doubting   Castle,   they   sat   down,   and   consulted   what   was   best   to 
be  done  :    to  wit,  now  that  they  were  so  strong,  and  had  got  such 
a   man   as   Mr.    Great-heart   for   their   conductor,    whether   they   had 
not  best  to   make   an   attempt  upon  the  giant,   demolish  his  castle, 
and  if  there  were  any  pilgrims  in  it,  to  set  them  at  liberty  before 
they   went  any  further.      So   one  said   one  thing,   and  another  said 
the  contrary.      One  questioned  if  it  were  lawful  to  go  upon  uncon- 
secrated  ground  ;    another  said  they  might,  provided  their  end  was 
good ;   but  Mr.  Great-heart   said,   Though  that  assertion  offered  last 
cannot   be   universally   true,   yet   I   have   a   commandment   to   resist 
sin,  to  overcome  evil,  to  fight  the  good  fight  of  faith ;    and,  I  pray, 
with  whom  should  I  fight  this  good  fight,  if  not  with  Giant  Despair. 
I    will,    therefore,    attempt    the    taking    away    of   his    life,    and    the 
demolishing  of  Doubting  Castle.     Then   said  he,   Who  will    go    with 
me  ?      Then   said   old   Honest,    I   will.       And   so   will    we   too,    said 
Christiana's  four  sons,  Matthew,  Samuel,  Joseph,  and  James ;  for  they 
were  young  men  and  strong.      So  they  left  the  women  in  the  road, 


THE   DEATH   OF   GIANT   DESPAIR 


161 


and  with  them  Mr.  Feeble-mind,  and  Mr.  Ready-to-halt  with  his 
crutches,  to  be  their  guard,  until  they  came  back ;  for  in  that 
place  Giant  Despair  dwelt  so  near,  they  keeping  in  the  road,  a 
little  child  might  lead  them. 

So  Mr.   Great-heart,   old  Honest,  and  the  four  young  men  went 


to  go  up  to  Doubting  Castle,  to  look  for  Giant  Despair.  When 
they  came  at  the  castle  gate,  they  knocked  for  entrance  with  an 
unusual  noise.  At  that  the  old  giant  comes  to  the  gate,  and 
Diffidence  his  wife  follows.  Then  said  he,  Who  and  what  is  he 
that  is  so  hardy,  as  after  this  manner  to  molest  the  Giant  Despair? 
11 


162  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

Mr.  Great-heart  replied,  It  is  I,  Great-heart,  one  of  the  King  of 
the  Celestial  Country's  conductors  of  pilgrims  to  their  place ;  and 
I  demand  of  thee  that  thou  open  thy  gates  for  my  entrance. 
Prepare  thyself  also  to  fight,  for  I  am  come  to  take  away  thy 
head,  and  to  demolish  Doubting  Castle. 

Now  Giant  Despair,  because  he  was  a  giant,  thought  no  man 
could  overcome  him ;  and  again  thought  he,  Since  heretofore  I 
have  made  a  conquest  of  angels,  shall  Great-heart  make  me  afraid  ? 
So  he  harnessed  himself,  and  went  out.  He  had  a  cap  of  steel 
upon  his  head,  a  breastplate  of  fire  girded  to  him,  and  he  came 
out  in  iron  shoes,  with  a  great  club  in  his  hand.  Then  these  six 
men  made  up  to  him,  and  beset  him  behind  and  before  ;  also  when 
Diffidence  the  giantess  came  up  to  help  him,  old  Mr.  Honest  cut  her 
down  at  one  blow.  Then  they  fought  for  their  lives,  and  Giant 
Despair  was  brought  down  to  the  ground,  but  was  very  loath  to 
die.  He  struggled  hard,  and  had,  as  they  say,  as  many  lives  as  a 
cat ;  but  Great-heart  was  his  death,  for  he  left  him  not  till  he 
had  severed  his  head  from  his  shoulders.  Then  they  fell  to  demolishing 
Doubting  Castle,  and  that,  you  know,  might  with  ease  be  done, 
since  Giant  Despair  was  dead.  They  were  seven  days  in  destroying 
of  that ;  and  in  it  of  pilgrims  they  found  one  Mr.  Despondency, 
almost  starved  to  death,  and  one  Much-afraid,  his  daughter  :  these  two 
they  saved  alive.  But  it  would  have  made  you  wonder  to  have 
seen  the  dead  bodies  that  lay  here  and  there  in  the  castle-yard, 
and  how  full  of  dead  men's  bones  the  dungeon  was. 

When  Mr.  Great-heart  and  his  companions  had  performed  this 
exploit,  they  took  Mr.  Despondency,  and  his  daughter  Much-afraid, 
into  their  protection  ;  for  they  were  honest  people,  though  they 
were  prisoners  in  Doubting  Castle  to  that  tyrant  Giant  De- 
spair. They,  therefore,  I  say,  took  with  them  the  head  of  the 
giant  (for  his  body  they  had  buried  under  a  heap  of  stones),  and 
down  to  the  road  and  to  their  companions  they  came,  and  showed 
them  what  they  had  done.  Now,  when  Feeble-mind  and  Ready- 
to-halt  saw  that  it  was  the  head  of  Giant  Despair  indeed,  they 
were  very  jocund  and  merry.  Now  Christiana,  if  need  was,  could 
play  upon  the  viol,  and  her  daughter  Mercy  upon  the  lute ;  so 
since  they  were  so  merry  disposed,  she  played  them  a  lesson,  and 
Ready-to-halt  would  dance.  So  he  took  Despondency's  daughter, 
Much-afraid,  by  the  hand,  and  to  dancing  they  went  in  the  road. 
True,  he  could  not  dance  without  one  crutch  in  his  hand,  but,  I 
promise  you,  he  footed  it  'well  :  also  the  girl  was  to  be  commended, 
for  she  answered  the  music  handsomely. 

As  for  Mr.  Despondency,  the  music  was  not  so  much,  to 
him  ;  he  was  for  feeding  rather  than  dancing,  for  that  he  was  almost 


of  OtfftNT 


164  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

starved.  So  Christiana  gave  him  some  of  her  bottle  of  spirits  for 
present  relief,  and  then  prepared  him  something  to  eat ;  and  in  a 
little  time  the  old  gentleman  came  to  himself,  and  began  to  be 
finely  revived. 

When  these  men  had  thus  bravely  showed  themselves  against 
Doubting  Castle,  and  had  slain  Giant  Despair,  they  went  forward, 
and  went  on  till  they  came  to  the  Delectable  Mountains,  where 
Christian  and  Hopeful  refreshed  themselves  with  the  varieties  of  the 
place.  They  also  acquainted  themselves  with  the  Shepherds  there, 
who  welcomed  them,  as  they  had  done  Christian  before,  unto  the 
Delectable  Mountains. 

Now  the  Shepherds  seeing  so  great  a  train  follow  Mr.  Great- 
heart  (for  with  him  they  were  well  acquainted),  they  said  unto  him, 
Good  sir,  you  have  got  a  goodly  company  here.  You  are  welcome 
to  us  ;  for  we  have  for  the  feeble,  as  for  the  strong.  Our  Prince 
has  an  eye  to  what  is  done  to  the  least  of  these ;  therefore  in- 
firmity must  not  be  a  block  to  our  entertainment.  So  they  had 
them  to  the  palace  door,  and  then  said  unto  them,  Come  in,  Mr. 
Feeble-mind ;  Come  in,  Mr.  Ready-to-halt ;  Come  in,  Mr.  Des- 
pondency, and  Mrs.  Much-afraid  his  daughter.  These,  Mr.  Great- 
heart,  said  the  Shepherds  to  the  guide,  we  call  in  by  name,  for 
that  they  are  most  subject  to  draw  back  ;  but  as  for  you,  and  the 
rest  that  are  strong,  we  leave  you  to  your  wonted  liberty. 

So  the  feeble  and  weak  went  in,  and  Mr.  Great-heart  and  the 
rest  did  follow.  When  they  were  also  set  down,  the  Shepherds  said 
to  those  of  the  weaker  sort,  What  is  it  that  you  would  have  ?  for, 
said  they,  all  things  must  be  managed  here  for  the  supporting  of 
the  weak,  as  well  as  to  the  warning  of  the  unruly.  So  they  made 
them  a  feast  of  things  easy  of  digestion,  and  that  were  pleasant  to 
the  palate  and  nourishing ;  the  which,  when  they  had  received, 
they  went  to  their  rest,  each  one  respectively  unto  his  proper 
place. 

When  morning  was  come,  because  the  mountains  were  high 
and  the  day  clear,  and  because  it  was  the  custom  of  the  Shepherds 
to  show  the  pilgrims  before  the  departure  some  rarities,  therefore 
after  they  were  ready,  and  had  refreshed  themselves,  the  Shepherds 
took  them  out  into  the  fields,  and  showed  them  first  what  they 
had  shown  to  Christian  before. 

Then  they  had  them  to  some  new  places.  The  first  was 
Mount  Marvel,  where  they  looked,  and  beheld  a  man  at  a  distance, 
that  tumbled  the  hills  about  with  words.  Then  they  asked  the 
Shepherds  what  that  should  mean.  So  they  told  them,  that  that 
man  was  the  son  of  one  Mr.  Great-grace  ;  and  he  is  set  there  to 
teach  pilgrims  how  to  believe  down,  or  to  tumble  out  of  their 


166  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

ways,    what    difficulties    they    should    meet    with,    by    faith.      Then 
said  Mr.  Great-heart,  I  know  him  :  he  is  a  man  above  many. 

Then  they  had  them  to  another  place,  call  Mount  Innocence. 
And  there  they  saw  a  man  clothed  all  in  white ;  and  two  men, 
Prejudice  and  Ill-will,  continually  casting  dirt  upon  him.  Now, 
behold,  the  dirt,  whatsoever  they  cast  at  him,  would  in  a  little 
time  fall  off  again,  and  his  garment  would  look  as  clear  as  if  no 
dirt  had  been  cast  thereat.  Then  said  the  pilgrims,  What  means 
this  ?  The  Shepherds  answered,  This  man  is  named  Godly-man, 
and  this  garment  is  to  show  the  innocency  of  his  life.  Now,  those 
that  throw  dirt  at  him  are  such  as  hate  his  well-doing ;  but,  as  you 
see  the  dirt  will  not  stick  upon  his  clothes,  so  it  shall  be  with 
him  that  liveth  innocently  in  the  world.  Whoever  they  be  that 
would  make  such  men  dirty,  they  labour  all  in  vain ;  for  God, 
by  that  a  little  time  is  spent,  will  cause  that  their  innocence  shall 
break  forth  as  the  light,  and  their  righteousness  as  the  noonday. 

Now  when  the  Shepherds  had  shown  them  all  these  things, 
then  they  had  them  back  to  the  palace,  and  entertained  them  with 
what  the  house  would  afford.  But  Mercy,  being  young,  longed  for 
something  that  she  saw  there,  but  was  ashamed  to  ask.  Her 
mother-in-law  then  asked  her  what  she  ailed,  for  she  looked  as  one 
not  well.  Then  said  Mercy,  There  is  a  looking-glass  hangs  up  in 
the  dining-room,  off  which  I  cannot  take  my  mind.  Then  said 
her  mother,  I  will  mention  thy  wants  to  the  Shepherds,  and  they 
will  not  deny  it  thee.  But  she  said,  I  am  ashamed  that  these 
men  should  know  that  I  longed.  Nay,  my  daughter,  said  she,  it 
is  no  shame,  but  a  virtue  to  long  for  such  a  thing  as  that.  So 
Mercy  said,  Then,  mother,  if  you  please,  ask  the  Shepherds  if  they 
are  willing  to  sell  it. 

Now  the  glass  was  one  of  a  thousand.  It  would  present  a  man, 
one  way,  with  his  own  features  exactly  ;  and,  turn  it  but  another 
way,  and  it  would  show  one  the  very  face  and  similitude  of  the 
Prince  of  pilgrims  himself.  Yes,  I  have  talked  with  them  that  can 
tell,  and  they  have  said  that  they  have  seen  the  very  crown  of 
thorns  upon  his  head,  by  looking  in  that  glass  ;  they  have  therein 
also  seen  the  holes  in  his  hands,  his  feet,  and  his  side.  Yea,  such 
an  excellency  is  there  in  this  glass,  that  it  will  show  him  to  one 
where  they  have  a  mind  to  see  him,  whether  living  or  dead ; 
whether  in  earth  or  in  heaven. 

Christiana  therefore  went  to  the  Shepherds  apart  (now  the 
names  of  the  Shepherds  were  Knowledge,  Experience,  Watchful, 
and  Sincere),  and  said  unto  them,  There  is  one  of  my  daughters 
that  I  think  doth  long  for  something  that  she  hath  seen  in  this 
house. 


THE   DEATH   OF   GIANT  DESPAIR 


167 


Experience.  Call  her,  call  her ;  she  shall  assuredly  have  what 
we  can  help  her  to.  So  they  called  her,  and  said  to  her,  Mercy, 
what  is  that  thing  thou  wouldst  have  ?  Then  she  blushed,  and 
said,  The  great  glass  that  hangs  up  in  the  dining-room.  So  Sincere  ran 
and  fetched  it,  and  with  a  joyful  consent  it  was  given  her.  Then 


she  bowed  her  head,  and  gave  thanks,  and  said,  By  this  I  know 
that  I  have  obtained  favour  in  your  eyes. 

They  also  gave  to  the  other  young  women  such  things  as  they 
desired,  and  to  their  husbands  great  commendations,  for  that  they 
had  joined  with  Mr.  Great-heart  in  the  slaying  of  Giant  Despair, 
and  the  demolishing  of  Doubting  Castle. 

About   Christiana's   neck  the   Shepherds   put   a   bracelet,   and   so 


168  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

did  they  about  the  necks  of  her  four  daughters ;  also  they  put 
earrings  in  their  ears,  and  jewels  on  their  foreheads. 

When  they  were  minded  to  go  hence,  they  let  them  go  in 
peace,  but  gave  not  to  them  those  certain  cautions  which  before 
were  given  to  Christian  and  his  companion.  The  reason  was,  for  that 
these  had  Great-heart  to  be  their  guide,  who  was  one  that  was  well 
acquainted  with  things,  and  so  could  give  them  their  cautions  more 
seasonably,  to  wit,  even  when  the  danger  was  nigh  the  approaching. 

Then  they  went  on  ;  and  just  at  the  place  where  Little-faith 
formerly  was  robbed,  there  stood  a  man  with  his  sword  drawn,  and 
his  face  all  over  with  blood.  Then  said  Mr.  Great-heart,  Who 
art  thou  ?  The  man  made  answer,  saying,  I  am  one  whose  name  is 
Valiant-for-truth.  I  am  a  pilgrim,  and  am  going  to  the  Celestial 
City.  Now,  as  I  was  in  my  way,  there  were  three  men  did  beset 
me,  and  propounded  unto  me  these  three  things  :  1.  Whether  I 
would  become  one  of  them  ;  2.  Or  go  back  from  whence  I  came  ; 
3.  Or  die  upon  the  place.  To  the  first  I  answered,  I  had  been  a 
true  man  for  a  long  season,  and  therefore  it  could  not  be  expected 
that  I  should  now  cast  in  my  lot  with  thieves.  Then  they  demanded 
what  I  should  say  to  the  second.  So  I  told  them,  the  place  from 
whence  I  came,  had  I  not  found  incommodity  there,  I  had  not 
forsaken  it  at  all ;  but  finding  it  altogether  unsuitable  to  me,  I 
forsook  it  for  this  way.  Then  they  asked  me  what  I  said  to  the 
third.  And  I  told  them,  my  life  cost  far  more  dear  than  that  I 
should  lightly  give  it  away.  Besides,  you  have  nothing  to  do  thus 
to  put  things  to  my  choice  ;  wherefore  at  your  peril  be  it  if  you 
meddle.  Then  these  three— to  wit,  Wild-head,  Inconsiderate,  and 
Pragmatic  -  drew  upon  me,  and  I  also  drew  upon  them.  So  we 
fell  to  it,  one  against  three,  for  the  space  of  above  three  hours. 
They  have  left  upon  me,  as  you  see,  some  of  the  marks  of  their 
valour,  and  have  also  carried  away  with  them  some  of  mine. 
They  are  but  just  now  gone  :  I  suppose  they  might,  as  the  saying 
is,  hear  your  horse  dash,  and  so  they  betook  themselves  to  flight. 

Great.    But  here  was  great  odds,  three  against  one. 

Valiant.  'Tis  true  ;  but  little  or  more  are  nothing  to  him  that 
has  the  truth  on  his  side.  "Though  an  host  should  encamp 
against  me,"  said  one,  "  my  heart  shall  not  fear." 

Great.  Then  said  Great-heart  to  Mr.  Valiant-for-truth,  Thou 
hast  worthily  behaved  thyself;  let  me  see  thy  sword.  So  he 
showed  it  him. 

When  he  had  taken  it  in  his  hand,  and  looked  thereon  a 
while,  he  said,  Ha  !  it  is  a  right  Jerusalem  blade. 

Valiant.  It  is  so.  Let  a  man  have  one  of  these  blades,  with 
a  hand  to  wield  it  and  skill  to  use  it,  and  he  might  venture  upon 


THE   DEATH   OF   GIANT  DESPAIR 


169 


an  angel  with  it.  He  need  not  fear  its  holding,  if  he  can  but  tell 
how  to  lay  on.  Its  edge  will  never  blunt.  It  will  cut  flesh  and 
bones,  and  soul  and  spirit,  and  all. 

Great.  But  you  fought  a  great  while ;  I  wonder  you  was  not 
weary. 

Valiant.  I  fought  till  my  sword  did  cleave  to  my  hand  ;  and 
when  they  were  joined  together  as  if  a  sword  grew  out  of  my 
arm,  and  when  the  blood  ran  through  my  fingers,  then  I  fought 
with  most  courage. 

Great.  Thou  hast  done  well.  Thou  hast  resisted  unto  blood, 
striving  against  sin.  Thou  shalt  abide  by  us,  come  in  and  go  out 
with  us  ;  for  we  are  thy  companions. 

Then  they  took  him  and  washed  his  wounds,  and  gave  him  of 
what  they  had  to  refresh  him ;  and  so  they  went  on  together, 
singing— 

Who  would  true  valour  see, 

Let  him  come  hither  ; 
One  here  will  constant  be, 

Come  wind,  come  weather  ; 
There's  no  discouragement 
Shall  make  him  once  relent 
His  first  avowed  intent 
To  be  a  pilgrim. 

Whoso  beset  him  round 

With  dismal  stories, 
Do  but  themselves  confound  ; 

His  strength  the  more  is. 
No  lion  can  him  fright, 
He'll  with  a  giant  fight, 
But  he  will  have  a  right 
To  be  a  pilgrim. 

Hobgoblin  nor  foul  fiend 

Can  daunt  his  spirit ; 
He  knows  he  at  the  end 

Shall  life  inherit. 
Then  fancies  fly  away  ; 
He'll  not  fear  what  men  say  ; 
He'll  labour  night  and  day 
To  be  a  pilgrim. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE   ENCHANTED    GROUND 

BY  this  time  they  were  got  to  the  Enchanted  Ground,  where 
the  air  naturally  tended  to  make  one  drowsy. 
And  that  place  was  all  grown  over  with  briers  and 
thorns,  excepting  here  and  there,  where  was  an  enchanted  arbour, 
upon  which  if  a  man  sits,  or  in  which  if  a  man  sleeps,  it  is  a 
question,  some  say,  whether  ever  he  shall  rise  or  wake  again  in 
this  world.  Over  this  forest,  therefore,  they  went,  both  one  and 
another,  and  Mr.  Great-heart  went  before,  for  that  he  was  the 
guide ;  and  Mr.  Valiant-for-truth  came  behind,  being  rear-guard,  for 
fear  lest  peradventure  some  fiend,  or  dragon,  or  giant,  or  thief, 
should  fall  upon  their  rear,  and  so  do  mischief.  They  went  on  here, 
each  man  with  his  sword  drawn  in  his  hand ;  for  they  knew  it 
was  a  dangerous  place.  Also  they  cheered  up  one  another  as  well 
as  they  could.  Feeble-mind,  Mr.  Great-heart  commanded  should 
come  up  after  him  ;  and  Mr.  Despondency  was  under  the  eye  of 
Mr.  Valiant. 

Now  they  had  not  gone  far,  but  a  great  mist  and  darkness 
fell  upon  them  all ;  so  that  they  could  scarce,  for  a  great  while, 
see  the  one  the  other.  Wherefore  they  were  forced,  for  some  time, 
to  feel  for  one  another  by  words  ;  for  they  walked  not  by  sight. 
But  any  one  must  think  that  here  was  but  sorry  going  for  the 
best  of  them  all  ;  but  how  much  worse  for  the  women  and  children, 
who  both  of  feet  and  heart  were  but  tender !  Yet  so  it  was, 
that  through  the  encouraging  words  of  him  that  led  in  the  front, 
and  of  him  that  brought  them  up  behind,  they  made  a  pretty 
good  shift  to  wag  along. 

The  way  was  also  here  very  wearisome,  through  dirt  and 
slabbiness.  Nor  was  there,  on  all  this  ground,  so  much  as  one 
inn  or  victualling-house  wherein  to  refresh  the  feebler  sort.  Here, 
therefore,  was  nothing  but  grunting,  and  puffing,  and  sighing. 
While  one  tumbleth  over  a  bush,  another  sticks  fast  in  the  dirt  ; 
and  the  children,  some  of  them,  lost  their  shoes  in  the  mire ; 
-while  one  cries  out,  I  am  down ;  and  another,  Ho,  where  are 

170 


THE   ENCHANTED   GROUND  171 

you  ?  and  a  third,  The  bushes  have  got  such  a  fast  hold  on  me, 
I  think  I  cannot  get  away  from  them. 

Then  they  came  at  an  arbour,  warm,  and  promising  much 
refreshing  to  the  pilgrims ;  for  it  was  finely  wrought  above- 
head,  beautified  with  greens,  furnished  with  benches  and  settles. 
It  also  had  in  it  a  soft  couch,  whereon  the  weary  might  lean. 
This,  you  must  think,  all  things  considered,  was  tempting ;  for 
the  pilgrims  already  began  to  be  foiled  with  the  badness  of  the 
way.  But  there  was  not  one  of  them  that  made  so  much  as 
a  motion  to  stop  there. 

This  arbour  was  called  The  Slothful's  Friend,  and  was  made 
on  purpose  to  allure,  if  it  might  be,  some  of  the  pilgrims  there 
to  take  up  their  rest  when  weary. 

I  saw  then  in  my  dream,  that  they  went  on  in  this  their 
solitary  ground,  till  they  came  to  a  place  at  which  a  man  is 
apt  to  lose  his  way.  Now,  though  when  it  was  light  their  guide 
could  well  enough  tell  how  to  miss  those  ways  that  led  wrong, 
yet  in  the  dark  he  was  put  to  a  stand.  But  he  had  in  his 
pocket  a  map  of  all  ways  leading  to  or  from  the  Celestial  City ; 
wherefore  he  struck  a  light  (for  he  never  goes,  also,  without  his 
tinder-box),  and  takes  a  view  of  his  book  or  map,  which  bids 
him  to  be  careful  in  that  place  to  turn  to  the  right  hand.  And 
had  he  not  been  careful  here  to  look  in  his  map,  they  had, 
in  all  probability,  been  smothered  in  the  mud ;  for  just  a  little 
before  them,  and  that  at  the  end  of  the  cleanest  way  too,  was 
a  pit,  none  knows  how  deep,  full  of  nothing  but  mud,  there 
made  on  purpose  to  destroy  the  pilgrims  in. 

Then  they  went  on  in  this  Enchanted  Ground,  till  they 
came  to  where  there  was  another  arbour,  and  it  was  built  by 
the  highway  side.  And  in  that  arbour  there  lay  two  men,  whose 
names  were  Heedless  and  Too-bold.  These  two  went  thus  far 
on  pilgrimage ;  but  here,  being  wearied  with  their  journey,  they 
sat  down  to  rest  themselves,  and  so  fell  fast  asleep.  When  the 
pilgrims  saw  them,  they  stood  still,  and  shook  their  heads,  for  they 
knew  that  the  sleepers  were  in  a  pitiful  case.  Then  they  consulted 
what  to  do,  whether  to  go  on  and  leave  them  in  their  sleep, 
or  to  step  to  them  and  try  to  awake  them.  So  they  concluded 
to  go  to  them  and  awake  them  — that  is,  if  they  could :  but 
with  this  caution,  namely,  to  take  heed  that  they  themselves 
did  not  sit  down,  nor  embrace  the  offered  benefit  of  that  arbour. 

So  they  went  in  and  spake  to  the  men,  and  called  each  one 
by  his  name  (for  the  guide,  it  seems,  did  know  them)  ;  but  there 
was  no  voice  nor  answer.  Then  the  guide  did  shake  them,  and 
do  what  he  could  to  disturb  them.  Then  said  one  of  them, 


172  THE  PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

I  will  pay  you  when  I  take  my  money.  At  which  the  guide 
shook  his  head.  I  will  fight  so  long  as  I  can  hold  my  sword 
in  my  hand,  said  the  other.  At  that  one  of  the  children  laughed. 

Then  said  Christiana,  What  is  the  meaning  of  this  ?  The 
guide  said,  They  talk  in  their  sleep.  If  you  strike  them,  beat 
them,  or  whatever  else  you  do  to  them,  they  will  answer  you 
after  this  fashion. 

Then  the  pilgrims  desired  with  trembling  to  go  forward ; 
only  they  prayed  their  guide  to  strike  a  light,  that  they  might 
go  the  rest  of  their  way  by  the  help  of  the  light  of  a  lantern. 
So  he  struck  a  light,  and  they  went  by  the  help  of  that  through 
the  rest  of  this  way,  though  the  darkness  was  very  great.  But 
the  children  began  to  be  sorely  weary,  and  they  cried  out  unto 
Him  that  loveth  pilgrims  to  make  their  way  more  comfortable. 
So  by  that  they  had  gone  a  little  further,  a  wind  arose  that 
drove  away  the  fog ;  so  the  air  became  more  clear.  Yet  they 
were  not  off  (by  much)  of  the  Enchanted  Ground  ;  only  now 
they  could  see  one  another  better,  and  the  way  wherein  they 
should  walk. 

Now  when  they  were  almost  at  the  end  of  this  ground,  they 
perceived  that  a  little  before  them  was  a  solemn  noise,  as  of 
one  that  was  much  concerned.  So  they  went  on,  and  looked 
before  them ;  and,  behold,  they  saw,  as  they  thought,  a  man 
upon  his  knees,  with  his  hands  and  eyes  lifted  up,  and  speaking, 
as  they  thought,  earnestly  to  one  that  was  above.  They  drew 
nigh,  but  could  not  tell  what  he  said  ;  so  they  went  softly  till 
he  had  done. 

When  he  had  done,  he  got  up,  and  began  to  run  towards 
the  Celestial  City.  Then  Mr.  Great-heart  called  after  him,  saying, 
Soho,  friend  !  let  us  have  your  company,  if  you  go,  as  I  suppose 
you  do,  to  the  Celestial  City.  So  the  man  stopped,  and  they 
came  up  to  him.  But  as  soon  as  Mr.  Honest  saw  him,  he  said, 
I  know  this  man.  Then  said  Mr.  Valiant-for-truth,  Pr'ythee,  who 
is  it  ?  It  is  one,  said  he,  that  comes  from  whereabout  I  dwelt. 
His  name  is  Standfast ;  he  is  certainly  a  right  good  pilgrim. 

So  they  came  up  one  to  another.  And  presently  Stand- 
fast said  to  old  Honest,  Ho,  father  Honest,  are  you  there  ? 
Ay,  said  he,  that  am  I,  as  sure  as  you  are  there.  Right  glad  I  am, 
said  Mr.  Standfast,  that  I  have  found  you  on  this  road.  And 
as  glad  am  I,  said  the  other,  that  I  espied  you  on  your  knees. 
Then  Mr.  Standfast  blushed,  and  said,  But  why,  did  you  see 
me  ?  Yes,  that  I  did,  quoth  the  other,  and  with  my  heart  was 
glad  at  the  sight. 

Valiant.    Well,    but,    brother,    I    pray    thee    tell    us    what    was 


THE   ENCHANTED   GROUND  173 

it  that  was  the  cause  of  thy  being  upon  thy  knees  even  now ; 
was  it  for  that  some  special  mercy  laid  obligations  upon  thee, 
or  how  ? 

Stand.  Why,  we  are,  as  you  see,  upon  the  Enchanted  Ground  ; 
and  as  I  was  coming  along,  I  was  musing  with  myself  of  what  a 
dangerous  nature  the  road  in  this  place  was,  and  how  many  that  had 
come  even  thus  far  on  pilgrimage  had  here  been  stopped  and  been 
destroyed.  As  I  was  thus  musing,  there  was  one  in  very  pleasant  attire, 
but  old,  who  presented  herself  to  me,  and  offered  me  her  purse 
and  her  bed.  Now,  the  truth  is,  I  was  both  weary  and  sleepy ; 
I  am  also  as  poor  as  an  owlet,  and  that  perhaps  the  witch  knew. 
Well,  I  repulsed  her  once  and  again ;  but  she  put  by  my  re- 
pulses, and  smiled.  Then  I  began  to  be  angry  ;  but  she  mattered 
that  nothing  at  all.  Then  I  asked  her  name,  and  she  told  me 
it  was  Madam  Bubble.  This  set  me  further  from  her ;  but  still 
she  followed  me  with  enticements.  Then  I  betook  me,  as  you 
saw,  to  my  knees,  and  with  hands  lifted  up,  and  cries,  I  prayed 
to  Him  that  had  said  he  would  help.  So,  just  as  you  came  up, 
the  gentlewoman  went  her  way.  Then  I  continued  to  give  thanks 
for  this  my  great  deliverance ;  for  I  verily  believe  she  intended 
no  good,  but  rather  sought  to  make  stop  of  me  in  my  journey. 

Hon.  Madam  Bubble !  is  she  not  a  tall,  comely  dame,  some- 
what of  a  swarthy  complexion  ? 

Stand.    Right,   you  hit  it ;    she  is  just  such  a  one. 

Hon.  Doth  she  not  speak  very  smoothly,  and  give  you  a 
smile  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  ? 

Stand.  You  fall  right  upon  it  again,  for  these  are  her  very 
actions. 

Hon.  Doth  she  not  wear  a  great  purse  by  her  side,  and  is 
not  her  hand  often  in  it,  fingering  her  money,  as  if  that  was  her 
heart's  delight  ? 

Stand.  'Tis  just  so ;  had  she  stood  by  all  this  while,  you 
could  not  more  amply  have  set  her  forth  before  me,  nor  have 
better  described  her  features. 

Great.  This  woman  is  a  witch,  and  it  is  by  virtue  of  her 
sorceries  that  this  ground  is  enchanted.  Whoever  doth  lay  his 
head  down  in  her  lap  had  as  good  lay  it  down  on  that  block 
over  which  the  axe  doth  hang. 

Stand.  Oh !  said  Standfast,  what  a  mercy  is  it  that  I  did 
resist  her ;  for  whither  might  she  have  drawn  me ! 


CHAPTER  X 

THE    KING'S    MESSENGER 

AFTER  this,  I  beheld  until  they  were  come  into  the  land 
of  Beulah,  where  the  sun  shineth  night  and  day.  Here, 
because  they  were  weary,  they  betook  themselves  awhile  to 
rest.  And  because  this  country  was  common  for  pilgrims,  and 
because  the  orchards  and  vineyards  that  were  here  belonged  to 
the  King  of  the  Celestial  Country,  therefore  they  were  licensed 
to  make  bold  with  any  of  his  things.  But  a  little  while  soon 
refreshed  them  here ;  for  the  bells  did  so  ring,  and  the  trumpets 
continually  sound  so  melodiously,  that  they  could  not  sleep, 
and  yet  they  received  as  much  refreshing  as  if  they  had  slept 
their  sleep  ever  so  soundly.  Here  also  the  noise  of  them  that 
walked  the  streets  was,  More  pilgrims  have  come  to  town !  And 
another  would  answer,  saying,  And  so  many  went  over  the  water, 
and  were  let  in  at  the  golden  gates  to-day !  They  would  cry 
again,  There  is  now  a  legion  of  Shining  Ones  just  come  to  town, 
by  which  we  know  that  there  are  more  pilgrims  upon  the  road  ; 
for  here  they  come  to  wait  for  them,  and  to  comfort  them  after 
their  sorrow.  Then  the  pilgrims  got  up,  and  walked  to  and  fro. 
But  how  were  their  ears  now  filled  with  heavenly  voices,  and  their 
eyes  delighted  with  celestial  visions !  In  this  land  they  heard 
nothing,  saw  nothing,  felt  nothing,  smelt  nothing,  tasted  nothing, 
that  was  offensive  to  their  stomach  or  mind ;  only  when  they 
tasted  of  the  water  of  the  river  over  which  they  were  to  go, 
they  thought  that  it  tasted  a  little  bitterish  to  the  palate ;  but 
it  proved  sweet  when  it  was  down. 

In  this  place  there  was  a  record  kept  of  the  names  of  them 
that  had  been  pilgrims  of  old,  and  a  history  of  all  the  famous 
acts  that  they  had  done.  It  was  here  also  much  discoursed, 
how  the  river  to  some  had  had  its  flowings,  and  what  ebbings 
it  has  had  while  others  have  gone  over.  It  has  been  in  a  manner 
dry  for  some,  while  it  has  overflowed  its  banks  for  others. 

In  this  place  the  children  of  the  town  would  go  into  the 
King's  gardens,  and  gather  nosegays  for  the  pilgrims,  and  bring 

174 


THE   KING'S   MESSENGER  175 

them  to  them  with  much  affection.  Here  also  grew  camphire, 
with  spikenard  and  saffron,  calamus,  and  cinnamon,  with  all  the 
trees  of  frankincense,  myrrh,  and  aloes,  with  all  chief  spices. 
With  these  the  pilgrims'  chambers  were  perfumed  while  they 
stayed  here ;  and  with  these  were  their  bodies  anointed,  to  pre- 
pare them  to  go  over  the  river  when  the  time  appointed  was  come. 

Now,  while  they  lay  here  and  waited  for  the  good  hour, 
there  was  a  noise  in  the  town  that  there  was  a  post  come  from 
the  Celestial  City,  with  matter  of  great  importance  to  one  Chris- 
tiana, the  wife  of  Christian  the  pilgrim.  So  inquiry  was  made 
for  her,  and  the  house  was  found  out  where  she  was.  So  the 
post  presented  her  with  a  letter.  The  contents  were,  Hail,  good 
woman !  I  bring  thee  tidings  that  the  Master  calleth  for  thee, 
and  expecteth  that  thou  shouldest  stand  in  his  presence,  in  clothes 
of  immortality,  within  these  ten  days. 

When  he  had  read  this  letter  to  her,  he  gave  her  therewith 
a  sure  token  that  he  was  a  true  messenger,  and  was  come  to 
bid  her  make  haste  to  be  gone.  The  token  was  an  arrow  with 
a  point  sharpened  with  love,  let  easily  into  her  heart,  which 
by  degrees  wrought  so  effectually  with  her,  that  at  the  time  ap- 
pointed she  must  be  gone. 

When  Christiana  saw  that  her  time  was  come,  and  that  she 
was  the  first  of  this  company  that  was  to  go  over,  she  called 
for  Mr.  Great-heart,  her  guide,  and  told  him  how  matters  were. 
So  he  told  her  he  was  heartily  glad  of  the  news,  and  could 
have  been  glad  had  the  post  come  for  him.  Then  she  bid  him 
that  he  should  give  advice  how  all  things  should  be  prepared 
for  her  journey.  So  he  told  her,  saying,  Thus  and  thus  it  must 
be,  and  we  that  survive  will  accompany  you  to  the  river  side. 

Then  she  called  for  her  children,  and  gave  them  her  blessing, 
and  told  them  that  she  had  read  with  comfort  the  mark  that  was 
set  in  their  foreheads,  and  was  glad  to  see  them  with  her  there, 
and  that  they  had  kept  their  garments  so  white.  Lastly,  she 
bequeathed  to  the  poor  that  little  she  had,  and  commanded  her 
sons  and  daughters  to  be  ready  against  the  messenger  should  come 
for  them. 

WThen  she  had  spoken  these  words  to  her  guide  and  to  her 
children,  she  called  for  Mr.  Valiant-for-truth,  and  said  unto  him, 
Sir,  you  have  in  all  places  showed  yourself  true-hearted  ;  be  faith- 
ful unto  death,  and  my  King  will  give  you  a  crown  of  life.  I 
would  also  entreat  you  to  have  an  eye  to  my  children  ;  and  if 
at  any  time  you  see  them  faint,  speak  comfortably  to  them.  But 
she  gave  Mr.  Standfast  a  ring. 

Then  she  called  for  old  Mr.  Honest,   and  said  of  him,   "Behold 


1T6  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

an  Israelite  indeed,  in  whom  is  no  guile."  Then  said  he,  I  wish 
you  a  fair  day  when  you  set  out  for  Mount  Zion,  and  shall  be 
glad  to  see  that  you  go  over  the  river  dryshod.  But  she  answered, 
Come  wet,  come  dry,  I  long  to  be  gone  ;  for  however  the  weather 
is  in  my  journey,  I  shall  have  time  enough  when  I  come  there  to 
sit  down  and  rest  me  and  dry  me. 

Then  came  in  that  good  man  Mr.  Ready-to-halt,  to  see  her. 
So  she  said  to  him,  Thy  travel  hitherto  has  been  with  difficulty  ; 
but  that  will  make  thy  rest  the  sweeter.  Watch,  and  be  ready  ; 
for  at  an  hour  when  ye  think  not,  the  messenger  may  come. 

After  him  came  Mr.  Despondency  and  his  daughter  Much- 
afraid  ;  to  whom  she  said,  You  ought  with  thankfulness  for  ever 
to  remember  your  deliverance  from  the  hands  of  Giant  Despair, 
and  out  of  Doubting  Castle.  The  effect  of  that  mercy  is  that 
you  are  brought  with  safety  hither.  Be  ye  watchful,  and  cast  away 
fear  ;  be  sober,  and  hope  to  the  end. 

Then  she  said  to  Mr.  Feeble-mind,  Thou  wast  delivered  from 
the  mouth  of  Giant  Slay-good,  that  thou  mightest  live  in  the  light 
of  the  living,  and  see  thy  King  with  comfort.  Only  I  advise  thee 
to  repent  of  thine  aptness  to  fear  and  doubt  of  his  goodness, 
before  he  sends  for  thee ;  lest  thou  shouldest,  when  he  comes,  be 
forced  to  stand  before  him  for  that  fault  with  blushing. 

Now  the  day  drew  on  that  Christiana  must  be  gone.  So  the 
road  was  full  of  people  to  see  her  take  her  journey.  But,  behold, 
all  the  banks  beyond  the  river  were  full  of  horses  and  chariots, 
which  were  come  down  from  above  to  accompany  her  to  the  city 
gate.  So  she  came  forth  and  entered  the  river,  with  a  beckon  of 
farewell  to  those  that  followed  her.  The  last  words  that  she  was 
heard  to  say  were,  I  come,  Lord,  to  be  with  thee,  and  bless  thee. 
So  her  children  and  friends  returned  to  their  places,  for  those  that 
waited  for  Christiana  had  carried  her  out  of  their  sight.  At  her 
departure  the  children  wept.  But  Mr.  Great-heart  and  Mr.  Valiant 
played  upon  the  well-tuned  cymbal  and  harp  for  joy.  So  all  de- 
parted to  their  respective  places. 

In  process  of  time  there  came  a  post  to  the  town  again,  and 
his  business  was  with  Mr.  Ready-to-halt.  So  he  inquired  him  out, 
and  said,  I  am  come  from  Him  whom  thou  hast  loved  and  followed, 
though  upon  crutches  ;  and  my  message  is  to  tell  thee  that  he 
expects  thee  at  his  table  to  sup  with  him  in  his  kingdom,  wherefore 
prepare  thyself  for  this  journey.  Then  he  also  gave  him  a  token 
that  he  was  a  true  messenger,  saying,  "  I  have  broken  thy  golden 
bowl,  and  loosed  thy  silver  cord." 

After  this,  Mr.  Ready-to-halt  called  for  his  fellow-pilgrims, 
and  told  them,  saying,  I  am  sent  for,  and  God  shall  surely  visit 


12 


178  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

you  also.  So  he  desired  Mr.  Valiant  to  make  his  will.  And  because 
he  had  nothing  to  bequeath  to  them  that  should  survive  him 
but  his  crutches  and  his  good  wishes,  therefore  thus  he  said, 
These  crutches  I  bequeath  to  my  son  that  shall  tread  in  my  steps, 
with  an  hundred  warm  wishes  that  he  may  prove  better  than  I 
have  been.  Then  he  thanked  Mr.  Great-heart  for  his  conduct  and 
kindness,  and  so  addressed  himself  to  his  journey.  When  he  came 
to  the  brink  of  the  river,  he  said,  Now  I  shall  have  no  more 
need  of  these  crutches,  since  yonder  are  chariots  and  horses  for  me 
to  ride  on.  The  last  words  he  was  heard  to  say  were,  Welcome 
life  !  So  he  went  his  way. 

After  this,  Mr.  Feeble-mind  had  tidings  brought  him  that  the 
post  sounded  his  horn  at  his  chamber  door.  Then  he  came  in, 
and  told  him,  saying,  I  am  come  to  tell  thee  that  thy  Master  hath 
need  of  thee,  and  that  in  a  very  little  time  thou  must  behold  his 
face  in  brightness.  And  take  this  as  a  token  of  the  truth  of  my 
message  :  "  Those  that  look  out  at  the  windows  shall  be  darkened." 
Then  Mr.  Feeble-mind  called  for  his  friends,  and  told  them  what 
errand  had  been  brought  unto  him,  and  what  token  he  had  re- 
ceived of  the  truth  of  the  message.  This  done,  and  the  day  being 
come  on  which  he  was  to  depart,  he  entered  the  river  as  the  rest. 
His  last  words  were,  Hold  out,  faith  and  patience !  So  he  went 
over  to  the  other  side. 

When  days  had  many  of  them  passed  away,  Mr.  Despondency 
was  sent  for ;  for  a  post  was  come,  and  brought  this  message  to 
him  :  Trembling  man  !  these  are  to  summon  thee  to  be  ready 
with  the  King  by  the  next  Lord's  day,  to  shout  for  joy  for  thy 
deliverance  from  all  thy  doubtings.  And,  said  the  messenger, 
that  my  message  is  true,  take  this  for  a  proof :  so  he  gave  him 
a  grasshopper  to  be  a  burden  unto  him. 

Now  Mr.  Despondency's  daughter,  whose  name  was  Much-afraid, 
said,  when  she  heard  what  was  done,  that  she  would  go  with  her 
father. 

When  the  time  was  come  for  them  to  depart,  they  went  up  to 
the  brink  of  the  river.  The  last  words  of  Mr.  Despondency  were, 
Farewell  night  ;  welcome  day  !  His  daughter  went  through  the  river 
singing,  but  no  one  could  understand  what  she  said. 

Then  it  came  to  pass,  a  while  after,  that  there  was  a  post  in 
the  town  that  inquired  for  Mr.  Honest.  So  he  came  to  the  house 
where  he  was,  and  delivered  to  his  hand  these  lines  :  Thou  art 
commanded  to  be  ready  against  this  day  seven-night,  to  present 
thyself  before  thy  Lord,  at  his  Father's  house.  And  for  a  token 
that  my  message  is  true,  "  All  thy  daughters  of  music  shall  be 
brought  low."  Then  Mr.  Honest  called  for  his  friends,  and  said 


CttgjgT|ANR  BlfrS'-F/lRgWELL.  A1.  THE 


THE   KING'S   MESSENGER  179 

unto  them,  I  die,  but  shall  make  no  will.  As  for  my  honesty,  it 
shall  go  with  me  ;  let  him  that  comes  after  be  told  of  this.  When 
the  day  that  he  was  to  be  gone  was  come,  he  addressed  himself  to 
go  over  the  river.  Now  the  river  at  that  time  overflowed  its 
banks  in  some  places  ;  but  Mr.  Honest  in  his  lifetime  had  spoken  to 
one  Good-conscience  to  meet  him  there,  the  which  he  also  did,  and 
lent  him  his  hand,  and  so  helped  him  over.  The  last  words  of 
Mr.  Honest  were,  Grace  reigns  !  So  he  left  the  world. 

After  this  it  was  noised  abroad  that  Mr.  Valiant-for-truth  was 
sent  for  by  a  summons  by  the  same  post  as  the  other,  and  had 
this  for  a  token  that  the  summons  was  true,  "  That  his  pitcher 
was  broken  at  the  fountain."  When  he  understood  it,  he  called 
for  his  friends,  and  told  them  of  it.  Then  said  he,  I  am  going 
to  my  Father's  ;  and  though  with  great  difficulty  I  have  got  hither, 
yet  now  I  do  not  repent  me  of  all  the  troubles  I  have  been  at  to 
arrive  where  I  am.  My  sword  I  give  to  him  that  shall  succeed 
me  in  my  pilgrimage,  and  my  courage  and  skill  to  him  that  can 
get  it.  My  marks  and  scars  I  carry  with  me  to  be  a  witness  for 
me  that  I  have  fought  His  battles  who  now  will  be  my  rewarder. 
When  the  day  that  he  must  go  hence  was  come,  many  accompanied 
him  to  the  river-side,  into  which  as  he  went  he  said,  "  Death, 
where  is  thy  sting  ?  ':  And  as  he  went  down  deeper,  he  said, 
"  Grave,  where  is  thy  victory  ?  ':  So  he  passed  over,  and  all  the 
trumpets  sounded  for  him  on  the  other  side. 

Then  there  came  forth  a  summons  for  Mr.  Standfast.  This 
Mr.  Standfast  was  he  whom  the  pilgrims  found  upon  his  knees  in 
the  Enchanted  Ground.  And  the  post  brought  it  him  open  in  his 
hands ;  the  contents  whereof  were  that  he  must  prepare  for  a 
change  of  life,  for  his  Master  was  not  willing  that  he  should  be  so 
far  from  him  any  longer.  At  this  Mr.  Standfast  was  put  into  a 
muse.  Nay,  said  the  messenger,  you  need  not  doubt  the  truth  of 
my  message,  for  here  is  a  token  of  the  truth  thereof :  "  Thy  wheel 
is  broken  at  the  cistern."  Then  he  called  to  him  Mr.  Great-heart, 
who  was  their  guide,  and  said  unto  him,  Sir,  although  it  was  not 
my  hap  to  be  much  in  your  good  company  in  the  days  of  my  pilgrim- 
age, yet,  since  the  time  I  knew  you,  you  have  been  profitable  to 
me.  When  I  came  from  home,  I  left  behind  me  a  wife  and  five 
small  children  ;  let  me  entreat  you  at  your  return  (for  I  know  that 
you  go  and  return  to  your  Master's  house,  in  hopes  that  you  may 
yet  be  a  conductor  to  more  of  the  holy  pilgrims),  that  you  send 
to  my  family,  and  let  them  be  acquainted  with  all  that  hath  and 
shall  happen  unto  me.  Tell  them,  moreover,  of  my  present 
blessed  condition,  and  of  my  happy  arrival  at  the  Celestial  City. 
When  Mr.  Standfast  had  thus  set  things  in  order,  and  the 


180  THE   PILGRIM'S   PROGRESS 

time  being  come  for  him  to  haste  him  away,  he  also  went  down 
to  the  river.  Now  there  was  a  great  calm  at  that  time  in  the 
river ;  wherefore  Mr.  Standfast,  when  he  was  about  half-way  in, 
stood  awhile,  and  talked  to  his  companions  that  had  waited  upon 
him  thither.  And  he  said,  This  river  has  been  a  terror  to  many ; 
yea,  the  thoughts  of  it  also  have  often  frightened  me.  Now 
methinks  I  stand  easy,  my  foot  is  fixed.  The  waters,  indeed,  are 
to  the  palate  bitter,  and  to  the  stomach  cold  ;  yet  the  thoughts  of 
what  I  am  going  to,  and  of  the  convoy  that  waits  for  me  on  the 
other  side,  lie  as  a  glowing  coal  at  my  heart.  I  see  myself  now 
at  the  end  of  my  journey  :  my  toilsome  days  are  ended. 

Now,  while  he  was  thus  in  discourse,  his  countenance  changed  ; 
his  strong  man  bowed  under  him :  and  after  he  had  said,  Take 
me,  for  I  come  unto  thee,  he  ceased  to  be  seen  of  them. 

But  glorious  it  was  to  see  how  the  upper  region  was  filled 
with  horses  and  chariots,  with  trumpeters  and  pipers,  with  singers 
and  players  on  stringed  instruments,  to  welcome  the  pilgrims  as 
they  went  up,  and  followed  one  another  in  at  the  beautiful  gate  of 
the  city. 

As  for  Christiana's  children,  the  four  boys  that  Christiana 
brought,  with  their  wives  and  children,  I  did  not  stay  where  I 
was  till  they  were  gone  over. 


THE    END 


Prinud  in  Oreat  Britain  by  Lla^ell,  H'Mon  <fc    \  liify,  Ld.,  Londin  and  Aylesbury,